AspenPhysPropModelsV7 2 Ref

Aspen Physical
Property System
Physical Property Models
Version Number: V7.2

July 2010
Copyright (c) 1981-2010 by Aspen Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
Aspen Physical Property System, the aspen leaf logo and Plantelligence and Enterprise Optimization are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Aspen Technology, Inc., Burlington, MA.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
This document is intended as a guide to using AspenTech's software. This documentation contains AspenTech
proprietary and confidential information and may not be disclosed, used, or copied without the prior consent of
AspenTech or as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Users are solely responsible for the proper use of
the software and the application of the results obtained.
Although AspenTech has tested the software and reviewed the documentation, the sole warranty for the software
may be found in the applicable license agreement between AspenTech and the user. ASPENTECH MAKES NO
WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENTATION,
ITS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Aspen Technology, Inc.
200 Wheeler Road
Burlington, MA 01803-5501
USA
Phone: (1) (781) 221-6400
Toll Free: (1) (888) 996-7001
URL: http://www.aspentech.com
Contents
Contents..................................................................................................................1
1 Introduction .........................................................................................................5
Units for Temperature-Dependent Parameters .....................................................6
Pure Component Temperature-Dependent Properties............................................7
Extrapolation Methods .................................................................................... 10
2 Thermodynamic Property Models .......................................................................11
Equation-of-State Models ................................................................................ 15
ASME Steam Tables.............................................................................. 16
BWR-Lee-Starling................................................................................. 16
Benedict-Webb-Rubin-Starling ............................................................... 17
GERG2008 Equation of State ................................................................. 20
Hayden-O'Connell ................................................................................ 22
HF Equation-of-State ............................................................................ 25
IAPWS-95 Steam Tables ....................................................................... 29
Ideal Gas ............................................................................................ 29
Lee-Kesler ........................................................................................... 29
Lee-Kesler-Plcker ............................................................................... 31
NBS/NRC Steam Tables ........................................................................ 32
Nothnagel ........................................................................................... 33
Copolymer PC-SAFT EOS Model.............................................................. 35
Peng-Robinson..................................................................................... 47
Standard Peng-Robinson ....................................................................... 49
Peng-Robinson-MHV2 ........................................................................... 50
Predictive SRK (PSRK) .......................................................................... 51
Peng-Robinson-Wong-Sandler................................................................ 51
Redlich-Kwong ..................................................................................... 51
Redlich-Kwong-Aspen ........................................................................... 52
Redlich-Kwong-Soave ........................................................................... 53
Redlich-Kwong-Soave-Boston-Mathias .................................................... 55
Redlich-Kwong-Soave-Wong-Sandler ...................................................... 56
Redlich-Kwong-Soave-MHV2.................................................................. 57
Schwartzentruber-Renon....................................................................... 57
Soave-Redlich-Kwong ........................................................................... 59
SRK-Kabadi-Danner.............................................................................. 61
SRK-ML............................................................................................... 63
VPA/IK-CAPE Equation-of-State ............................................................. 64
Peng-Robinson Alpha Functions.............................................................. 69
Huron-Vidal Mixing Rules ...................................................................... 79
MHV2 Mixing Rules ............................................................................... 81
Predictive Soave-Redlich-Kwong-Gmehling Mixing Rules ........................... 82
Contents
Wong-Sandler Mixing Rules ................................................................... 84

Activity Coefficient Models ............................................................................... 86
Bromley-Pitzer Activity Coefficient Model................................................. 87
Chien-Null ........................................................................................... 89
Constant Activity Coefficient .................................................................. 91
COSMO-SAC ........................................................................................ 91
Electrolyte NRTL Activity Coefficient Model (GMENRTL) ............................. 94
ENRTL-SAC ....................................................................................... 108
Hansen ............................................................................................. 112
Ideal Liquid ....................................................................................... 114
NRTL (Non-Random Two-Liquid) .......................................................... 114
NRTL-SAC Model ................................................................................ 115
Pitzer Activity Coefficient Model............................................................ 135
Polynomial Activity Coefficient ............................................................. 147
Redlich-Kister .................................................................................... 148
Scatchard-Hildebrand ......................................................................... 149
Three-Suffix Margules......................................................................... 150
Symmetric and Unsymmetric Electrolyte NRTL Activity Coefficient Model... 151
UNIFAC Activity Coefficient Model......................................................... 172
UNIFAC (Dortmund Modified)............................................................... 174
UNIFAC (Lyngby Modified)................................................................... 175
UNIQUAC Activity Coefficient Model ...................................................... 176
Van Laar Activity Coefficient Model ....................................................... 178
Wagner Interaction Parameter ............................................................. 179
Wilson Activity Coefficient Model .......................................................... 179
Wilson Model with Liquid Molar Volume ................................................. 181
Vapor Pressure and Liquid Fugacity Models...................................................... 182
General Pure Component Liquid Vapor Pressure ..................................... 182
API Sour Model .................................................................................. 187
Braun K-10 Model .............................................................................. 187
Chao-Seader Pure Component Liquid Fugacity Model .............................. 188
Grayson-Streed Pure Component Liquid Fugacity Model .......................... 188
Kent-Eisenberg Liquid Fugacity Model ................................................... 189
Maxwell-Bonnell Vapor Pressure Model.................................................. 190
Solid Antoine Vapor Pressure Model ...................................................... 190
General Pure Component Heat of Vaporization ................................................. 191
DIPPR Heat of Vaporization Equation .................................................... 191
Watson Heat of Vaporization Equation .................................................. 191
PPDS Heat of Vaporization Equation ..................................................... 192
IK-CAPE Heat of Vaporization Equation ................................................. 193
NIST TDE Watson Heat of Vaporization Equation .................................... 193
Clausius-Clapeyron Equation ............................................................... 194
Molar Volume and Density Models .................................................................. 194
API Liquid Molar Volume ..................................................................... 194
Brelvi-O'Connell ................................................................................. 196
Clarke Aqueous Electrolyte Volume....................................................... 197
COSTALD Liquid Volume ..................................................................... 199
Debye-Hckel Volume......................................................................... 201
Liquid Constant Molar Volume Model..................................................... 202
General Pure Component Liquid Molar Volume ....................................... 202
Rackett/Campbell-Thodos Mixture Liquid Volume ................................... 207
Modified Rackett Liquid Molar Volume ................................................... 208
Rackett Extrapolation Method .............................................................. 209
Contents
General Pure Component Solid Molar Volume......................................... 211

Liquid Volume Quadratic Mixing Rule .................................................... 213
Heat Capacity Models ................................................................................... 213
Aqueous Infinite Dilution Heat Capacity................................................. 213
Criss-Cobble Aqueous Infinite Dilution Ionic Heat Capacity ...................... 214
General Pure Component Liquid Heat Capacity....................................... 214
General Pure Component Ideal Gas Heat Capacity .................................. 219
General Pure Component Solid Heat Capacity ........................................ 223
Solubility Correlations ................................................................................... 225
Henry's Constant................................................................................ 225
Water Solubility ................................................................................. 226
Hydrocarbon Solubility ........................................................................ 227
Other Thermodynamic Property Models ........................................................... 228
Cavett .............................................................................................. 228
Barin Equations for Gibbs Energy, Enthalpy, Entropy, and Heat Capacity... 228
Electrolyte NRTL Enthalpy Model (HMXENRTL) ....................................... 231
Electrolyte NRTL Gibbs Free Energy Model (GMXENRTL) .......................... 233
Liquid Enthalpy from Liquid Heat Capacity Correlation............................. 235
Enthalpies Based on Different Reference States ..................................... 236
Helgeson Equations of State ................................................................ 240
Quadratic Mixing Rule ......................................................................... 243
3 Transport Property Models ...............................................................................244
Viscosity Models........................................................................................... 246
Andrade Liquid Mixture Viscosity .......................................................... 247
General Pure Component Liquid Viscosity .............................................. 248
API Liquid Viscosity ............................................................................ 251
API 1997 Liquid Viscosity .................................................................... 251
Aspen Liquid Mixture Viscosity ............................................................. 252
ASTM Liquid Mixture Viscosity .............................................................. 252
General Pure Component Vapor Viscosity .............................................. 253
Chapman-Enskog-Brokaw-Wilke Mixing Rule ......................................... 256
Chung-Lee-Starling Low-Pressure Vapor Viscosity .................................. 258
Chung-Lee-Starling Viscosity ............................................................... 260
Dean-Stiel Pressure Correction ............................................................ 262
IAPS Viscosity for Water...................................................................... 262
Jones-Dole Electrolyte Correction ......................................................... 263
Letsou-Stiel ....................................................................................... 265
Lucas Vapor Viscosity ......................................................................... 265
TRAPP Viscosity Model ........................................................................ 266
Twu Liquid Viscosity ........................................................................... 267
Viscosity Quadratic Mixing Rule............................................................ 269
Thermal Conductivity Models ......................................................................... 269
Chung-Lee-Starling Thermal Conductivity.............................................. 270
IAPS Thermal Conductivity for Water .................................................... 271
Li Mixing Rule .................................................................................... 272
Riedel Electrolyte Correction ................................................................ 272
General Pure Component Liquid Thermal Conductivity ............................ 273
Solid Thermal Conductivity Polynomial .................................................. 276
General Pure Component Vapor Thermal Conductivity............................. 276
Stiel-Thodos Pressure Correction Model................................................. 279
Vredeveld Mixing Rule......................................................................... 279
Contents
TRAPP Thermal Conductivity Model....................................................... 280

Wassiljewa-Mason-Saxena Mixing Rule ................................................. 281
Diffusivity Models ......................................................................................... 281
Chapman-Enskog-Wilke-Lee (Binary).................................................... 282
Chapman-Enskog-Wilke-Lee (Mixture) .................................................. 283
Dawson-Khoury-Kobayashi (Binary) ..................................................... 283
Dawson-Khoury-Kobayashi (Mixture) .................................................... 284
Nernst-Hartley ................................................................................... 285
Wilke-Chang (Binary) ......................................................................... 286
Wilke-Chang (Mixture) ........................................................................ 287
Surface Tension Models................................................................................. 287
Liquid Mixture Surface Tension ............................................................ 288
API Surface Tension ........................................................................... 288
IAPS Surface Tension for Water ........................................................... 289
General Pure Component Liquid Surface Tension .................................... 289
Onsager-Samaras .............................................................................. 292
Modified MacLeod-Sugden ................................................................... 293
4 Nonconventional Solid Property Models ...........................................................295
General Enthalpy and Density Models ............................................................. 295
General Density Polynomial ................................................................. 295
General Heat Capacity Polynomial ........................................................ 296
Enthalpy and Density Models for Coal and Char................................................ 297
General Coal Enthalpy Model ............................................................... 300
IGT Coal Density Model ....................................................................... 306
IGT Char Density Model ...................................................................... 307
5 Property Model Option Codes ...........................................................................309
Option Codes for Transport Property Models .................................................... 309
Option Codes for Activity Coefficient Models .................................................... 310
Option Codes for Equation of State Models ...................................................... 312
Soave-Redlich-Kwong Option Codes ............................................................... 315
Option Codes for K-Value Models.................................................................... 316
Option Codes for Enthalpy Models .................................................................. 316
Option Codes for Gibbs Free Energy Models ..................................................... 318
Option Codes for Liquid Volume Models........................................................... 320
Index ..................................................................................................................321
Contents
1 Introduction
This manual describes the property models available in the Aspen Physical
Property System and defines the parameters used in each model. The
description for each model lists the parameter names used to enter values on
the Properties Parameters forms.
This manual also lists the pure component temperature-dependent properties
that the Aspen Physical Property System can calculate from a model that
supports several equations or submodels. See Pure Component TemperatureDependent Properties (below).
Many parameters have default values indicated in the Default column. A dash
() indicates that the parameter has no default value and you must provide a
value. If a parameter is missing, calculations stop. The lower limit and upper
limit for each parameter, when available, indicate the reasonable bounds for
the parameter. The limits are used to detect grossly erroneous parameter
values.
The property models are divided into the following categories:
Thermodynamic property models
Transport property models
Nonconventional solid property models
The property types for each category are discussed in separate sections. The
following table (below) provides an organizational overview of this manual.
The tables labeled Thermodynamic Property Models, Transport Property
Models, and Nonconventional Solid Property Models present detailed lists of
models. These tables also list the Aspen Physical Property System model
names, and their possible use in different phase types, for pure components
and mixtures.
Electrolyte and conventional solid property models are presented in
Thermodynamic Property Models.
1 Introduction
Categories of Models
Category
Sections
Thermodynamic
Property Models
Equation-of-State Models
Activity Coefficient Models (Including Electrolyte Models)
Vapor Pressure and Liquid Fugacity Models
Heat of Vaporization Models
Molar Volume and Density Models
Heat Capacity Models
Solubility Correlations
Other
Transport Property
Models
Viscosity Models
Thermal Conductivity Models
Diffusivity Models
Surface Tension Models
Nonconventional Solid General Enthalpy and Density Models

Property Models
Enthalpy and Density Models for Coal and Char
Units for TemperatureDependent Parameters

Some temperature-dependent parameters may be based on expressions
which involve logarithmic or reciprocal temperature terms. When the
coefficient of any such term is non-zero, in many cases the entire expression
must be calculated assuming that all the coefficients are in absolute
temperature units. In other cases, terms are independent from one another,
and only certain terms may require calculation using absolute temperature
units. Notes in the models containing such terms explain exactly which
coefficients are affected by this treatment.
When absolute temperature units are forced in this way, this affects the units
for coefficients you have entered as input parameters. If your input
temperature units are Fahrenheit (F), then Rankine (R) is used instead. If
your input units are Celsius (C), then Kelvin (K) is used instead.
If only constant and positive powers of temperature are present in the
expression, then your specified input units are used.
If the parameters include temperature limits, the limits are always interpreted
in user input units even if the expression is forced to absolute units.
Some equations may include a dimensionless parameter, the reduced
temperature Tr = T / Tc. This reduced temperature is calculated using
absolute temperature units. In most cases, input parameters associated with
such equations do not have temperature units.
1 Introduction
Pure Component TemperatureDependent Properties

The following table lists the pure component temperature-dependent
properties that the Aspen Physical Property System can calculate from a
general model that supports several equations or submodels.
For example, the Aspen Physical Property System can calculate heat of
vaporization using these equations:
Watson
DIPPR
PPDS
IK-CAPE
NIST TDE Watson
Pure Component Temperature-Dependent Properties
1 Introduction
Property
SubmodelSelection
Parameter
Element
Number
Available Submodels
DIPPR Equation
Numbers
( = default)
Solid Volume
THRSWT/1
Aspen, DIPPR, IK-CAPE, NIST
100
Liquid Volume THRSWT/2
Aspen (Rackett), DIPPR, PPDS, IK- 105, 116 for water

CAPE, NIST
only
Liquid Vapor
Pressure
THRSWT/3
Aspen (Extended Antoine),

Wagner, BARIN, PPDS, PML, IKCAPE, NIST
Heat of
Vaporization
THRSWT/4
Aspen (Watson), DIPPR, PPDS, IK- 106

CAPE, NIST
Solid Heat
Capacity
THRSWT/5
Aspen, DIPPR, BARIN, IK-CAPE,

NIST
100, 102
Liquid Heat
Capacity
THRSWT/6
DIPPR, PPDS, BARIN, IK-CAPE,

NIST
100, 114
Ideal Gas Heat THRSWT/7

Capacity
Aspen, DIPPR, BARIN, PPDS, IKCAPE, NIST
107, 127
Second Virial
Coefficient
DIPPR
104
Liquid Viscosity TRNSWT/1
Aspen (Andrade), DIPPR, PPDS,

IK-CAPE, NIST
101, 115
Vapor Viscosity TRNSWT/2
Aspen (Chapman-Enskog-Brokaw), 102

DIPPR, PPDS, IK-CAPE, NIST
Liquid Thermal TRNSWT/3

Conductivity
Aspen (Sato-Riedel), DIPPR, PPDS, 100

IK-CAPE, NIST
Vapor Thermal TRNSWT/4

Conductivity
Aspen (Stiel-Thodos), DIPPR,

PPDS, IK-CAPE, NIST
102
Liquid Surface TRNSWT/5

Tension
Aspen (Hakim-Steinberg-Stiel),
DIPPR, PPDS, IK-CAPE, NIST
106
THRSWT/8
101
Which equation is actually used to calculate the property for a given

component depends on which parameters are available. If parameters are
available for more than one equation, the Aspen Physical Property System
uses the parameters that were entered or retrieved first from the databanks.
The selection of submodels is driven by the data hierarchy, and controlled by
the submodel-selection parameters.
The thermodynamic properties use the THRSWT (thermo switch) submodelselection parameter, and the transport properties use the TRNSWT (transport
switch) submodel-selection parameter.
As the previous table shows, a property is associated with an element of the
submodel-selection parameter. For example, THRSWT element 1 controls the
submodel for solid volume.
The following table shows the values for THRSWT or TRNSWT, and the
corresponding submodels.
Parameter Values
(Equation Number)
Submodel
Aspen
1 to 127
DIPPR
200 to 211
BARIN
301 to 302
PPDS or property-specific methods
400
PML
401 to 404
IK-CAPE
501 to 515
NIST
All built-in databank components have model-selection parameters (THRSWT,

TRNSWT) that are set to use the correct equations that are consistent with
the available parameters. For example, suppose that parameters for the
DIPPR equation 106 are available for liquid surface tension. For that
component, TRNSWT element 5 is set to 106 in the databank. If you are
retrieving data from an in-house or user databank, you should store the
appropriate values for THRSWT and TRNSWT in the databank, using the
appropriate equation number. Otherwise, the Aspen Physical Property System
will search for the parameters needed for the Aspen form of the equations.
If a component is available in more than one databank, the Aspen Physical
Property System uses the data and equations based on the databank list
order on the Components Specifications Selection sheet. For example,
suppose the databank search order is ASPENPCD, then PURE10, and that the
Aspen Physical Property System cannot find the parameters for a particular
submodel (equation) in the ASPENPCD databank. If the PURE10 databank
contains parameters for another equation, the Aspen Physical Property
System will use that equation (most likely the DIPPR equation) to calculate
the property for that component.
If your calculation contains any temperature-dependent property parameters,
(such as CPIGDP for DIPPR ideal gas heat capacity, entered on the Properties
Parameters Pure Component form), the Aspen Physical Property System sets
the corresponding THRSWT and TRNSWT elements for that component to the
default values shown in the table above. This default setting might not always
be correct. If you know the equation number, you should enter it directly on
1 Introduction
the Properties Parameters Pure-Components form. For example, suppose you

want to use the:
DIPPR equation form of heat of vaporization (DHVLDP) for a component
Aspen equations for the remaining temperature dependent properties
Set the fourth element of the THRSWT parameter to 106, and the 1-3 and 5-8
elements to 0. If you want to set the other temperature-dependent properties
to use what is defined for that component in the databank, leave the element
blank.
The following table lists the available DIPPR equations and the corresponding
equation (submodel) number.
Available DIPPR Equations

Equation
Number Equation Form
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
114
115
116
127
For equations 114 and 116, t = 1-Tr.

Note: Reduced temperature Tr is always calculated using absolute
temperature units.
The following sections describe the Aspen, DIPPR, BARIN, IK-CAPE, PPDS, and
NIST equations for each property. For descriptions of the the BARIN equations
for heat capacity and enthalpy, see BARIN Equations for Gibbs Energy,
Enthalpy, Entropy, and Heat Capacity.
1 Introduction
Extrapolation Methods
Many temperature dependent property models have upper and lower
temperature limits. The Aspen Physical Property System usually extrapolates
linearly beyond such limits. It calculates the slope of the property-versustemperature curve, or the ln(property)-versus-temperature curve for models
expressed in logarithmic form, at the upper or lower temperature limit. For
temperatures beyond the limit, it uses a linear model with this slope which
meets the curve from the equation at the temperature limit. Thus the model
is:
For T beyond the upper or lower limit, where Tlim is that limit and Z is the
property or ln(property) as appropriate. Some liquid molar volume models are
actually molar density models which then return the reciprocal of the density
as the liquid molar volume. In these models, the extrapolation occurs for the
density calculation.
There are certain exceptions, detailed below.
Exception 1: Logarithmic Properties Based on Reciprocal

Temperature
This applies to property models expressed in the form (where a(T) includes
any additional dependency on temperature):
For these models, the extrapolation maintains the slope of ln(property) versus
1/T. This applies to the Extended Antoine vapor pressure equation and the
Andrade and DIPPR liquid viscosity equations. Note that the equation for
Henry's Constant is extrapolated by ln(Henry) versus T.
Exception 2: Aspen Ideal Gas Heat Capacity

The Aspen Ideal Gas Heat Capacity model has an explicit equation for
extrapolation at temperatures below the lower limit, which is described in the
model. At high temperatures it follows the usual rule of extrapolating
property-versus-temperature linearly.
Exception 3: No Extrapolation
The equations for certain models are used directly at all temperatures, so that
no extrapolation is performed. These models are the Wagner vapor pressure
equation, the Aly and Lee equation for the DIPPR Ideal Gas Heat Capacity
(using the CPIGDP parameter), and the Water Solubility and Hydrocarbon
Solubility models. The equations for temperature-dependent binary
interaction parameters are also used directly at all temperatures with no
extrapolation.
10
1 Introduction
2 Thermodynamic Property
Models
This section describes the available thermodynamic property models in the

Aspen Physical Property System. The following table provides a list of
available models, with corresponding Aspen Physical Property System model
names. The table provides phase types for which the model can be used and
information on use of the model for pure components and mixtures.
Aspen Physical Property System thermodynamic property models include
classical thermodynamic property models, such as activity coefficient models
and equations of state, as well as solids and electrolyte models. The models
are grouped according to the type of property they describe.
Thermodynamic Property Models

Phases: V = Vapor; L = Liquid; S = Solid. An X indicates applicable to Pure or
Mixture.
A pure component equation of state model calculates PHIL, PHIV, DHL, DHV,
DGL, DGV, DSL, DSV, VL, and VV. Most mixture equation of state models
calculate PHILMX, PHIVMX, DHLMX, DHVMX, DGLMX, DGVMX, DSLMX,
DSVMX, VLMX, and VVMX. Those marked with * only calculate DHLMX,
DHVMX, DGLMX, DGVMX, DSLMX, DSVMX, VLMX, and VVMX. The alpha
functions and mixing rules are options available in some of the models.
Property Model
Model Name(s)
Phase(s)Pure
Mixture
ASME Steam Tables
ESH2O0,ESH2O
VL
BWR-Lee-Starling
ESBWR0, ESCSTBWR V L
Benedict-Webb-Rubin-Starling
ESBWRS, ESBWRS0
VL
Hayden-O'Connell
ESHOC0,ESHOC
HF equation-of-state
ESHF0, ESHF
Ideal Gas
ESIG0, ESIG
Lee-Kesler *
ESLK
VL
Lee-Kesler-Plcker
ESLKP0,ESLKP
VL
NBS/NRC Steam Tables
ESSTEAM0,ESSTEAM
VL
2 Thermodynamic Property Models
11
Property Model
Model Name(s)
Phase(s)Pure
Mixture
Nothnagel
ESNTH0,ESNTH
PC-SAFT
ESPSAFT, ESPSAFT0
VL
Peng-Robinson
ESPR0, ESPR
VL
Standard Peng-Robinson
ESPRSTD0,ESPRSTD
VL
Peng-Robinson-Wong-Sandler * ESPRWS0,ESPRWS
VL
Peng-Robinson-MHV2 *
ESPRV20,ESPRV2
VL
Predictive SRK *
ESRKSV10, ESRKSV1 V L
Redlich-Kwong
ESRK0, ESRK
Redlich-Kwong-Aspen
ESRKA0,ESRKA
VL
Redlich-Kwong-Soave
ESRKSTD0,ESRKSTD
VL
Redlich-Kwong-Soave-BostonMathias
ESRKS0, ESRKS
VL
Redlich-Kwong-Soave-MHV2 *
ESRKSV20, ESRKSV2 V L
Redlich-Kwong-Soave-WongSandler *
ESRKSWS0, ESRKSWS V L
Schwartzentruber-Renon
ESRKU0,ESRKU
VL
Soave-Redlich-Kwong
ESSRK0, ESSRK
VL
SRK-Kabadi-Danner
ESSRK0, ESSRK
VL
SRK-ML
ESRKSML0, ESRKSML V L
VPA/IK-CAPE equation-of-state ESVPA0, ESVPA
Peng-Robinson Alpha functions
VL
RK-Soave Alpha functions
VL
Huron-Vidal mixing rules
VL
MHV2 mixing rules
VL
PSRK mixing rules
VL
Wong-Sandler mixing rules
VL
Activity Coefficient Models (Including Electrolyte Models)

These models calculate GAMMA.
12
Property Model
Model Name
Phase(s)Pure
Mixture
Bromley-Pitzer
GMPT2
Chien-Null
GMCHNULL
Constant Activity Coefficient
GMCONS
COSMO-SAC
COSMOSAC
Electrolyte NRTL
GMENRTL, GMELC,
GMENRHG
L L1 L2
ENRTL-SAC (patent pending)
ENRTLSAC
Hansen
HANSEN
Ideal Liquid
GMIDL
NRTL (Non-Random-Two-Liquid) GMRENON
L L1 L2
NRTL-SAC (patent pending)
NRTLSAC
Pitzer
GMPT1
Polynomial Activity Coefficient
GMPOLY
LS
Property Model
Model Name
Phase(s)Pure
Mixture
Redlich-Kister
GMREDKIS
LS
Scatchard-Hildebrand
GMXSH
Symmetric Electrolyte NRTL
GMENRTLS
Three-Suffix Margules
GMMARGUL
LS
UNIFAC
GMUFAC
L L1 L2
UNIFAC (Lyngby modified)
GMUFLBY
L L1 L2
UNIFAC (Dortmund modified)
GMUFDMD
L L1 L2
UNIQUAC
GMUQUAC
L L1 L2
Unsymmetric Electrolyte NRTL
GMENRTLQ
van Laar
GMVLAAR
Wagner interaction parameter
GMWIP
Wilson
GMWILSON
Wilson model with liquid molar

volume
GMWSNVOL
Vapor Pressure and Liquid Fugacity Models

Property Model
Model
Name
Property Phase(s)Pure
Mixture
General Pure Component Liquid

Vapor Pressure
PL0XANT
PL
L L1 L2
API Sour
SWEQ
PHILMX
Braun K-10
BK10
PHILMX
Chao-Seader
PHL0CS
PHIL
Grayson-Streed
PHL0GS
PHIL
Kent-Eisenberg
ESAMINE
PHILMX, L
GLMX,
HLMX,
SLMX
Maxwell-Bonnell
PL0MXBN PL
L L1 L2
Solid Antoine
PS0ANT
PS
Heat of Vaporization Models

These models calculate DHVL.
Property Model
Model Name
Phase(s)Pure
Mixture
General Pure Component Heat

of Vaporization
DHVLWTSN
Clausius-Clapeyron Equation
DHVLCC
Molar Volume and Density Models

These models calculate VL (pure liquid), VLMX (liquid mixture), or VS (pure
solid), except for Brelvi-O'Connell which calculates VLPM.
Property Model
Model Name
Phase(s)Pure
Mixture
API Liquid Volume
VL2API
Brelvi-O'Connell
VL1BROC
13
Property Model
Model Name
Phase(s)Pure
Mixture
Clarke Aqueous Electrolyte

Volume
VAQCLK
COSTALD Liquid Volume
VL0CTD,VL2CTD
Debye-Hckel Volume
VAQDH
Liquid Constant Molar Volume
VL0CONS
General Pure Component Liquid VL0RKT,VL2RKT

Molar Volume
Rackett/Campbell-Thodos
Mixture Liquid Volume
VL2RKT
Modified Rackett
VL2MRK
General Pure Component Solid

Molar Volume
VS0POLY
Liquid Volume Quadratic Mixing VL2QUAD

Rule

Property Model
Model
Name
Mixture
Aqueous Infinite Dilution Heat

Capacity Polynomial
Criss-Cobble Aqueous Infinite

Dilution Ionic Heat Capacity
General Pure Component Liquid

Heat Capacity
HL0DIP
HL, DHL
General Pure Component Ideal

Gas Heat Capacity
CPIG
General Pure Component Solid

Heat Capacity
HS0POLY HS
Solubility Correlation Models

Property Model
Model
Name
Mixture
Henry's constant
HENRY1
HNRY,
WHNRY
Water solubility
Hydrocarbon solubility
Other Models
Property Model
14
Model
Name
Mixture
Cavett Liquid Enthalpy Departure DHL0CVT,

DHL2CVT
DHL,
DHLMX
BARIN Equations for Gibbs

Energy, Enthalpy, Entropy and
Heat Capacity
SLV
Bromley-Pitzer Enthalpy
HAQPT2
HLMX
Bromley-Pitzer Gibbs Energy
GAQPT2
GLMX
Property Model
Model
Name
Mixture
Electrolyte NRTL Enthalpy
HMXENRTL, HLMX
HAQELC,
HMXELC,
HMXENRHG
Electrolyte NRTL Gibbs Energy
GMXENRTL, HLMX
GAQELC,
GMXELC,
GMXENRHG
Liquid Enthalpy from Liquid Heat DHL0DIP

Capacity Correlation
Enthalpies Based on Different

Reference States
DHL0HREF DHL
LV
Helgeson Equations of State
Pitzer Enthalpy
HAQPT1
HLMX
Pitzer Gibbs Energy
GAQPT1
GLMX
Quadratic Mixing Rule
LV
The Aspen Physical Property System has the following built-in equation-ofstate property models. This section describes the equation-of-state property
models available.
Model
Type
ASME Steam Tables
Fundamental
BWR-Lee-Starling
Virial
Virial
Hayden-O'Connell
Virial and association
HF Equation-of-State
Ideal and association
Huron-Vidal mixing rules
Mixing rules
Ideal Gas
Ideal
Lee-Kesler
Virial
Lee-Kesler-Plcker
Virial
MHV2 mixing rules
Mixing rules
Fundamental
Nothnagel
Ideal
PC-SAFT
Association
Peng-Robinson
Cubic
Cubic
Peng-Robinson Alpha functions
Alpha functions
Peng-Robinson-MHV2
Cubic
Peng-Robinson-Wong-Sandler
Cubic
Predictive SRK
Cubic
PSRK mixing rules
Mixing rules
Redlich-Kwong
Cubic
15
Model
Type
Redlich-Kwong-Aspen
Cubic
Standard Redlich-Kwong-Soave
Cubic
Redlich-Kwong-Soave-Boston-Mathias
Cubic
Redlich-Kwong-Soave-MHV2
Cubic
Redlich-Kwong-Soave-Wong-Sandler
Cubic
RK-Soave Alpha functions
Alpha functions
Cubic
Soave-Redlich-Kwong
Cubic
SRK-Kabadi-Danner
Cubic
SRK-ML
Cubic
VPA/IK-CAPE equation-of-state
Ideal and association
Wong-Sandler mixing rules
Mixing rules
ASME Steam Tables

The ASME steam tables are implemented like any other equation-of-state in
the Aspen Physical Property System. The steam tables can calculate any
thermodynamic property of water or steam and form the basis of the STEAMTA property method. There are no parameter requirements. The ASME steam
tables are less accurate than the NBS/NRC steam tables.
References
ASME Steam Tables, Thermodynamic and Transport Properties of Steam,
(1967).
K. V. Moore, Aerojet Nuclear Company, prepared for the U.S. Atomic Energy
Commision, ASTEM - A Collection of FORTRAN Subroutines to Evaluate the
1967 ASME equations of state for water/steam and derivatives of these
equations.
BWR-Lee-Starling
The Benedict-Webb-Rubin-Lee-Starling equation-of-state is the basis of the
BWR-LS property method. It is a generalization by Lee and Starling of the
virial equation-of-state for pure fluids by Benedict, Webb and Rubin. The
equation is used for non-polar components, and can manage hydrogencontaining systems.
General Form:
Where:
Mixing Rules:
16
Where:
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCBWR
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
VC
0.001
3.5
MOLEVOLUME
OMEGA
-0.5
3.0
-5.0
1.0
-5.0
1.0
VCBWR
Vci
BWRGMA
i
ij
ij
BWRKV
BWRKT
Binary interaction parameters BWRKV and BWRKT are available in the Aspen
Physical Property System for a large number of components from Brul et al.
(1982) and from Watanasiri et al. (1982). (See Physical Property Data,
Chapter 1).
References
M.R. Brul, C.T. Lin, L.L. Lee, and K.E. Starling, AIChE J., Vol. 28, (1982) p.
616.
Brul et al., Chem. Eng., (Nov., 1979) p. 155.
Watanasiri et al., AIChE J., Vol. 28, (1982) p. 626.
The Benedict-Webb-Rubin-Starling equation-of-state is the basis of the BWRS
property method. It is a modification by Han and Starling of the virial
equation-of-state for pure fluids by Benedict, Webb and Rubin. This equationof-state can be used for hydrocarbon systems that include the common light
gases, such as H2S, CO2 and N2.
The form of the equation-of-state is:
17
Where:
kij = kji
In the mixing rules given above, A0i, B0i, C0i, D0i, E0i, ai, bi, ci, di, i, i are pure
component constants which can be input by the user. For methane, ethane,
propane, iso-butane, n-butane, iso-pentane, n-pentane, n-hexane, nheptane, n-octane, ethylene, propylene, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, and
hydrogen sulfide, values of the parameters in the table below are available in
the EOS-LIT databank in the Aspen Properties Enterprise Database.
If the values of these parameters are not given, and not available from the
databank, the Aspen Physical Property System will calculate them using the
18
critical temperature, the critical volume (or critical density), the acentric
factor and generalized correlations given by Han and Starling.
When water is present, by default Benedict-Webb-Rubin-Starling uses the
steam table to calculate the enthalpy, entropy, Gibbs energy, and molar
volume of water. The total properties are mole-fraction averages of these
values with the properties calculated by the equation of state for other
components. Fugacity coefficient is not affected. An option code can disable
this use of the steam table.
For best results, the binary parameter kij must be regressed using phaseequilibrium data such as VLE data.
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol Default
MDS Lower Upper Units

Limit Limit
BWRSTC
Tci
TC
5.0
BWRSVC
Vci
VC
0.001 3.5
MOLE-VOLUME
BWRSOM
OMEGA
0.5
2.0
BWRSA/1
B0i
fcn(i ,Vci , Tci)
MOLE-VOLUME
BWRSA/2
A0i
fcn(i ,Vci , Tci)
PRESSURE * MOLEVOL^2
BWRSA/3
C0i
fcn(i ,Vci , Tci)
PRESSURE *
TEMPERATURE^2 *
MOLE-VOLUME^2
BWRSA/4
fcn(i ,Vci , Tci)
MOLE-VOLUME^2
BWRSA/5
bi
fcn(i ,Vci , Tci)
MOLE-VOLUME^2
BWRSA/6
ai
fcn(i ,Vci , Tci)
PRESSURE * MOLEVOL^3
BWRSA/7
fcn(i ,Vci , Tci)
MOLE-VOLUME^3
BWRSA/8
ci
fcn(i ,Vci , Tci)
PRESSURE *
TEMPERATURE^2 *
MOLE-VOLUME^3
BWRSA/9
D0i
fcn(i ,Vci , Tci)
PRESSURE *
TEMPERATURE^3 *
MOLE-VOLUME^2
BWRSA/10
di
fcn(i ,Vci , Tci)
PRESSURE *
TEMPERATURE * MOLEVOLUME^3
BWRSA/11
E0i
fcn(i ,Vci , Tci)
PRESSURE *
TEMPERATURE^4 *
MOLE-VOLUME^2
BWRAIJ
kij
2000.0 TEMPERATURE
Constants Used with the correlations of Han and Starling

Parameter
Methane
Ethane
Propane
n-Butane
B0i
0.723251
0.826059
0.964762
1.56588
A0i
7520.29
13439.30
18634.70
32544.70
C0i
2.71092x108
2.95195x109
7.96178x109
1.37436x1010
D0i
1.07737x1010
2.57477x1011
4.53708x1011
3.33159x1011
E0i
3.01122x1010
1.46819x1013
2.56053x1013
2.30902x1012
19
Parameter
Methane
Ethane
Propane
n-Butane
bi
0.925404
3.112060
5.462480
9.140660
ai
2574.89
22404.50
40066.40
71181.80
7
3.64238x107
di
47489.1
702189.0
1.50520x10
0.468828
0.909681
2.014020
4.009850
ci
4.37222x108
6.81826x109
2.74461x1010
7.00044x1010
1.48640
2.99656
4.56182
7.54122
Parameter
n-Pentane
n-Hexane
n-Heptane
n-Octane
B0i
2.44417
2.66233
3.60493
4.86965
A0i
51108.20
45333.10
77826.90
2.23931x10
D0i
1.01769x10
12
E0i
3.90860x1013
6.26433x1014
6.36251x1012
3.46419x1013
bi
16.607000
29.498300
27.441500
10.590700
ai
162185.00
434517.00
359087.00
131646.00
8351150.0
1.85906x108
C0i
5.26067x10
10
5.52158x10
12
81690.60
10
3.27460x10
6.15662x10
10
9.96546x1010
7.77123x10
12
7.90575x1012
di
3.88521x10
7.067020
9.702300
21.878200
34.512400
ci
1.35286x1011
3.18412x1011
3.74876x1011
6.42053x1011
11.85930
14.87200
24.76040
21.98880
References
M. Benedict, G. B. Webb, and L. C. Rubin, J. Chem. Phys., Vol. 8, (1940), p.
334.
M. S. Han, and K. E. Starling, "Thermo Data Refined for LPG. Part 14:
Mixtures", Hydrocarbon Processing, Vol. 51, No. 5, (1972), p. 129.
K. E. Starling, "Fluid Themodynamic Properties for Light Petroleum Systems",
Gulf Publishing Co., Houston, Texas (1973).
References for Parameter Data

K.E. Starling and M.S. Han, "Thermo data refined for LPG, part 14 Mixtures,"
Hydrocarbon Processing, (May 1972), pp. 129-132.
K.E. Starling and M.S. Han, "Thermo data refined for LPG, part 15 Industrial
applications," Hydrocarbon Processing, (June 1972), pp. 107-115.
K.E. Starling, "Fluid Thermodynamic Properties for Light Petroleum Systems,"
Gulf Publishing Co., Houston, Texas (1973).
GERG2008 Equation of State

The GERG2008 equation-of-state model is the basis for the GERG2008
property method.
The equation of state is based on a multi-fluid approximation explicit in the
reduced Helmholtz free energy:
20
(1)
Where the ideal-gas contribution o and residual contribution
mixture density, temperature, and molar composition are:
r at a given
(2)
(3)
Where the reduced mixture density

temperature are:
and inverse reduced mixture

(4)
In eq. (2), the ideal-gas contribution of the reduced Helmholtz free energy for
component i is given by:
(5)
In eq. (3), the pure substance contribution to the residual part of the reduced
Helmholtz free energy for component i is given by:
(6)
In eq. (3), the mixture contribution to the residual part of the reduced
Helmholtz free energy is given by:
(7)
The reduced mixture density is given by:

(8)
And the reduced mixture temperature is given by:
21
(9)
Where:
R = molar gas constant = 8.314472 J/mol-K.
c,i and Tc,i = critical density and critical temperature

nooi,k and
ooi,k = Coefficients and parameters of eq. (5) for pure components
noi,k, doi,k, toi,k, and coi,k = coefficients and exponents of eq. (6) for pure
components
Fij = Composition dependent factor
nij,k = Coefficients and dij,k, tij,k, ij,k, ij,k, ij,k, and ij,k = the exponents in eq.
(7) for all binary specific and generalized departure functions
v,ij and v,ij in eq. (8) and T,ij and T,ij in eq. (9) = Binary interaction
parameters
Reference
"The GERG-2004 Wide-Range Equation of State for Natural Gases and Other
Mixtures" O. Kunz, R. Klimeck, W. Wagner, M. Jaeschke; GERG TM15 2007;
ISBN 978-3-18-355706-6; Published for GERG and printed in Germany by
VDI Verlag GmbH (2007).
Kunz, O., Wagner, W., "The new GERG-2004 XT08 wide-range equation of
state for natural gases and other mixtures." To be submitted to Fluid Phase
Equilibria (beginning of 2010).
Hayden-O'Connell
The Hayden-O'Connell equation-of-state calculates thermodynamic properties
for the vapor phase. It is used in property methods NRTL-HOC, UNIF-HOC,
UNIQ-HOC, VANL-HOC, and WILS-HOC, and is recommended for nonpolar,
polar, and associating compounds. Hayden-O'Connell incorporates the
chemical theory of dimerization. This model accounts for strong association
and solvation effects, including those found in systems containing organic
acids, such as acetic acid. The equation-of-state is:
Where:
For nonpolar, non-associating species:

, with
22
, where
For polar, associating species:

, with
, where
For chemically bonding species:

, and
Cross-Interactions
The previous equations are valid for dimerization and cross-dimerization if
these mixing rules are applied:
= 0 unless a special solvation contribution can be justified (for example, i

and j are in the same class of compounds). Many values are present in the
Aspen Physical Property System.
Chemical Theory
When a compound with strong association
is present in a mixture,
the entire mixture is treated according to the chemical theory of dimerization.
23
The chemical reaction for the general case of a mixture of dimerizing

components i and j is:
Where i and j refer to the same component.

The equation-of-state becomes:
with
In this case, molar volume is equal to V/nt.
This represents true total volume over the true number of species nt.
However, the reported molar volume is V/na.
This represents the true total volume over the apparent number of species na.
If dimerization does not occur, na is defined as the number of species. V/na
reflects the apparently lower molar volume of an associating gas mixture.
The chemical equilibrium constant for the dimerization reaction on pressure
basis Kp, is related to the true mole fractions and fugacity coefficients:
Where:
yi and yj
= True mole fractions of monomers
yij
= True mole fraction of dimer
= True fugacity coefficient of component i
Kij
= Equilibrium constant for the dimerization of i and j, on a

pressure basis
=
ij
= 1 for i=j
= 0 for
Apparent mole fractions yia are reported, but in the calculation real mole
fractions yi, yj, and yij are used.
The heat of reaction due to each dimerization is calculated according to:
The sum of the contributions of all dimerization reactions, corrected for the
ratio of apparent and true number of moles is added to the molar enthalpy
departure
24
Parameter Name/ Symbol

Element
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TC
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PC
Tci
pci
gyr
5.0
10
5
-11
10
PRESSURE
5x10
-9
RGYR
ri
10
MUP
pi
0.0
5x10-24
LENGTH
DIPOLEMOMENT
HOCETA
0.0
The binary parameters HOCETA for many component pairs are available in the
Aspen Physical Property System. These parameters are retrieved
automatically when you specify any of the following property methods: NRTLHOC, UNIF-HOC, UNIQ-HOC, VANL-HOC, and WILS-HOC.
References
J.G. Hayden and J.P. O'Connell, "A Generalized Method for Predicting Second
Virial Coefficients," Ind. Eng. Chem., Process Des. Dev., Vol. 14,No. 3,
(1975), pp. 209 216.
HF Equation-of-State
HF forms oligomers in the vapor phase. The non-ideality in the vapor phase is
found in important deviations from ideality in all thermodynamic properties.
The HF equation accounts for the vapor phase nonidealities. The model is
based on chemical theory and assumes the formation of hexamers.
Species like HF that associate linearly behave as single species. For example,
they have a vapor pressure curve, like pure components. The component on
which a hypothetical unreacted system is based is often called the apparent
(or parent) component. Apparent components react to the true species.
Electrolyte Calculation in Physical Property Methods discusses apparent and
true species. Abbott and van Ness (1992) provide details and basic
thermodynamics of reactive systems.
The temperature-dependent hexamerization equilibrium constant, can fit the
experimentally determined association factors. The built-in functionality is:
(1)
The constants C0 and C1 are from Long et al. (1943), and C2 and C3 are set to
0. The correlation is valid between 270 and 330 K, and can be extrapolated to
about 370 K (cf. sec. 4). Different sets of constants can be determined by
experimental data regression.
Molar Volume Calculation

The non-ideality of HF is often expressed using the association factor, f,
indicating the ratio of apparent number of species to the real number or
species. Assuming the ideal gas law for all true species in terms of (p, V, T)
behavior implies:
25
(2)
Where the true number of species is given by 1/f. The association factor is
easily determined from (p, V, T) experiments. For a critical evaluation of data
refer to Vanderzee and Rodenburg (1970).
If only one reaction is assumed for a mixture of HF and its associated species,
(refer to Long et al., 1943), then:
(3)
If p1 represents the true partial pressure of the HF monomer, and p6
represents the true partial pressure of the hexamer, then the equilibrium
constant is defined as:
(4)
The true total pressure is:

p = p1 + p6
(5)
If all hexamer were dissociated, the apparent total pressure would be the
hypothetical pressure where:
pa = p1 + 6p6 = p + 5p6
(6)
When physical ideality is assumed, partial pressures and mole fractions are
proportional. The total pressure in equation 5 represents the true number of
species. The apparent total pressure from equation 6 represents the apparent
number of species:
(7)
Note that the outcome of equation 7 is independent of the assumption of

ideality. Equation 7 can be used to compute the number of true species 1/f
for a mixture containing HF, but the association factor is defined differently.
If p1 and p6 are known, the molar volume or density of a vapor containing HF
can be calculated using equations 2 and 7. The molar volume calculated is the
true molar volume for 1 apparent mole of HF. This is because the volume of 1
mole of ideal gas (the true molar volume per true number of moles) is always
equal to about 0.0224 m3/mol at 298.15 K.
True Mole Fraction (Partial Pressure) Calculation

If you assume the ideal gas law for a mixture containing HF, the apparent HF
mole fraction is:
(8)
26
The denominator of equation 8 is given by equation 6. The numerator (the

apparent partial pressure of HF) is the hypothetical partial pressure only if all
of the hexamer was dissociated. If you substitute equation 4, then equation 8
becomes:
(9)
K is known from Long et al., or can be regressed from (p,V,T) data. The
apparent mole fraction of HF, ya, is known to the user and the simulator, but
p1, or y = p1/p must also be known in order to calculate the thermodynamic
properties of the mixture. Equation 9 must be solved for p1.
Equation 9 can be written as a polynomial in p1 of degree 6:
K(6 - 5ya)(p1)6 + p1 - pya = 0
(9a)
A second order Newton-Raphson technique is used to determine p1. Then p6

can be calculated by equation 5, and f is known (equation 7).
Gibbs Energy and Fugacity

The apparent fugacity coefficient is related to the true fugacity coefficient and
mole fractions:
(10)
Equation 10 represents a correction to the ideal mixing term of the fugacity.

The ratio of the true number of species to the apparent number of species is
similar to the correction applied in equation 2. Since the ideal gas law is
assumed, the apparent fugacity coefficient is given by the equation. All
variables on the right side are known.
(11)
For pure HF, ya = 1:
From the fugacity coefficient, the Gibbs energy departure of the mixture or
pure apparent components can be calculated:
(12)
(12a)
Enthalpy and Entropy

For the enthalpy departure, the heat of reaction is considered. For an
arbitrary gas phase reaction:
27
(13)
(14)
Where i* is the pure component thermodynamic potential or molar Gibbs

energy of a component. Equation 4 represents the first two terms of the
general equation 14. The second or third equality relates the equilibrium
constant to the Gibbs energy of reaction, which is thus related to the enthalpy
of reaction:
(15)
All components are assumed to be ideal. The enthalpy departure is equal to

the heat of reaction, per apparent number of moles:
(16)
(17)
From the Gibbs energy departure and enthalpy departure, the entropy
departure can be calculated:
(18)
Temperature derivatives for the thermodynamic properties can be obtained
by straightforward differentiation.
Usage
The HF equation-of-state should only be used for vapor phase calculations. It
is not suited for liquid phase calculations.
The HF equation-of-state can be used with any activity coefficient model for
nonelectrolyte VLE. Using the Electrolyte NRTL model and the data package
MHF2 is strongly recommended for aqueous mixtures (de Leeuw and
Watanasiri, 1993).
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
ESHFK/1
C0
43.65
ESHFK/2
C1
-8910
ESHFK/3
C2
ESHFK/4
C3
References
M. M. Abbott and H. C. van Ness, "Thermodynamics of Solutions Containing
Reactive Species, a Guide to Fundamentals and Applications," Fluid Phase Eq.,
Vol. 77, (1992) pp. 53 119.
28
V. V. De Leeuw and S. Watanasiri, "Modelling Phase Equilibria and Enthalpies

of the System Water and Hydroflouric Acid Using an HF Equation-of-state in
Conjunction with the Electrolyte NRTL Activity Coefficient Model," Paper
presented at the 13th European Seminar on Applied Thermodynamics, June 9
12, Carry-le-Rouet, France, 1993.
R. W. Long, J. H. Hildebrand, and W. E. Morrell, "The Polymerization of
Gaseous Hydrogen and Deuterium Flourides," J. Am. Chem. Soc., Vol. 65,
(1943), pp. 182 187.
C. E. Vanderzee and W. WM. Rodenburg, "Gas Imperfections and
Thermodynamic Excess Properties of Gaseous Hydrogen Fluoride," J. Chem.
Thermodynamics, Vol. 2, (1970), pp. 461 478.
IAPWS-95 Steam Tables

The IAPWS-95 Steam Tables are implemented like any other equation-ofstate in the Aspen Physical Property System. These steam tables can calculate
any thermodynamic property of water. The tables form the basis of the
IAPWS-95 property method. There are no parameter requirements. They are
the most accurate steam tables in the Aspen Physical Property System.
References
Wanger W. and A. Pru, The IAPWS Formation 1995 for the Thermodynamic
Properties of Ordinary Water Substance for General and Scientific Use, J.
Phys. Chem. Ref. Data, 31(2), 387- 535, 2002.
Ideal Gas
The ideal gas law (ideal gas equation-of-state) combines the laws of Boyle
and Gay-Lussac. It models a vapor as if it consisted of point masses without
any interactions. The ideal gas law is used as a reference state for equationof-state calculations, and can be used to model gas mixtures at low pressures
(without specific gas phase interactions).
The equation is:
p = RT / Vm
Lee-Kesler
This equation-of-state model is based on the work of Lee and Kesler (1975).
In this equation, the volumetric and thermodynamic properties of fluids based
on the Curl and Pitzer approach (1958) have been analytically represented by
a modified Benedict-Webb-Rubin equation-of-state (1940). The model
calculates the molar volume, enthalpy departure, Gibbs free energy
departure, and entropy departure of a mixture at a given temperature,
pressure, and composition for either a vapor or a liquid phase. Partial
derivatives of these quantities with respect to temperature can also be
calculated.
Unlike the other equation-of-state models, this model does not calculate
fugacity coefficients.
29
The compressibility factor and other derived thermodynamic functions of

nonpolar and slightly polar fluids can be adequately represented, at constant
reduced temperature and pressure, by a linear function of the acentric factor.
In particular, the compressibility factor of a fluid whose acentric factor is , is
given by the following equation:
Z = Z(0) + Z(1)
Where:
Z(0)
Compressibility factor of a simple fluid ( = 0)
Z(1)
Deviation of the compressibility factor of the real fluid from Z(0)
Z(0) and Z(1) are assumed universal functions of the reduced temperature and
pressure.
Curl and Pitzer (1958) were quite successful in correlating thermodynamic
and volumetric properties using the above approach. Their application
employed tables of properties in terms of reduced temperature and pressure.
A significant weakness of this method is that the various properties (for
example, entropy departure and enthalpy departure) will not be exactly
thermodynamically consistent with each other. Lee and Kesler (1975)
overcame this drawback by an analytic representation of the tables with an
equation-of-state. In addition, the range was extended by including new data.
In the Lee-Kesler implementation, the compressibility factor of any fluid has
been written in terms of a simple fluid and a reference as follows:
In the above equation both Z(0) and Z(1) are represented as generalized
equations of the BWR form in terms of reduced temperature and pressure.
Thus,
Equations for the enthalpy departure, Gibbs free energy departure, and
entropy departure are obtained from the compressibility factor using standard
thermodynamic relationships, thus ensuring thermodynamic consistency.
In the case of mixtures, mixing rules (without any binary parameters) are
used to obtain the mixture values of the critical temperature and pressure,
and the acentric factor.
This equation has been found to provide a good description of the volumetric
and thermodynamic properties of mixtures containing nonpolar and slightly
polar components.
30
Symbol
Parameter Name Default
Definition
Tc
TCLK
TC
Critical temperature
Pc
PCLK
PC
Critical pressure
OMGLK
OMEGA
Acentric factor
References
M. Benedict, G. B. Webb, and L. C. Rubin, J. Chem. Phys., Vol. 8, (1940), p.
334.
R. F. Curl and K.S. Pitzer, Ind. Eng. Chem., Vol. 50, (1958), p. 265.
B. I. Lee and M.G. Kesler, AIChE J., Vol. 21, (1975), p. 510.
Lee-Kesler-Plcker
The Lee-Kesler-Plcker equation-of-state is the basis for the LK-PLOCK
property method. This equation-of-state applies to hydrocarbon systems that
include the common light gases, such as H2S and CO2. It can be used in gasprocessing, refinery, and petrochemical applications.
The general form of the equation is:
Where:
The fo and fR parameters are functions of the BWR form. The fo parameter is
for a simple fluid, and fR is for reference fluid n-octane.
The mixing rules are:

Vcm
=
=
Zm
Where:
Vcij
Tcij
Zci
kij
kji
31
The binary parameter kij is determined from phase-equilibrium data

regression, such as VLE data. The Aspen Physical Property System stores the
binary parameters for a large number of component pairs. These binary
parameters are used automatically with the LK-PLOCK property method. If
binary parameters for certain component pairs are not available, they can be
estimated using built-in correlations. The correlations are designed for binary
interactions among the components CO, CO2, N2, H2, CH4 alcohols and
hydrocarbons. If a component is not CO, CO2, N2, H2, CH4 or an alcohol, it is
assumed to be a hydrocarbon.
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCLKP
Tci
TC
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PCLKP
pci
PC
VCLKP
Vci
VC
0.001
3.5
MOLEVOLUME
OMGLKP
OMEGA
-0.5
2.0
LKPZC
Zci
fcn() (Method 1)
fcn(pci,Vci,Tci)
(Method 2)
0.1
0.5
LKPKIJ
kij
fcn(TciVci / TcjVcj)
5.0
5.0
5.0
PRESSURE
Method 1 is the default for LKPZC; Method 2 can be invoked by setting the
value of LKPZC equal to zero.
Binary interaction parameters LKPKIJ are available for a large number of
components in the Aspen Physical Property System, from Knapp et al.
References
B.I. Lee and M.G. Kesler, AIChE J., Vol. 21, (1975) p. 510; errata: AIChE J.,
Vol. 21, (1975) p. 1040.
V. Plcker, H. Knapp, and J.M. Prausnitz, Ind. Eng. Chem., Process Des. Dev.,
Vol. 17, (1978), p. 324.
H. Knapp, R. Dring, L. Oellrich, U. Plcker, and J. M. Prausnitz. "Vapor-Liquid
Equilibria for Mixtures of Low Boiling Substances." Dechema Chemistry Data
Series, Vol. VI.

The NBS/NRC Steam Tables are implemented like any other equation-of-state
in the Aspen Physical Property System. These steam tables can calculate any
thermodynamic property of water. The tables form the basis of the
STEAMNBS and STMNBS2 property methods. There are no parameter
requirements. The STMNBS2 model uses the same equations as STEAMNBS
but with different root search method. The STEAMNBS method is
recommended for use with the SRK, BWRS, MXBONNEL and GRAYSON2
property methods.
32
References
L. Haar, J.S. Gallagher, and J.H. Kell, "NBS/NRC Steam Tables," (Washington:
Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 1984).
Nothnagel
The Nothnagel equation-of-state calculates thermodynamic properties for the
vapor phase. It is used in property methods NRTL-NTH, UNIQ-NTH, VANLNTH, and WILS-NTH. It is recommended for systems that exhibit strong vapor
phase association. The model incorporates the chemical theory of
dimerization to account for strong association and solvation effects, such as
those found in organic acids, like acetic acid. The equation-of-state is:
Where:
b
bij
nc
Number of components in the mixture
The chemical reaction for the general case of a mixture of dimerizing

components i and j is:
The chemical equilibrium constant for the dimerization reaction on pressure

basis Kp is related to the true mole fractions and fugacity coefficients:
Where:
yi and yj
True mole fractions of monomers
yij
True mole fraction of dimer
True fugacity coefficient of component i
Kij
Equilibrium constant for the dimerization of i and j, on a

pressure basis
When accounting for chemical reactions, the number of true species nt in the
mixture changes. The true molar volume V/nt is calculated from the
equation-of-state. Since both V and nt change in about the same proportion,
this number does not change much. However, the reported molar volume is
the total volume over the apparent number of species: V/na. Since the
apparent number of species is constant and the total volume decreases with
33
association, the quantity V/na reflects the apparent contraction in an

associating mixture.
The heat of reaction due to each dimerization can be calculated:
The heat of reaction for the mixed dimerization of components i and j is by

default the arithmetic mean of the heats of reaction for the dimerizations of
the individual components. Parameter
factor to this value:
is a small empirical correction
The sum of the contributions of all dimerization reactions, corrected for the
ratio of apparent and true number of moles, is added to the molar enthalpy
departure:
The equilibrium constants can be computed using either built-in calculations

or parameters you entered.
Built-in correlations:
The pure component parameters b, d, and p are stored in the Aspen
Physical Property System for many components.
Parameters you entered:
In this method, you enter Ai, Bi, Ci, and Di on the Properties Parameters
Unary.T-Dependent form. The units for Kii is pressure-1; use absolute units for
temperature. If you enter Kii and Kjj, then Kij is computed from
If you enter Ai, Bi, Ci, and Di, the equilibrium constants are computed using
the parameters you entered. Otherwise the equilibrium constants are
computed using built-in correlations.
34
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default
Lower
Limit
Upper Limit Units
TC
Tci
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
TB
Tbi
4.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
10
10
PC
pci
NTHA/1
bi
0.199 RTci / pci 0.01
1.0
PRESSURE
MOLE-VOLUME
NTHA/2
di
0.33
0.01
3.0
NTHA/3
pi
0.0
1.0
NTHK/1
Ai
PRESSURE
NTHK/2
Bi
TEMPERATURE
NTHK/3
Ci
TEMPERATURE
NTHK/4
Di
TEMPERATURE
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default
NTHDDH
Lower
Limit
Upper Limit Units
MOLEENTHALPY
For the following systems, the values given in Nothnagel et al., 1973 are
used by default:
Methyl chloride/acetone
Acetonitrile/acetaldehyde
Acetone/chloroform
Chloroform/diethyl amine
Acetone/benzene
Benzene/chloroform
Chloroform/diethyl ether
Chloroform/propyl formate
Chloroform/ethyl acetate
Chloroform/methyl acetate
Chloroform/methyl formate
Acetone/dichloro methane
n-Butane/n-perfluorobutane
n-Pentane/n-perfluoropentane
n-Pentane/n-perfluorohexane
References
K.-H. Nothnagel, D. S. Abrams, and J.M. Prausnitz, "Generalized Correlation
for Fugacity Coefficients in Mixtures at Moderate Pressures," Ind. Eng. Chem.,
Process Des. Dev., Vol. 12, No. 1 (1973), pp. 25 35.
Copolymer PC-SAFT EOS Model

This section describes the Copolymer Perturbed-Chain Statistical Associating
Fluid Theory (PC-SAFT). This equation-of-state model is used through the PCSAFT property method.
The copolymer PC-SAFT represents the completed PC-SAFT EOS model
developed by Sadowski and co-workers (Gross and Sadowski, 2001, 2002a,
2002b; Gross et al., 2003; Becker et al., 2004; Kleiner et al., 2006). Unlike
the PC-SAFT EOS model (POLYPCSF) in Aspen Plus, the copolymer PC-SAFT
includes the association and polar terms and does not apply mixing rules to
calculate the copolymer parameters from its segments. Its applicability covers
fluid systems from small to large molecules, including normal fluids, water,
alcohols, and ketones, polymers and copolymers and their mixtures.
Copolymer PC-SAFT Fundamental Equations

The copolymer PC-SAFT model is based on the perturbation theory. The
underlying idea is to divide the total intermolecular forces into repulsive and
attractive contributions. The model uses a hard-chain reference system to
35
account for the repulsive interactions. The attractive forces are further divided
into different contributions, including dispersion, polar, and association.
Using a generated function, , the copolymer PC-SAFT model in general can
be written as follows:
where hc, disp, assoc, and polar are contributions due to hard-chain fluids,
dispersion, association, and polarity, respectively.
The generated function
is defined as follows:
where ares is the molar residual Helmholtz energy of mixtures, R is the gas
constant, T is the temperature, is the molar density, and Zm is the
compressibility factor; ares is defined as:
where a is the Helmholtz energy of a mixture and aig is the Helmholtz energy
of a mixture of ideal gases at the same temperature, density and composition
xi. Once is known, any other thermodynamic function of interest can be
easily derived. For instance, the fugacity coefficient i is calculated as follows:
with
where
is a partial derivative that is always done to the mole fraction
stated in the denominator, while all other mole fractions are considered
constant.
Applying to the departure equations, departure functions of enthalpy,
entropy, and Gibbs free energy can be obtained as follows:
Enthalpy departure:
Entropy departure:
36
Gibbs free energy departure:
The following thermodynamic conditions must be satisfied:
Hard-chain Fluids and Chain Connectivity

In PC-SAFT model, a molecule is modeled as a chain molecule by a series of
freely-jointed tangent spheres. The contribution from hard-chain fluids as a
reference system consists of two parts, a nonbonding contribution (i.e., hardsphere mixtures prior to bonding to form chains) and a bonding contribution
due to chain formation:
where
is the mean segment in the mixture, hs is the contribution from
hard-sphere mixtures on a per-segment basis, and chain is the contribution
due to chain formation. Both
and hs are well-defined for mixtures
containing polymers, including copolymers; they are given by the following
equations:
where mi, i, and i are the segment number, the segment diameter, and
the segment energy parameter of the segment type in the copolymer
37
component i, respectively. The segment number mi is calculated from the

segment ratio parameter ri:
where Mi is the total molecular weight of the segment type in the

copolymer component i and can be calculated from the segment weight
fraction within the copolymer:
where wi is the weight fraction of the segment type in the copolymer

component i, and Mi is the molecular weight of the copolymer component i.
Following Sadowski and co-workers work ( Gross et al., 2003; Becker et al.,
2004), the contribution from the chain connectivity can be written as follows:
with
where Bii is defined as the bonding fraction between the segment type
and the segment type within the copolymer component i, is the number of
the segment types within the copolymer component i, and ghsi,j(di,j) is the
radial distribution function of hard-sphere mixtures at contact.
However, the calculation for Bii depends on the type of copolymers. We
start with a pure copolymer system which consists of only two different types
of segments and ; this gives:
with
We now apply these equations to three common types of copolymers; a)

alternating, b) block, and c) random.
For an alternating copolymer, m = m; there are no
sequences. Therefore:
38
or adjacent
For a block copolymer, there is only one pair and the number of
pairs depend on the length of each block; therefore:
and
For a random copolymer, the sequence is only known in a statistical sense. If

the sequence is completely random, then the number of adjacent pairs is
proportional to the product of the probabilities of finding a segment of type
and a segment of type in the copolymer. The probability of finding a
segment of type is the fraction of segments z in the copolymer:
The bonding fraction of each pair of types can be written as follows:
where C is a constant and can be determined by the normalization condition

set by Equation 2.70; the value for C is unity. Therefore:
A special case is the Sadowskis model for random copolymer with two types
of segments only ( Gross et al., 2003; Becker et al., 2004). In this model, the
bonding fractions are calculated as follows:
When z < z
When z < z
The generalization of three common types of copolymers from two types of

different segments to multi types of different segments within a copolymer
is straightforward.
For a generalized alternative copolymer, m = m = ... = mr = m/ ; there
are no adjacent sequences for the same type of segments. Therefore,
39
For a generalized block copolymer, there is only one pair for each adjacent
type of segment pairs ( ) and the number of pairs for a same type
depends on the length of the block; therefore:
For a generalized random copolymer, the sequence is only known in a

statistical sense. If the sequence is completely random, then the number of
adjacent pairs is proportional to the product of the probabilities of finding
a segment of type and a segment of type in the copolymer. The
probability of finding a segment of type is the fraction of segments z in
the copolymer:
The bonding fraction of each pair of types can be written as follows:
where C is a constant and can be determined by the normalization condition.

Therefore,
That is,
Put C into the equation above, we obtain:
40
Copolymer PC-SAFT Dispersion Term

The equations for the dispersion term are given as follows:
where i,j and i,j are the cross segment diameter and energy parameters,
respectively; only one adjustable binary interaction parameter, i,j is
introduced to calculate them:
41
In above equations, the model constants a1i, a2i, a3i, b1i, b2i, and b3i are fitted
to pure-component vapor pressure and liquid density data of n-alkanes (
Gross and Sadowski, 2001).
Association Term for Copolymer Mixtures - 2B

Model
The association term in PC-SAFT model in general needs an iterative
procedure to calculate the fraction of a species (solvent or segment) that are
bounded to each association-site type. Only in pure or binary systems, the
fraction can be derived explicitly for some specific models. We start with
general expressions for the association contribution for copolymer systems as
follows:
where A is the association-site type index,

is the association-site
number of the association-site type A on the segment type in the
copolymer component i, and
is the mole fraction of the segment type
in the copolymer component i that are not bonded with the association-site
type A; it can be estimated as follows:
with
where
is the cross effective association volume and
is the
cross association energy; they are estimated via simple combination rules:
where
and
are the effective association volume and the
association energy between the association-site types A and B, of the
segment type in the copolymer component i, respectively.
42
The association-site number of the site type A on the segment type

copolymer component i is equal to the number of the segment type
copolymer component i,
in the
in the
where Ni is the number of the segment type in the copolymer component i

and M is the molecular weight of the segment type . In other words, the
association-site number for each site type within a segment is the same;
therefore, we can rewrite the equations above as follows:
To calculate
, this equation has to be solved iteratively for each
association-site type associated with a species in a component. In practice,
further assumption is needed for efficiency. The commonly used model is the
so-called 2B model ( Huang and Radosz, 1990). It assumes that an
associating species (solvent or segment) has two association sites, one is
designed as the site type A and another as the site type B. Similarly to the
hydrogen bonding, type A treats as a donor site with positive charge and type
B as an acceptor site with negative charge; only the donor-acceptor
association bonding is permitted and this concept applies to both pure
systems (self-association such as water) and mixtures (both self-association
and cross-association such as water-methanol). Therefore, we can rewrite
these equations as follows:
It is easy to show that
Therefore
43
Polar Term for Copolymer PC-SAFT

The equations for the polar term are given by Jog et al. (2001) as follows:
In the above equations, I2() and I3() are the pure fluid integrals and i
and (xp)i are the dipole moment and dipolar fraction of the segment type
within the copolymer component i, respectively. Both
and
are dimensionless. In terms of them, we can have:
Rushbrooke et al. (1973) have shown that
44
Then I2() and I3() are computed in terms of
by the expressions:
Reference
Jog, P. K., Sauer, S. G., Blaesing, J., & Chapman, W. G. (2001), Application
of Dipolar Chain Theory to the Phase Behavior of Polar Fluids and Mixtures.
Ind. Eng. Chem. Res., 40, 4641.
Rushbrooke, G. S., & Stell, G., Hoye, J. S. (1973), Molec. Phys., 26, 1199.
Copolymer PC-SAFT EOS Model Parameters

Pure parameters
Each non-association species (solvent or segment) must have a set of three
pure-component parameter; two of them are the segment diameter and the
segment energy parameter . The third parameter for a solvent is the
segment number m and for a segment is the segment ratio parameter r. For
an association species, two additional parameters are the effective association
volume (AB) and the association energy (AB). For a polar species, two
additional parameters are the dipole moment and the segment dipolar
fraction xp.
Binary parameters
There are three types of binary interactions in copolymer systems: solventsolvent, solvent-segment, and segment-segment. The binary interaction
parameter i,j allows complex temperature dependence:
with
where Tref is a reference temperature and the default value is 298.15 K.

The following table lists the copolymer PC-SAFT EOS model parameters
implemented in Aspen Plus:
45
Parameter Symbol Default Lower Upper MDS Units

Comments
Name/
Limit Limit
Keyword
Element
PCSFTM
Unary
PCSFTV
Unary
PCSFTU
/k
TEMP
Unary
PCSFTR
Unary
PCSFAU
AB/k
TEMP
Unary
PCSFAV
AB
Unary
PCSFMU
Unary
PCSFXP
xp
Unary
PCSKIJ/1
ai,j
0.0
Binary,
Symmetric
PCSKIJ/2
bi,j
0.0
Binary,
Symmetric
PCSKIJ/3
ci,j
0.0
Binary,
Symmetric
PCSKIJ/4
di,j
0.0
Binary,
Symmetric
PCSKIJ/5
ei,j
0.0
Binary,
Symmetric
PCSKIJ/6
Tref
298.15
TEMP
Binary,
Symmetric
Parameter Input and Regression for Copolymer

PC-SAFT
Since the copolymer PC-SAFT is built based on the segment concept, the
unary (pure) parameters must be specified for a solvent or a segment.
Specifying a unary parameter for a polymer component (homopolymer or
copolymer) will be ignored by the simulation. For a non-association and nonpolar solvent, three unary parameters PCSFTM, PCSFTU, and PCSFTV must be
specified. For a non-association and non-polar segment, these three unary
parameters PCSFTR, PCSFTU, and PCSFTV must be specified. For an
association species (solvent or segment), two additional unary parameters
PCSFAU and PCSFAV must be specified. For a polar species (solvent or
segment), two additional unary parameters PCSFMU and PCSFXP must be
specified.
Note that the SI units for the segment diameter (PCSFTV) and dipole
moment (PCSFMU) are much too large to be practical. The implementation
of PC-SAFT in Aspen Plus has the unit in Angstroms () for the segment
diameter and in Debye (D) for the dipole moment; these units are not allowed
to be changed in PC-SAFT.
The binary parameter PCSKIJ can be specified for each solvent-solvent pair,
or each solvent-segment pair, or each segment-segment pair. By default, the
binary parameter is set to be zero.
46
A databank called PC-SAFT contains both unary and binary PC-SAFT

parameters available from literature; it must be used with the PC-SAFT
property method. The unary parameters available for segments are stored in
the SEGMENT databank. If unary parameters are not available for a species
(solvent or segment) in a calculation, the user can perform an Aspen Plus
Data Regression Run (DRS) to obtain unary parameters. For non-polymer
components (mainly solvents), the unary parameters are usually obtained by
fitting experimental vapor pressure and liquid molar volume data. To obtain
unary parameters for a segment, experimental data on liquid density of the
homopolymer that is built by the segment should be regressed. Once the
unary parameters are available for a segment, the ideal-gas heat capacity
parameter CPIG may be regressed for the same segment using experimental
liquid heat capacity data for the same homopolymer. In addition to unary
parameters, the binary parameter PCSKIJ for each solvent-solvent pair, or
each solvent-segment pair, or each segment-segment pair, can be regressed
using vapor-liquid equilibrium (VLE) data in the form of TPXY data in Aspen
Plus.
Note: In Data Regression Run, a homopolymer must be defined as an
OLIGOMER type, and the number of the segment that builds the oligomer
must be specified.
Peng-Robinson
The Peng-Robinson equation-of-state is the basis for the PENG-ROB and PRBM property methods. The model has been implemented with choices of
different alpha functions (see Peng-Robinson Alpha Functions) and has been
extended to include advanced asymmetric mixing rules.
Note: You can choose any of the available alpha functions, but you cannot
define multiple property methods based on this model using different alpha
functions within the same run.
By default, the PENG-ROB property method uses the literature version of the
alpha function and mixing rules. The PR-BM property method uses the
Boston-Mathias alpha function and standard mixing rules. These default
property methods are recommended for hydrocarbon processing applications
such as gas processing, refinery, and petrochemical processes. Their results
are comparable to those of the property methods that use the standard
Redlich-Kwong-Soave equation-of-state.
When advanced alpha function and asymmetric mixing rules are used with
appropriately obtained parameters, the Peng-Robinson model can be used to
accurately model polar, non-ideal chemical systems. Similar capability is also
available for the Soave-Redlich-Kwong model.
The equation for the Peng-Robinson model is:
Where:
47
= a0+a1
a0
=
(the standard quadratic mixing term, where kij has
been made temperature-dependent)
kij
=
kij = kji
a1
(an additional, asymmetric term used to model

highly non-linear systems)
lij
=
In general,
ai
bi
ci
For best results, the binary parameters kij and lij must be determined from
regression of phase equilibrium data such as VLE data. The Aspen Physical
Property System also has built-in kij and lij for a large number of component
pairs in the EOS-LIT databank from Knapp et al. These parameters are used
automatically with the PENG-ROB property method. Values in the databank
can be different than those used with other models such as Soave-RedlichKwong or Redlich-Kwong-Soave, and this can produce different results.
The model has option codes which can be used to customize the model, by
selecting a different alpha function and other model options. See PengRobinson Alpha Functions for a description of the alpha functions. See Option
Codes for Equation of State Models (under ESPR) for a list of the option
codes.
48
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
PRTC
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
10
10
PRPC
pci
PC
OMGPR
OMEGA x
-0.5
2.0
PRESSURE
PRZRA
zRA
RKTZRA x
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
PRKBV/1
kij(1)
PRKBV/2
kij(2)
TEMPERATURE
PRKBV/3
kij(3)
TEMPERATURE
PRKBV/4
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
PRKBV/5
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
PRLIJ/1
lij(1)
PRLIJ/2
lij(2)
TEMPERATURE
PRLIJ/3
lij(3)
TEMPERATURE
PRLIJ/4
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
PRLIJ/5
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
References
D.-Y. Peng and D. B. Robinson, "A New Two-Constant Equation-of-state," Ind.
Eng. Chem. Fundam., Vol. 15, (1976), pp. 5964.
P.M. Mathias, H.C. Klotz, and J.M. Prausnitz, "Equation of state mixing rules
for multicomponent mixtures: the problem of invariance," Fluid Phase
Equilibria, Vol 67, (1991), pp. 31-44.
Series, Vol. VI.
The Standard Peng-Robinson equation-of-state is the original formulation of
the Peng-Robinson equation of state with the standard alpha function (see
Peng-Robinson Alpha Functions). It is recommended for hydrocarbon
processing applications such as gas processing, refinery, and petrochemical
processes. Its results are comparable to those of the standard RedlichKwong-Soave equation of state.
The equation for this model is:
Where:
b
49
ai
bi
kij
The model has option codes which can be used to customize the model, by
selecting a different alpha function and other model options. See PengRobinson Alpha Functions for a description of the alpha functions. See Option
Codes for Equation of State Models (under ESPRSTD) for a list of the option
codes.
For best results, the binary parameter kij must be determined from regression
of phase equilibrium data such as VLE data. The Aspen Physical Property
System also has built-in kij for a large number of component pairs in the EOSLIT databank. These parameters are used automatically with the PENG-ROB
property method. Values in the databank can be different than those used
with other models such as Soave-Redlich-Kwong or Redlich-Kwong-Soave,
and this can produce different results.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCPRS
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
10
10
PCPRS
pci
PC
OMGPRS
OMEGA x
-0.5
2.0
PRESSURE
PRKBV/1
kij(1)
PRKBV/2
kij(2)
TEMPERATURE
PRKBV/3
kij(3)
TEMPERATURE
PRKBV/4
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
PRKBV/5
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
References
D.-Y. Peng and D. B. Robinson, "A New Two-Constant Equation-of-state," Ind.
Eng. Chem. Fundam., Vol. 15, (1976), pp. 5964.
Peng-Robinson-MHV2
This model uses the Peng-Robinson equation-of-state for pure compounds.
The mixing rules are the predictive MHV2 rules. Several alpha functions can
be used in the Peng-Robinson-MHV2 equation-of-state model for a more
accurate description of the pure component behavior. The pure component
behavior and parameter requirements are described in Standard PengRobinson, or in Peng-Robinson Alpha Functions.
The MHV2 mixing rules are an example of modified Huron-Vidal mixing rules.
A brief introduction is provided in Huron-Vidal Mixing Rules. For more details,
see MHV2 Mixing Rules.
50
Predictive SRK (PSRK)

This model uses the Redlich-Kwong-Soave equation-of-state for pure
compounds. The mixing rules are the predictive Holderbaum rules, or PSRK
method. Several alpha functions can be used in the PSRK equation-of-state
model for a more accurate description of the pure component behavior. The
pure component behavior and parameter requirements are described in
Standard Redlich-Kwong-Soave and in Soave Alpha Functions.
The PSRK method is an example of modified Huron-Vidal mixing rules. A brief
introduction is provided in Huron-Vidal Mixing Rules. For more details, see
Predictive Soave-Redlich-Kwong-Gmehling Mixing Rules.
Peng-Robinson-Wong-Sandler
This model uses the Peng-Robinson equation-of-state for pure compounds.
The mixing rules are the predictive Wong-Sandler rules. Several alpha
functions can be used in the Peng-Robinson-Wong-Sandler equation-of-state
model for a more accurate description of the pure component behavior. The
pure component behavior and parameter requirements are described in PengRobinson, and in Peng-Robinson Alpha Functions.
The Wong-Sandler mixing rules are an example of modified Huron-Vidal
mixing rules. A brief introduction is provided in Huron-Vidal Mixing Rules. For
more details see Wong-Sandler Mixing Rules., this chapter.
Redlich-Kwong
The Redlich-Kwong equation-of-state can calculate vapor phase
thermodynamic properties for the following property methods: NRTL-RK,
UNIFAC, UNIF-LL, UNIQ-RK, VANL-RK, and WILS-RK. It is applicable for
systems at low to moderate pressures (maximum pressure 10 atm) for which
the vapor-phase nonideality is small. The Hayden-O'Connell model is
recommended for a more nonideal vapor phase, such as in systems
containing organic acids. It is not recommended for calculating liquid phase
properties.
The equation for the model is:
p
Where:
51
=
b
ai
bi
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TC
Tci
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PC
pci
10
10
PRESSURE
References
O. Redlich and J.N.S. Kwong, "On the Thermodynamics of Solutions V. An
Equation-of-state. Fugacities of Gaseous Solutions," Chem. Rev., Vol. 44,
(1979), pp. 223 244.
Redlich-Kwong-Aspen
The Redlich-Kwong-Aspen equation-of-state is the basis for the RK-ASPEN
property method. It can be used for hydrocarbon processing applications. It is
also used for more polar components and mixtures of hydrocarbons, and for
light gases at medium to high pressures.
The equation is the same as Redlich-Kwong-Soave:
p
A quadratic mixing rule is maintained for:

a
An interaction parameter is introduced in the mixing rule for:

b
For ai an extra polar parameter is used:

ai
bi
The interaction parameters are temperature-dependent:
52
ka,ij
kb,ij
For best results, binary parameters kij must be determined from phaseequilibrium data regression, such as VLE data.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCRKA
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
10
10
PCRKA
pci
PC
OMGRKA
-0.5
2.0
RKAPOL
i
i
OMEGA x
PRESSURE
-2.0
2.0
RKAKA0
ka,ij0
-5.0
5.0
RKAKA1
ka,ij1
-15.0
15.0
TEMPERATURE
RKAKB0
kb,ij0
-5.0
5.0
RKAKB1
kb,ij1
-15.0
15.0
TEMPERATURE
References
Mathias, P.M., "A Versatile Phase Equilibrium Equation-of-state", Ind. Eng.
Chem. Process Des. Dev., Vol. 22, (1983), pp. 385 391.
Redlich-Kwong-Soave
This is the standard Redlich-Kwong-Soave equation-of-state, and is the basis
for the RK-SOAVE property method. It is recommended for hydrocarbon
processing applications, such as gas-processing, refinery, and petrochemical
processes. Its results are comparable to those of the Peng-Robinson
equation-of-state.
The equation is:
Where:
a0 is the standard quadratic mixing term:
a1 is an additional, asymmetric (polar) term:
53
ai
bi
kij = kji
;
The parameter ai is calculated according to the standard Soave formulation

(see Soave Alpha Functions, equations 1, 2, 3, 5, and 6).
The model uses option codes which are described in Soave-Redlich-Kwong
Option Codes.
For best results, binary parameters kij must be determined from phaseequilibrium data regression (for example, VLE data). The Aspen Physical
Property System also has built-in kij for a large number of component pairs in
the EOS-LIT databank from Knapp et al. These binary parameters are used
automatically with the RK-SOAVE property method. Values of kij in the
databank can be different than those used with other models such as SoaveRedlich-Kwong or Standard Peng-Robinson, and this can produce different
results.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCRKSS
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
10
10
PCRKSS
pci
PC
PRESSURE
OMRKSS
OMEGA x
-0.5
2.0
RKSKBV/1
kij(1)
-5.0
5.0
RKSKBV/2
kij(2)
TEMPERATURE
RKSKBV/3
kij(3)
TEMPERATURE
RKSKBV/4
Tk,lower
TEMPERATURE
RKSKBV/5
Tk,upper
1000
TEMPERATURE
RKSLBV/1
lij(1)
RKSLBV/2
lij(2)
TEMPERATURE
RKSLBV/3
lij(3)
TEMPERATURE
RKSLBV/4
Tl,lower
TEMPERATURE
RKSLBV/5
Tl,upper
1000
TEMPERATURE
References
G. Soave, "Equilibrium Constants for Modified Redlich-Kwong Equation-ofstate," Chem. Eng. Sci., Vol. 27, (1972), pp. 1196 1203.
54
J. Schwartzentruber and H. Renon, "Extension of UNIFAC to High Pressures

and Temperatures by the Use of a Cubic Equation-of-state," Ind. Eng. Chem.
Res., Vol. 28, (1989), pp. 1049 1955.
A. Peneloux, E. Rauzy, and R. Freze, "A Consistent Correction For RedlichKwong-Soave Volumes", Fluid Phase Eq., Vol. 8, (1982), pp. 723.
Series, Vol. VI.
Redlich-Kwong-Soave-Boston-Mathias
The Redlich-Kwong-Soave-Boston-Mathias equation-of-state is the basis for
the RKS-BM property method. It is the Redlich-Kwong-Soave equation-ofstate with the Boston-Mathias alpha function (see Soave Alpha Functions). It
is recommended for hydrocarbon processing applications, such as gasprocessing, refinery, and petrochemical processes. Its results are comparable
to those of the Peng-Robinson-Boston-Mathias equation-of-state.
The equation is:
p
Where:
ai
bi
kij = kji
55
The parameter ai is calculated by the standard Soave formulation at

supercritical temperatures. If the component is supercritical, the BostonMathias extrapolation is used (see Soave Alpha Functions).
Option Codes.
For best results, binary parameters kij must be determined from phaseequilibrium data regression (for example, VLE data).
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCRKS
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PCRKS
pci
PC
105
108
PRESSURE
OMGRKS
OMEGA x
-0.5
2.0
RKSKBV/1
kij(1)
-5.0
5.0
RKSKBV/2
kij(2)
TEMPERATURE
RKSKBV/3
kij(3)
TEMPERATURE
RKSKBV/4
Tk,lower
TEMPERATURE
RKSKBV/5
Tk,upper
1000
TEMPERATURE
RKSLBV/1
lij(1)
RKSLBV/2
lij(2)
TEMPERATURE
RKSLBV/3
lij(3)
TEMPERATURE
RKSLBV/4
Tl,lower
TEMPERATURE
RKSLBV/5
Tl,upper
1000
TEMPERATURE
References
G. Soave, "Equilibrium Constants for Modified Redlich-Kwong Equation-ofstate," Chem. Eng. Sci., Vol. 27, (1972), pp. 1196 1203.
Redlich-Kwong-Soave-Wong-Sandler
This equation-of-state model uses the Redlich-Kwong-Soave equation-of-state
for pure compounds. The predictive Wong-Sandler mixing rules are used.
Several alpha functions can be used in the Redlich-Kwong-Soave-WongSandler equation-of-state model for a more accurate description of the pure
component behavior. The pure component behavior and parameter
requirements are described in Standard Redlich-Kwong-Soave, and in Soave
Alpha Functions.
The Wong-Sandler mixing rules are an example of modified Huron-Vidal
mixing rules. A brief introduction is provided in Huron-Vidal Mixing Rules. For
more details, see Wong-Sandler Mixing Rules.
56
Redlich-Kwong-Soave-MHV2
This equation-of-state model uses the Redlich-Kwong-Soave equation-of-state
for pure compounds. The predictive MHV2 mixing rules are used. Several
alpha functions can be used in the RK-Soave-MHV2 equation-of-state model
for a more accurate description of the pure component behavior. The pure
component behavior and its parameter requirements are described in
Standard Redlich-Kwong-Soave, and in Soave Alpha Functions.
The MHV2 mixing rules are an example of modified Huron-Vidal mixing rules.
A brief introduction is provided in Huron-Vidal Mixing Rules. For more details,
see MHV2 Mixing Rules.
The Schwartzentruber-Renon equation-of-state is the basis for the SR-POLAR
property method. It can be used to model chemically nonideal systems with
the same accuracy as activity coefficient property methods, such as the
WILSON property method. This equation-of-state is recommended for highly
non-ideal systems at high temperatures and pressures, such as in methanol
synthesis and supercritical extraction applications.
The equation for the model is:
p
Where:
a
ai
bi
ci
=
(for T < Tci)
ka,ij
lij
57
kb,ij
ka,ij
ka,ji
lij
-lji
kb,ij
kb,ji
The binary parameters ka,ij, kb,ij, and lij are temperature-dependent. In most
cases, ka,ij0 and lij0 are sufficient to represent the system of interest.
VLE calculations are independent of c. However, c does influence the fugacity
values and can be adjusted to (liquid) molar volumes. For a wide temperature
range, adjust ci0 to the molar volume at 298.15K or at boiling temperature.
The ai are calculated using the Extended Mathias Alpha Function, as described
in Soave Alpha Functions.
Warning: Using c1i and c2i can cause anomalous behavior in enthalpy and
heat capacity. Their use is strongly discouraged.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCRKU
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PCRKU
pci
PC
105
108
PRESSURE
OMGRKU
OMEGA x
-0.5
2.0
RKUPP0
q0i
RKUPP1
q1i
RKUPP2
q2i
RKUC0
c0i
RKUC1
c1i
RKUC2
c2i
RKUKA0
ka,ij0
RKUKA1
ka,ij1
TEMPERATURE
RKUKA2
ka,ij2
TEMPERATURE
RKULA0
lij0
RKULA1
lij1
TEMPERATURE
RKULA2
lij2
TEMPERATURE
RKUKB0
kb,ij0
RKUKB1
kb,ij1
TEMPERATURE
RKUKB2
kb,ij2
TEMPERATURE
Absolute temperature units are assumed for ka,ij , lij , and kb,ij2.
For polar components (dipole moment >> 0), if you do not enter q0i, the
system estimates q0i, q1i, q2i from vapor pressures using the Antoine vapor
pressure model.
If you do not enter at least one of the binary parameters ka,ij0, ka,ij2, lij0,
lij2, kb,ij0, or kb,ij2 the system estimates ka,ij0, ka,ij2, lij0, and lij2 from the UNIFAC
or Hayden O'Connell models.
58
RKUC0, RKUC1, and RKUC2 are treated as having units m3/kmol. No unit
conversion to other molar volume units is done.
References
G. Soave, "Equilibrium Constants for Modified Redlich-Kwong Equation-ofstate," Chem. Eng. Sci., Vol. 27, (1972), pp. 1196 - 1203.
and Temperatures by the Use of a Cubic Equation-of-State," Ind. Eng. Chem.
Res., Vol. 28, (1989), pp. 1049 1955.
Soave-Redlich-Kwong
The Soave-Redlich-Kwong equation-of-state is the basis of the SRK property
method. This model is based on the same equation of state as the RedlichKwong-Soave model. However, this model has several important differences.
A volume translation concept introduced by Peneloux and Rauzy is used to

improve molar liquid volume calculated from the cubic equation of state.
Improvement in water properties is achieved by using the NBS Steam

Table.
Improvement in speed of computation for equation based calculation is

achieved by using composition independent fugacity.
Optional Kabadi-Danner mixing rules for improved phase equilibrium

calculations in water-hydrocarbon systems (see SRK-Kabadi-Danner)
Optional Mathias alpha function
This equation-of-state can be used for hydrocarbon systems that include the
common light gases, such as H2S, CO2 and N2.
Where:
Where:
;
59
Where:
;
The enthalpy, entropy, Gibbs energy, and molar volume of water are
calculated from the steam tables. The total properties are mole-fraction
averages of these values with the properties calculated by the equation of
state for other components. Fugacity coefficient is not affected.
For best results, the binary parameter kij must be determined from phase
equilibrium data regression (for example, VLE data). The Aspen Physical
Property System also has built-in kij for a large number of component pairs in
the SRK-ASPEN databank, regressed by AspenTech. These parameters are
used automatically with the SRK property method. Values of kij in the
databank can be different than those used with other models such as
Standard Redlich-Kwong-Soave or Standard Redlich-Kwong-Soave, and this
can produce different results.
Option Codes.
60
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
SRKTC
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
SRKPC
pci
PC
105
108
PRESSURE
SRKOMG
OMEGA
0.5
2.0
SRKZRA
zRA
RKTZRA
SRKKIJ/1
kij(1)
SRKKIJ/2
kij(2)
TEMPERATURE
SRKKIJ/3
kij(3)
TEMPERATURE
SRKKIJ/4
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
SRKKIJ/5
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
SRKLIJ/1
lij(1)
SRKLIJ/2
lij(2)
TEMPERATURE
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
SRKLIJ/3
lij(3)
TEMPERATURE
SRKLIJ/4
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
SRKLIJ/5
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
References
G. Soave, "Equilibrium Constants for Modified Redlich-Kwong Equation-ofstate," Chem. Eng. Sci., Vol. 27, (1972), pp. 1196 - 1203.
P.M. Mathias, H.C. Klotz, and J.M. Prausnitz, "Equation of state mixing rules
for multicomponent mixtures: the problem of invariance," Fluid Phase
Equilibria, Vol 67, (1991), pp. 31-44.
SRK-Kabadi-Danner
The SRK-Kabadi-Danner property model uses the SRK equation-of-state with
improved phase equilibrium calculations for mixtures containing water and
hydrocarbons. These improvements are achieved by using the Kabadi-Danner
mixing rules.
Where:
Where:
;
The best values of kwj (w = water) were obtained from experimental data.
Results are given for seven homologous series.
Best Fit Values of kwj for Different Homologous Series

with Water
Homologous series
kwj
Alkanes
0.500
Alkenes
0.393
Dialkenes
0.311
61
Homologous series
kwj
Acetylenes
0.348
Naphthenes
0.445
Cycloalkenes
0.355
Aromatics
0.315
aKD is the Kabadi-Danner term for water:
Where:
Gi is the sum of the group contributions of different groups which make up a

molecule of hydrocarbon i.
gl is the group contribution parameter for groups constituting hydrocarbons.
Groups Constituting Hydrocarbons and Their Group

Contribution Parameters
Group l
gl , atm m6 x 105
CH4
1.3580
CH3
0.9822
CH2
1.0780
> CH
0.9728
>C<
0.8687
CH2 (cyclic)
0.7488
> CH (cyclic)
0.7352
CH = CH (cyclic)
0.6180
CH2 = CH2
1.7940
CH2 = CH
1.3450
CH2 = C<
0.9066
CH CH
1.6870
CH C
1.1811
CH =
0.5117
> C = (aromatic)
0.3902
This value is obtained from very little data. Might not be reliable.
Option Codes.
SRK-Kabadi-Danner uses the same parameters as SRK, with added
interaction parameters. Do not specify values for the SRKLIJ parameters
when using SRK-KD.
62
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
SRKTC
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
SRKPC
pci
PC
105
108
PRESSURE
SRKOMG
OMEGA
0.5
2.0
SRKWF
Gi
SRKZRA
zRA
RKTZRA
SRKKIJ/1
kij(1)
SRKKIJ/2
kij(2)
TEMPERATURE
SRKKIJ/3
kij(3)
TEMPERATURE
SRKKIJ/4
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
SRKKIJ/5
Tupper
TEMPERATURE
References
V. Kabadi and R. P. Danner, "A Modified Soave-Redlich-Kwong Equation of
State for Water-Hydrocarbon Phase Equilibria", Ind. Eng. Chem. Process Des.
Dev., Vol. 24, No. 3, (1985), pp. 537-541.
SRK-ML
The SRK-ML property model is the same as the Soave-Redlich-Kwong model
with two exceptions:
kij does not equal kji for non-ideal systems; they are unsymmetric, and a
different set of parameters is used, as shown below.
The lij are calculated from the equation lij = kji - kij
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
SMLTC
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
SMLPC
pci
PC
105
108
PRESSURE
SMLOMG
OMEGA
0.5
2.0
SMLZRA
zRA
RKTZRA
SMLCMP
SRKMLP
-2.0
2.0
SRKGLP
SMLKIJ/1
kij(1)
SMLKIJ/2
kij(2)
TEMPERATURE
SMLKIJ/3
kij(3)
TEMPERATURE
SMLKIJ/4
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
SMLKIJ/5
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
63
Additional Parameters
SMLZRA is used in Peneloux-Rauzy volume translation as described in SoaveRedlich-Kwong. This volume translation feature can be enabled by setting
option code 4 to 1, but is disabled by default (in which case this parameter is
not used).
SMLCMP is the Composition Independent Fugacity Calculation Flag. You can
use this flag to indicate the component for which its fugacity coefficient in the
mixture will be calculated such that it is independent of composition. The
calculated fugacity coefficient of that component is simply the purecomponent fugacity coefficient. This is a simplification. Enter a value of 1 for
the element i to indicate that the fugacity coefficient of component i is
independent of composition. This parameter defaults to zero.
SRKMLP is a polar parameter for the Mathias alpha function.
SRKGLP is a vector of parameters for the Gibbons-Laughton alpha function.
VPA/IK-CAPE Equation-of-State
The VPA/IK-CAPE equation of state is similar to the HF equation of state but
allows dimerization, tetramerization and hexamerization to occur
simultaneously. The main assumption of the model is that only molecular
association causes the gas phase nonideality. Attractive forces between the
molecules and the complexes are neglected.
There are three kinds of associations, which can be modeled:
Dimerization (examples: formic acid, acetic acid)
Tetramerization (example: acetic acid)
Hexamerization (example: hydrogen fluoride)
To get the largest possible flexibility of the model all these kinds of
association can occur simultaneously, for example, in a mixture containing
acetic acid and HF. Up to five components can associate, and any number of
inert components are allowed. This is the only difference between this model
and the HF equation of state, which account only the hexamerization of HF.
Symbols
In the following description, these symbols are used:
64
yi
Apparent concentration
zin
True concentration, for component i and degree of

association n=1, 2, 4, 6
zMij
True concentration of cross-dimers of components i

and j, for i,j 1 to 5.
p0
Reference pressure
Number of components
Association Equilibria
Every association equilibrium reaction
(1)
(2)
is described by the equilibrium constants
(3)
(4)
By setting
(5)
(6)
their temperature dependence can be reproduced.
To evaluate the true concentration of every complex zin, the following
nonlinear systems of equations are to be solved:
Total mass balance:
The sum of true concentrations is unity.
(7)
Mass balance for every component i>1:

The ratio of the monomers of each component i>1 and component i=1
occurring in the various complexes must be equal to the ratio of their
apparent concentrations.
(8)
Thus, a system of k nonlinear equations for k unknowns zi1 has been

developed. After having solved it, all the zin and zMij can be determined using
65
equations (3, 4). This is the main step to evaluate all the properties needed
for a calculation.
Specific Volume of the Gas Phase

The compressibility factor is defined by the ratio between the number of
complexes and the number of monomers in the complexes.
(9)
The compressibility factor itself is

(10)
Fugacity Coefficient
As is well-known from thermodynamics, the fugacity coefficient can be
calculated by
(11)
Isothermal Enthalpy Departure

According to the ASPEN enthalpy model, an equation of state must supply an
expression to compute the isothermal molar enthalpy departure between zero
pressure and actual pressure. In the following section this enthalpy
contribution per mole monomers is abbreviated by ha.
Taking this sort of gas phase non-ideality into account, the specific enthalpy
per mole can be written as
(12)
with
(13)
to evaluate ha, a mixture consisting of N monomers integrated in the

complexes is considered. The quota of monomers i being integrated in a
complex of degree n is given by
66
(14)
and
(16)
respectively. For the reactions mentioned above:

(1)
(2)
the enthalpies of reaction are
(17)
(18)
as the van't Hoff equation

(19)
holds for this case.

For each monomer being integrated in a complex of degree n, its contribution
to the enthalpy departure is hin / n or hMij / 2, respectively. Hence, ha can
easily be derived by
(20)
Isothermal entropy and Gibbs energy departure:

A similar expression for
(eq. 20):
ga should hold as it does for the enthalpy departure

(21)
67
using
(22)
and
(23)
(24)
Using the association model, more different species occur than can be
distinguished. Thus, the equivalent expression for the entropy of mixing
should be written with the true concentrations. As eq. 24 refers to 1 mole
monomers, the expression should be weighted by the compressibility factor
representing the true number of moles. The new expression is
(25)
For
ga we obtain
(26)
and, analogously,
(27)
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
DMER/1
Ai2
DMER/2
Bi2
TEMPERATURE
TMER/1
Ai4
TMER/2
Bi4
TEMPERATURE
HMER/1
Ai6
HMER/2
Bi6
TEMPERATURE
References
M. M. Abbott and H. C. van Ness, "Thermodynamics of Solutions Containing
Reactive Species, a Guide to Fundamentals and Applications," Fluid Phase Eq.,
Vol. 77, (1992) pp. 53119.
V. V. De Leeuw and S. Watanasiri, "Modeling Phase Equilibria and Enthalpies
of the System Water and Hydrofluoric Acid Using an HF Equation-of-state in
Conjunction with the Electrolyte NRTL Activity Coefficient Model," Paper
Presented at the 13th European Seminar on Applied Thermodynamics, June
912, Carry-le-Rouet, France, 1993.
68
R. W. Long, J. H. Hildebrand, and W. E. Morrell, "The Polymerization of

Gaseous Hydrogen and Deuterium Fluorides," J. Am. Chem. Soc., Vol. 65,
(1943), pp. 182187.
C. E. Vanderzee and W. Wm. Rodenburg, "Gas Imperfections and
Thermodynamic Excess Properties of Gaseous Hydrogen Fluoride," J. Chem.
Thermodynamics, Vol. 2, (1970), pp. 461478.
Peng-Robinson Alpha Functions

The pure component parameters for the Peng-Robinson equation-of-state are
calculated as follows:
(1)
(2)
These expressions are derived by applying the critical constraints to the

equation-of-state under these conditions:
(3)
The parameter is a temperature function. It was originally introduced by
Soave in the Redlich-Kwong equation-of-state. This parameter improves the
correlation of the pure component vapor pressure.
Note: You can choose any of the alpha functions described here, but you
cannot define multiple property methods based on this model using different
alpha functions within the same run.
This approach was also adopted by Peng and Robinson:
(4)
Equation 3 is still represented. The parameter mi can be correlated with the
acentric factor:
(5)
Equations 1 through 5 are the standard Peng-Robinson formulation. The
Peng-Robinson alpha function is adequate for hydrocarbons and other
nonpolar compounds, but is not sufficiently accurate for polar compounds.
temperature units.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCPR
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PCPR
pci
PC
105
108
PRESSURE
OMGPR
OMEGA X
-0.5
2.0
69
Boston-Mathias Extrapolation
For light gases at high reduced temperatures (> 5), equation 4 gives
unrealistic results. The boundary conditions are that attraction between
molecules should vanish for extremely high temperatures, and reduces
asymptotically to zero. Boston and Mathias derived an alternative function for
temperatures higher than critical:
(6)
With
=
Where mi is computed by equation 5, and equation 4 is used for subcritical

temperatures. Additional parameters are not needed.
Extended Gibbons-Laughton Alpha Function

The extended Gibbons-Laughton alpha function is suitable for use with both
polar and nonpolar components. It has the flexibility to fit the vapor pressure
of most substances from the triple point to the critical point.
Where Tr is the reduced temperature; Xi, Yi and Zi are substance dependent

parameters.
This function is equivalent to the standard Peng-Robinson alpha function if
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
PRGLP/1
PRGLP/2
PRGLP/3
PRGLP/4
PRGLP/5
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
PRGLP/6
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
Twu Generalized Alpha Function

The Twu generalized alpha function is a theoretically-based function that is
currently recognized as the best available alpha function. It behaves better
than other functions at supercritical conditions (T > Tc) and when the acentric
factor is large. The improved behavior at high values of acentric factor is
important for high molecular weight pseudocomponents. There is no limit on
the minimum value of acentric factor that can be used with this function.
70
Where the L, M, and N are parameters that vary depending on the equation of
state and whether the temperature is above or below the critical temperature
of the component.
For Peng-Robinson equation of state:
Subcritical T
Supercritical T
0.272838
0.373949
(0)
0.924779
4.73020
(0)
1.19764
-0.200000
L(1)
0.625701
0.0239035
(1)
0.792014
1.24615
(1)
2.46022
-8.000000
L(0)
M
M
N
Twu Alpha Function

The Twu alpha function is a theoretically-based function that is currently
recognized as the best available alpha function. It behaves better than other
functions at supercritical conditions (T > Tc).
Where the L, M, and N are substance-dependent parameters that must be

determined from regression of pure-component vapor pressure data or other
data such as liquid heat capacity.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
PRTWUP/1
PRTWUP/2
PRTWUP/3
Mathias-Copeman Alpha Function

This is an extension of the Peng-Robinson alpha function which provides a
more accurate fit of vapor pressure for polar compounds.
(7)
For c2,i = 0 and c3,i = 0, this expression reduces to the standard PengRobinson formulation if c2,i = mi. You can use vapor pressure data if the
temperature is subcritical to regress the constants. If the temperature is
supercritical, c2,i and c3,i are set to 0.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCPR
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PCPR
pci
PC
10
10
PRESSURE
71
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
PRMCP/1
c1,i
PRMCP/2
c2,i
PRMCP/3
c3,i
Schwartzentruber-Renon-Watanasiri Alpha Function

The Schwartzentruber-Renon-Watanasiri alpha function is:
(8)
Where mi is computed by equation 5. The polar parameters p1,i, p2,i and p3,i
are comparable with the c parameters of the Mathias-Copeman expression.
Equation 8 reduces to the standard Peng-Robinson formulation if the polar
parameters are zero. Equation 8 is used only for below-critical temperatures.
For above-critical temperatures, the Boston-Mathias extrapolation is used.
Use equation 6 with:
(9)
(10)
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCPR
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
10
10
PCPR
pci
PC
OMGPR
OMEGA X
-0.5
2.0
PRESSURE
PRSRP/1
PRSRP/2
PRSRP/3
Use of Alpha Functions

The alpha functions in Peng-Robinson-based equation-of-state models is
provided in the following table. You can verify and change the value of
possible option codes on the Properties | Property Methods | Model form.
Alpha function
72
Model name
First Option code
Standard Peng Robinson ESPRSTD0, ESPRSTD
Standard PR/
Boston-Mathias
ESPR0, ESPR
ESPRWS0, ESPRWS
ESPRV20, ESPRV2
0
0
0
Extended GibbonsLaughton
ESPR0, ESPR
Twu Generalized alpha

function
ESPR0, ESPR
Twu alpha function
ESPR0, ESPR
Alpha function
Model name
First Option code
Mathias-Copeman
ESPRWS0, ESPRWS
ESPRV20, ESPRV2
2
2
SchwartzentruberRenonWatanasiri
ESPRWS0, ESPRWS
ESPRV20, ESPRV2
3 (default)
3 (default)
References
J. F. Boston and P.M. Mathias, "Phase Equilibria in a Third-Generation Process
Simulator" in Proceedings of the 2nd International Conference on Phase
Equilibria and Fluid Properties in the Chemical Process Industries, West Berlin,
(17-21 March 1980) pp. 823-849.
D.-Y. Peng and D.B. Robinson, "A New Two-Constant Equation-of-state," Ind.
Eng. Chem. Fundam., Vol. 15, (1976), pp. 59-64.
P.M. Mathias and T.W. Copeman, "Extension of the Peng-Robinson Equationof-state To Complex Mixtures: Evaluation of the Various Forms of the Local
Composition Concept",Fluid Phase Eq., Vol. 13, (1983), p. 91.
J. Schwartzentruber, H. Renon, and S. Watanasiri, "K-values for Non-Ideal
Systems:An Easier Way," Chem. Eng., March 1990, pp. 118-124.
G. Soave, "Equilibrium Constants for a Modified Redlich-Kwong Equation-ofstate," Chem Eng. Sci., Vol. 27, (1972), pp. 1196-1203.
C.H. Twu, J. E. Coon, and J.R. Cunningham, "A New Cubic Equation of State,"
Fluid Phase Equilib., Vol. 75, (1992), pp. 65-79.
C.H. Twu, D. Bluck, J.R. Cunningham, and J.E. Coon, "A Cubic Equation of
State with a New Alpha Function and a New Mixing Rule," Fluid Phase Equilib.,
Vol. 69, (1991), pp. 33-50.
Soave Alpha Functions

The pure component parameters for the Redlich-Kwong equation-of-state are
calculated as:
(1)
(2)
These expressions are derived by applying the critical constraint to the

equation-of-state under these conditions:
(3)
Note: You can choose any of the alpha functions described here, but you
cannot define multiple property methods based on this model using different
alpha functions within the same run.
In the Redlich-Kwong equation-of-state, alpha is:
73
(4)

temperature units.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TC
Tci
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PC
pci
105
108
PRESSURE
Soave Modification
The parameter i is a temperature function introduced by Soave in the
Redlich-Kwong equation-of-state to improve the correlation of the pure
component vapor pressure:
(5)
Equation 3 still holds. The parameter mi can be correlated with the acentric
factor:
(6)
Equations 1, 2, 3, 5 and 6 are the standard Redlich-Kwong-Soave
formulation. The Soave alpha function is adequate for hydrocarbons and other
nonpolar compounds, but is not sufficiently accurate for polar compounds.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCRKS
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PCRKS
pci
PC
OMGRKS
OMEGA X
10
10
-0.5
2.0
PRESSURE
Boston-Mathias Extrapolation
For light gases at high reduced temperatures (> 5), equation 5 gives
unrealistic results. The boundary conditions are that attraction between
molecules should vanish for extremely high temperatures, and
reduces
asymptotically to zero. Boston and Mathias derived an alternative function for
temperatures higher than critical:
(7)
With
di
ci
Where:
74
mi
Computed by equation 6
Equation 5
Used for subcritical temperatures
Additional parameters are not needed.
Mathias Alpha Function

This is an extension of the Soave alpha function which provides a more
accurate fit of vapor pressure for polar compounds.
(8)
For i=0, equation 8 reduces to the standard Redlich-Kwong-Soave
formulation, equations 5 and 6. For temperatures above critical, the BostonMathias extrapolation is used, that is, equation 7 with:
(9)
(10)
The Mathias alpha function is used in the Redlich-Kwong-Aspen model, which

is the basis for the RK-ASPEN property method. This alpha function is also
available as an option for SRK, SRKKD, SRK-ML, RK-SOAVE, and RKS-BM.
See Soave-Redlich-Kwong Option Codes for more information.
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCRKA
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
Tci
PCRKA
pci
PC
OMGRKA
OMEGA X
-0.5
2.0
-2.0
2.0
10
10
PRESSURE
RKAPOL for Redlich-Kwong-Aspen, SRKPOL for SRK and SRKKD, SRKMLP for
SRK-ML, RKSPOL for RKS-BM, or RKSSPO for RK-SOAVE.
Extended Mathias Alpha Function

An extension of the Mathias approach is:
(11)
Where mi is computed by equation 6. If the polar parameters p1,i, p2,i and p3,i
are zero, equation 11 reduces to the standard Redlich-Kwong-Soave
formulation. You can use vapor pressure data to regress the constants if the
temperature is subcritical. Equation 11 is used only for temperatures below
critical.
The Boston-Mathias extrapolation is used for temperatures above critical, that
is, with:
(12)
75
(13)
This alpha function is used in the Redlich-Kwong-UNIFAC model which is the

basis for the SR-POLAR property method.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCRKU
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
10
10
PCRKU
pci
PC
PRESSURE
OMGRKU
OMEGA X
-0.5
2.0
RKUPP0
p1,i
RKUPP1
p2,i
RKUPP2
p3,i
Mathias-Copeman Alpha Function

The Mathias-Copeman alpha function is suitable for use with both polar and
nonpolar components. It has the flexibility to fit the vapor pressure of most
substances from the triple point to the critical point.
(14)
For c2,i=0 and c3,i=0 this expression reduces to the standard Redlich-KwongSoave formulation if c1,i=mi. If the temperature is subcritical, use vapor
pressure data to regress the constants. If the temperature is supercritical, set
c2,i and c3,i to 0.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCRKS
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
10
PCRKS
pci
PC
10
RKSMCP/1
c1,i
PRESSURE
RKSMCP/2
c2,i
RKSMCP/3
c3,i
Schwartzentruber-Renon-Watanasiri Alpha Function

The Schwartzentruber-Renon-Watanasiri alpha function is:
(15)
Where mi is computed by equation 6 and the polar parameters p1,i, p2,i and
p3,i are comparable with the c parameters of the Mathias-Copeman
expression. Equation 15 reduces to the standard Redlich-Kwong-Soave
formulation if the polar parameters are zero. Equation 15 is very similar to
the extended Mathias equation, but it is easier to use in data regression. It is
used only for temperatures below critical. The Boston-Mathias extrapolation is
used for temperatures above critical, that is, use equation 7 with:
(16)
76
(17)
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCRKS
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
10
10
PCRKS
pci
PC
PRESSURE
OMGRKS
OMEGA X
-0.5
2.0
RKSSRP/1
p1,i
RKSSRP/2
p2,i
RKSSRP/3
p3,i
Extended Gibbons-Laughton Alpha Function

The extended Gibbons-Laughton alpha function is suitable for use with both
polar and nonpolar components. It has the flexibility to fit the vapor pressure
of most substances from the triple point to the critical point.
Where Tr is the reduced temperature; Xi, Yi and Zi are substance dependent

parameters.
This function is equivalent to the standard Soave alpha function if
This function is not intended for use in supercritical conditions. To avoid

predicting negative alpha, when Tri>1 the Boston-Mathias alpha function is
used instead.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
SRKGLP/1
SRKGLP/2
SRKGLP/3
SRKGLP/4
SRKGLP/5
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
SRKGLP/6
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
Twu Generalized Alpha Function

The Twu generalized alpha function is a theoretically-based function that is
currently recognized as the best available alpha function. It behaves better
than other functions at supercritical conditions (T > Tc) and when the acentric
factor is large. The improved behavior at high values of acentric factor is
important for high molecular weight pseudocomponents. There is no limit on
the minimum value of acentric factor that can be used with this function.
77
Where the L, M, and N are parameters that vary depending on the equation of
state and whether the temperature is above or below the critical temperature
of the component.
For Soave-Redlich-Kwong:
Subcritical T
Supercritical T
0.544000
0.379919
(0)
1.01309
5.67342
(0)
0.935995
-0.200000
L(1)
0.544306
0.0319134
(1)
0.802404
1.28756
(1)
3.10835
-8.000000
L(0)
M
M
N
Use of Alpha Functions

The use of alpha functions in Soave-Redlich-Kwong based equation-of-state
models is given in the following table. You can verify and change the value of
possible option codes on the Properties | Property Methods | Models
sheet.
Alpha Function
Model Name
First Option Code
original RK
ESRK0, ESRK
standard RKS
ESRKSTD0, ESRKSTD
*
1, 2 (default)
standard RKS/Boston-Mathias *
ESRKSWS0, ESRKSWS
ESRKSV10, ESRKV1
ESRKSV20, ESRKSV2
0
1
1
1
Mathias/Boston-Mathias
ESRKA0, ESRKA
Extended Mathias/BostonMathias
ESRKU0, ESRKU
Mathias-Copeman
ESRKSV10, ESRKSV1
ESRKSV20, ESRKSV2
2
2
Schwartzentruber-RenonWatanasiri
ESPRWS0, ESPRWS
ESRKSV10, ESRKSV1
ESRKSV20, ESRKSV2
3 (default)
3 (default)
3 (default)
Twu generalized
Gibbons-Laughton with Patel

extension
Mathias for T < Tc; BostonMathias for T > Tc
* ESRKSTD0, ESRKSTD, ESRKS0, ESRKS, ESSRK, ESSRK0, ESRKSML,

ESRKSML0. The default alpha function (option code 2) for these models is the
78
standard RKS alpha function, except that the Grabovsky-Daubert alpha

function is used for H2: = 1.202 exp(-0.30228xTri)
References
J. F. Boston and P.M. Mathias, "Phase Equilibria in a Third-Generation Process
Simulator" in Proceedings of the 2nd International Conference on Phase
Equilibria and Fluid Properties in the Chemical Process Industries, West Berlin,
(17-21 March 1980), pp. 823-849.
P. M. Mathias, "A Versatile Phase Equilibrium Equation-of-state", Ind. Eng.
Chem. Process Des. Dev., Vol. 22, (1983), pp. 385391.
P.M. Mathias and T.W. Copeman, "Extension of the Peng-Robinson Equationof-state To Complex Mixtures: Evaluation of the Various Forms of the Local
Composition Concept", Fluid Phase Eq., Vol. 13, (1983), p. 91.
O. Redlich and J. N. S. Kwong, "On the Thermodynamics of Solutions V. An
Equation-of-state. Fugacities of Gaseous Solutions," Chem. Rev., Vol. 44,
(1949), pp. 223244.
and Temperatures by the Use of a Cubic Equation-of-state," Ind. Eng. Chem.
Res., Vol. 28, (1989), pp. 10491055.
J. Schwartzentruber, H. Renon, and S. Watanasiri, "K-values for Non-Ideal
Systems:An Easier Way," Chem. Eng., March 1990, pp. 118-124.
G. Soave, "Equilibrium Constants for a Modified Redlich-Kwong Equation-ofstate," Chem Eng. Sci., Vol. 27, (1972), pp. 1196-1203.
C.H. Twu, W.D. Sim, and V. Tassone, "Getting a Handle on Advanced Cubic
Equations of State", Chemical Engineering Progress, Vol. 98 #11 (November
2002) pp. 58-65.
Huron-Vidal Mixing Rules

Huron and Vidal (1979) used a simple thermodynamic relationship to equate
the excess Gibbs energy to expressions for the fugacity coefficient as
computed by equations of state:
(1)
Equation 1 is valid at any pressure, but cannot be evaluated unless some
assumptions are made. If Equation 1 is evaluated at infinite pressure, the
mixture must be liquid-like and extremely dense. It can be assumed that:
(2)
(3)
Using equations 2 and 3 in equation 1 results in an expression for a/b that
contains the excess Gibbs energy at an infinite pressure:
(4)
79
Where:
(5)
The parameters 1and 2depend on the equation-of-state used. In general a

cubic equation-of-state can be written as:
(6)
Values for 1and 2 for the Peng-Robinson and the Soave-Redlich-Kwong

equations of state are:
Equation-of-state
Peng-Robinson
Redlich-Kwong-Soave
This expression can be used at any pressure as a mixing rule for the
parameter. The mixing rule for b is fixed by equation 3. Even when used at
other pressures, this expression contains the excess Gibbs energy at infinite
pressure. You can use any activity coeffecient model to evaluate the excess
Gibbs energy at infinite pressure. Binary interaction coefficients must be
regressed. The mixing rule used contains as many binary parameters as the
activity coefficient model chosen.
This mixing rule has been used successfully for polar mixtures at high
pressures, such as systems containing light gases. In theory, any activity
coefficient model can be used. But the NRTL equation (as modified by Huron
and Vidal) has demonstrated better performance.
The Huron-Vidal mixing rules combine extreme flexibility with thermodynamic
consistency, unlike many other mole-fraction-dependent equation-of-state
mixing rules. The Huron-Vidal mixing rules do not allow flexibility in the
description of the excess molar volume, but always predict reasonable excess
volumes.
The Huron-Vidal mixing rules are theoretically incorrect for low pressure,
because quadratic mole fraction dependence of the second virial coefficient (if
derived from the equation-of-state) is not preserved. Since equations of state
are primarily used at high pressure, the practical consequences of this
drawback are minimal.
The Gibbs energy at infinite pressure and the Gibbs energy at an arbitrary
high pressure are similar. But the correspondence is not close enough to
make the mixing rule predictive.
There are several methods for modifying the Huron-Vidal mixing rule to make
it more predictive. The following three methods are used in Aspen Physical
Property System equation-of-state models:
80
The modified Huron-Vidal mixing rule, second order approximation

(MHV2)
The Predictive SRK Method (PSRK)
The Wong-Sandler modified Huron-Vidal mixing rule (WS)
These mixing rules are discussed separately in the following sections. They
have major advantages over other composition-dependent equation-of-state
mixing rules.
References
M.- J. Huron and J. Vidal, "New Mixing Rules in Simple Equations of State for
representing Vapour-liquid equilibria of strongly non-ideal mixtures," Fluid
Phase Eq., Vol. 3, (1979), pp. 255-271.
MHV2 Mixing Rules

Dahl and Michelsen (1990) use a thermodynamic relationship between excess
Gibbs energy and the fugacity computed by equations of state. This
relationship is equivalent to the one used by Huron and Vidal:
(1)
The advantage is that the expressions for mixture and pure component
fugacities do not contain the pressure. They are functions of compacity V/b
and :
(2)
Where:
(3)
and
(4)
With:
(5)
The constants 1 and 2, which depend only on the equation-of-state (see
Huron-Vidal Mixing Rules) occur in equations 2 and 4.
Instead of using infinite pressure for simplification of equation 1, the condition
of zero pressure is used. At p = 0 an exact relationship between the
compacity and can be derived. By substitution the simplified equation q()
is obtained, and equation 1 becomes:
(6)
81
However, q() can only be written explicitly for = 5.8. Only an

approximation is possible below that threshold. Dahl and Michelsen use a
second order polynomial fitted to the analytical solution for 10 < < 13 that
can be extrapolated to low alpha:
(7)
Since q()is a universal function (for each equation-of-state), the
combination of equations 6 and 7 form the MHV2 mixing rule. Excess Gibbs
energies, from any activity coefficient model with parameters optimized at
low pressures, can be used to determine , if i, bi, and b are known. To
compute b, a linear mixing rule is assumed as in the original Huron-Vidal
mixing rules:
(8)
This equation is equivalent to the assumption of zero excess molar volume.
The MHV2 mixing rule was the first successful predictive mixing rule for
equations of state. This mixing rule uses previously determined activity
coefficient parameters for predictions at high pressures. UNIFAC was chosen
as a default for its predictive character. The Lyngby modified UNIFAC
formulation was chosen for optimum performance (see UNIFAC (Lyngby
Modified)). However, any activity coefficient model can be used when its
binary interaction parameters are known.
Like the Huron-Vidal mixing rules, the MHV2 mixing rules are not flexible in
the description of the excess molar volume. The MHV2 mixing rules are
theoretically incorrect at the low pressure limit. But the practical
consequences of this drawback are minimal (see Huron-Vidal Mixing Rules,
this chapter).
Reference: S. Dahl and M.L. Michelsen, "High-Pressure Vapor-Liquid
Equilibrium with a UNIFAC-based Equation-of-state," AIChE J., Vol. 36,
(1990), pp. 1829-1836.
Predictive Soave-Redlich-Kwong-Gmehling
Mixing Rules
These mixing rules by Holderbaum and Gmehling (1991) use a relationship
between the excess Helmholtz energy and equation-of-state. They do not use
a relationship between equation-of-state properties and excess Gibbs energy,
as in the Huron-Vidal mixing rules. The pressure-explicit expression for the
equation-of-state is substituted in the thermodynamic equation:
(1)
The Helmholtz energy is calculated by integration. AE is obtained by:

(2)
82
Where both Ai* and Am are calculated by using equation 1. Ai* and Am are
written in terms of equation-of-state parameters.
The simplification of constant packing fraction (Vm / b) is used:
(3)
With:
(4)
Therefore:
(5)
The mixing rule is:
(6)
Where
' is slightly different from for the Huron-Vidal mixing rule:

(7)
Where 1 and 2, depend on the equation-of-state (see Huron-Vidal Mixing

Rules). If equation 6 is applied at infinite pressure, the packing fraction goes
to 1. The excess Helmholtz energy is equal to the excess Gibbs energy. The
Huron-Vidal mixing rules are recovered.
The goal of these mixing rules is to be able to use binary interaction
parameters for activity coefficient models at any pressure. These parameters
have been optimized at low pressures. UNIFAC is chosen for its predictive
character. Two issues exist: the packing fraction is not equal to one, and the
excess Gibbs and Helmholtz energy are not equal at the low pressure where
the UNIFAC parameters have been derived.
Fischer (1993) determined that boiling point, the average packing fraction for
about 80 different liquids with different chemical natures was 1.1. Adopting
this value, the difference between liquid excess Gibbs energy and liquid
excess Helmholtz energy can be computed as:
(8)
The result is a predictive mixing rule for cubic equations of state. But the
original UNIFAC formulation gives the best performance for any binary pair
with interactions available from UNIFAC. Gas-solvent interactions are
unavailable. However, it has poor accuracy for highly asymmetric such as CH4
83
n-C10H22. To address the issue, the Li correction (Li et al., 1998) is

applied.
With the Li correction, the R and Q parameters for groups CH3, CH2, CH, and
C in UNIFAC are modified. R* and Q*, the effective values of R and Q, are
calculated based on the original values and nc, the number of alkyl carbons
(single-bonded carbons in CH3, CH2, CH, and C groups), as follows, for
nc<45:
At the University of Oldenburg in Germany, the UNIFAC groups were

extended with often-occurring gases. New group interactions were
determined from gas-solvent data, specific to the Redlich-Kwong-Soave
equation-of-state. The new built-in parameters to the Aspen Physical Property
System are activated when using the PSRK equation-of-state model.
The PSRK method has a lot in common with the Huron-Vidal mixing rules. The
mole fraction is dependent on the second virial coefficient and excess volume
is predicted. These are minor disadvantages.
References
K. Fischer, "Die PSRK-Methode: Eine Zustandsgleichung unter Verwendung
des UNIFAC-Gruppenbeitragsmodells," (Dsseldorf: VDI Fortschrittberichte,
Reihe 3: Verfahrenstechnik, Nr. 324, VDI Verlag GmbH, 1993).
T. Holderbaum and J. Gmehling, "PSRK: A Group Contribution Equation-ofstate based on UNIFAC," Fluid Phase Eq., Vol. 70, (1991), pp. 251-265.
J. Li, K. Fischer, and J. Gmehling, "Prediction of vapor-liquid equilibria for
asymmetric systems at low and high pressures with the PSRK model," Fluid
Phase Equilib., 1998, 143, 71-82
Wong-Sandler Mixing Rules

These mixing rules use a relationship between the excess Helmholtz energy
and equation-of-state. They do not use a relationship between equation-ofstate properties and excess Gibbs energy, as in the Huron-Vidal mixing rules.
The pressure-explicit expression for the equation-of-state is substituted in the
thermodynamic equation:
(1)
The Helmholtz energy is obtained by integration, AE is obtained by:

(2)
Where both Ai* and Am are calculated by using equation 1. Ai* and Am are
written in terms of equation-of-state parameters.
84
Like Huron and Vidal, the limiting case of infinite pressure is used. This
simplifies the expressions for Ai* and Am. Equation 2 becomes:
(3)
Where
depends on the equation-of-state (see Huron-Vidal Mixing Rules).
Equation 3 is completely analogous to the Huron-Vidal mixing rule for the

excess Gibbs energy at infinite pressure. (See equation 4, Huron-Vidal Mixing
Rules.) The excess Helmholtz energy can be approximated by the excess
Gibbs energy at low pressure from any liquid activity coefficient model. Using
the Helmholtz energy permits another mixing rule for b than the linear mixing
rule. The mixing rule for b is derived as follows. The second virial coefficient
must depend quadratically on the mole fraction:
(4)
With:
(5)
The relationship between the equation-of-state at low pressure and the virial
coefficient is:
(6)
(7)
Wong and Sandler discovered the following mixing rule to satisfy equation 4
(using equations 6 and 7):
The excess Helmholtz energy is almost independent of pressure. It can be

approximated by the Gibbs energy at low pressure. The difference between
the two functions is corrected by fitting kij until the excess Gibbs energy from
the equation-of-state (using the mixing rules 3 and 8) is equal to the excess
Gibbs energy computed by an activity coeffecient model. This is done at a
specific mole fraction and temperature.
This mixing rule accurately predicts the VLE of polar mixtures at high
pressures. UNIFAC or other activity coeffecient models and parameters from
the literature are used. Gas solubilities are not predicted. They must be
regressed from experimental data.
Unlike other (modified) Huron-Vidal mixing rules, the Wong and Sandler
mixing rule meets the theoretical limit at low pressure. The use of kij does
85
influence excess molar volume behavior. For calculations where densities are
important, check whether they are realistic.
References
D. S. Wong and S. I. Sandler, "A Theoretically Correct New Mixing Rule for
Cubic Equations of State for Both Highly and Slightly Non-ideal Mixtures,"
AIChE J., Vol. 38, (1992), pp. 671 680.
D. S. Wong, H. Orbey, and S. I. Sandler, "Equation-of-state Mixing Rule for
Non-ideal Mixtures Using Available Activity Coefficient Model Parameters and
That Allows Extrapolation over Large Ranges of Temperature and Pressure",
Ind Eng Chem. Res., Vol. 31, (1992), pp. 2033 2039.
H. Orbey, S. I. Sandler and D. S. Wong, "Accurate Equation-of-state
Predictions at High Temperatures and Pressures Using the Existing UNIFAC
Model," Fluid Phase Eq., Vol. 85, (1993), pp. 41 54.
Activity Coefficient Models

The Aspen Physical Property System has the following built-in activity
coefficient models. This section describes the activity coefficient models
available.
86
Model
Type
Bromley-Pitzer
Electrolyte
Chien-Null
Regular solution, local composition
Arithmetic
COSMO-SAC
Regular solution
Electrolyte NRTL
Electrolyte
ENRTL-SAC
Segment contribution, electrolyte
Hansen
Regular solution
Ideal Liquid
Ideal
NRTL (Non-Random-Two-Liquid)
Local composition
NRTL-SAC
Segment contribution
Pitzer
Electrolyte
Arithmetic
Redlich-Kister
Arithmetic
Regular solution
Symmetric Electrolyte NRTL
Electrolyte, pure fused salt

reference state for ions
Arithmetic
UNIFAC
Group contribution
UNIFAC (Lyngby modified)
Group contribution
UNIFAC (Dortmund modified)
Group contribution
UNIQUAC
Local composition
Electrolyte
Van Laar
Regular solution
Wagner interaction parameter
Arithmetic
Model
Type
Wilson
Local composition
Wilson with Liquid Molar Volume
Local composition
Bromley-Pitzer Activity Coefficient Model

The Bromley-Pitzer activity coefficient model is a simplified Pitzer activity
coefficient model with Bromley correlations for the interaction parameters.
See Working Equations for a detailed description. This model has predictive
capabilities. It can be used to compute activity coefficients for aqueous
electrolytes up to 6 molal ionic strength, but is less accurate than the Pitzer
model if the parameter correlations are used. The model should not be used
for mixed-solvent electrolyte systems.
The Bromley-Pitzer model in the Aspen Physical Property System involves
user-supplied parameters, used in the calculation of binary parameters for the
electrolyte system.
Parameters (0), (1), (2), (3), and have five elements to account for
temperature dependencies. Elements P1 through P5 follow the temperature
dependency relation:
Where:
Tref
298.15K
The user must:
Supply these elements using a Properties Parameters Binary T-Dependent

form.
Specify Comp ID i and Comp ID j on this form, using the same order that
appears on the Components Specifications Selection sheet form.
Parameter Name Symbol

Ionic Unary Parameters
GMBPB
GMBPD
ion
ion
No. of Elements Default Units

1
Cation-Anion Parameters
GMBPB0
GMBPB1
GMBPB2
GMBPB3
(0)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Cation-Cation Parameters
GMBPTH
cc'
Anion-Anion Parameters
GMBPTH
aa'
Molecule-Ion and Molecule-Molecule Parameters

GMBPB0
(0)
87
Parameter Name Symbol

Ionic Unary Parameters
GMBPB1
No. of Elements Default Units
(1)
Working Equations
The complete Pitzer equation (Frst and Renon, 1982) for the excess Gibbs
energy is (see also equation 4):
(1)
Where:
GE
Excess Gibbs energy
Gas constant
Temperature
nw
Kilograms of water
zi
Charge number of ion i
molality of ion i
Where:
xi
Mole fraction of ion i
xw
Mole fraction of water
Mw
Molecular weight of water (g/mol)
ni
Moles of ion i
B, C, and are interaction parameters, and f(I) is an electrostatic term as

a function of ionic strength; these terms are discussed in Pitzer Activity
Coefficient Model, which has a detailed discussion of the Pitzer model.
The C term and the term are dropped from equation 1 to give the
simplified Pitzer equation.
(2)
Where:
Bij
88
f(ij(0),ij(1),ij(2),ij(3))
Therefore, the simplified Pitzer equation has two types of binary interaction
parameters, 's and ''s. There are no ternary interaction parameters with
the simplified Pitzer equation.
Note that the Pitzer model parameter databank described in Physical Property
Data, Chapter 1, is not applicable to the simplified Pitzer equation.
A built-in empirical correlation estimates the (0) and (1) parameters for
cation-anion pairs from the Bromley ionic parameters, ion and ion (Bromley,
1973). The estimated values of (0)'s and (1)'s are overridden by the user's
input. For parameter naming and requirements, see Bromley-Pitzer Activity
Coefficient Model.
References
L.A. Bromley, "Thermodynamic Properties of Strong Electrolytes in Aqueous
Solution, " AIChE J., Vol. 19, No. 2, (1973), pp. 313 320.
W. Frst and H. Renon, "Effects of the Various Parameters in the Application
of Pitzer's Model to Solid-Liquid Equilibrium. Preliminary Study for Strong 1-1
Electrolytes," Ind. Eng. Chem. Process Des. Dev., Vol. 21, No. 3, (1982),
pp. 396-400.
Parameter Conversion
For n-m electrolytes, n and m>1 (2-2, 2-3, 3-4, and so on), the parameter
(3) corresponds to Pitzer's (1); (2) is the same in both Aspen Physical
Property System and original Pitzer models. Pitzer refers to the n-m
electrolyte parameters as (1), (2), (0). (0) and (2) retain their meanings in
both models, but Pitzer's (1) is Aspen Physical Property System (3). Be
careful to make this distinction when entering n-m electrolyte parameters.
Chien-Null
The Chien-Null model calculates liquid activity coefficients and it can be used
for highly non-ideal systems. The generalized expression used in its derivation
can be adapted to represent other well known formalisms for the activity
coefficient by properly defining its binary terms. This characteristic allows the
model the use of already available binary parameters regressed for those
other liquid activity models with thermodynamic consistency.
The equation for the Chien-Null liquid activity coeficient is:
Where:
Rji = Aji / Aij
Aii = 0
89
Aij = aij + bij / T

Subscripts i and j are component indices.
The choice of model and parameters can be set for each binary pair
constituting the process mixture by assigning the appropriate value to the
ICHNUL parameter.
The Regular Solution and Scatchard-Hamer models are regained by
substituting in the general expression (ICHNUL = 1 or 2).
Vji = Sji = Vj*,l / Vi*,l
Where:
Vj*,l
Liquid molar volume of component i
The Chien-Null activity coefficient model collapses to the Margules liquid

activity coefficient expression by setting (ICHNUL = 3):
Vji = Sji = 1
The Van Laar Liquid activity coefficient model is obtained when the V and S
parameters in the Chien-Null models are set to the ratio of the cross terms of
A (ICHNUL = 4:)
Vji = Sji = Aji / Aij
Finally, the Renon or NRTL model is obtained when we make the following
susbstitutions in the Chien-Null expression for the liquid activity (ICHNUL =
5).
Sji = RjiAji / Aij
Aji = 2jiGji
Vji = Gji
The following are defined for the Non-Random Two-Liquid activity coefficient
model, where:
ij = aij + bij / T
Cij = cij + dij (T - 273.15 K)
cji = cij
dji = dij
The binary parameters CHNULL/1, CHNULL/2, and CHNULL/3 can be
determined from regression of VLE and/or LLE data. Also, if you have
parameters for many of the mixture pairs for the Margules, Van Laar,
Scatchard-Hildebrand, and NRTL (Non-Random-Two-Liquid) activity models,
you can use them directly with the Chien-Null activity model after selecting
the proper code (ICHNUL) to identify the source model and entering the
appropriate activity model parameters.
90
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
ICHNUL
CHNULL/1
aij
CHNULL/2
bij
CHNULL/3
Vij
The parameter ICHNUL is used to identify the activity model parameters

available for each binary pair of interest. The following values are allowed for
ICHNUL:
ICHNUL = 1 or 2, sets the model to the Scatchard-Hamer or regular solution
model for the associated binary;
ICHNUL = 3, sets the model to the Three-Suffix Margules activity model for
the associated binary;
ICHNUL = 4, sets the model to the Van Laar formalism for the activity model
for the associated binary;
ICHNUL = 5, sets the model to the NRTL (Renon) formalism for the activity
model for the associated binary.
ICHNUL = 6, sets the model to the full Chien-Null formalism for the activity
model for the associated binary.
When you specify a value for the ICHNUL parameter that is different than the
default, you must enter the appropriate binary model parameters for the
chosen activity model directly. The routine will automatically convert the
expressions and parameters to conform to the Chien-Null formulation.

This approach is used exclusively in metallurgical applications where multiple
liquid and solid phases can coexist. You can assign any value to the activity
coefficient of component i. Use the Properties Parameters Unary Scalar form.
The equation is:
i = ai
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS Upper

Limit
Lower
Limit
Units
GMCONS
ai
1.0
COSMO-SAC
Cosmo-SAC is a solvation model that describes the electric fields on the
molecular surface of species that are polarizable. It requires a fairly
complicated quantum mechanical calculation, but this calculation must be
done only once for a particular molecule; then the results can be stored. In its
final form, it uses individual atoms as the building blocks for predicting phase
equilibria instead of functional groups. This model formulation provides a
considerably larger range of applicability than group-contribution methods.
The calculation for liquid nonideality is only slightly more computationally
intensive than activity-coefficient models such as NRTL or UNIQUAC. Cosmo-
91
SAC complements the UNIFAC group-contribution method, because it is

applicable to virtually any mixture.
The Cosmo-SAC model calculates liquid activity coefficients. The equation for
the Cosmo-SAC model is:
With
92
Where:
= Activity coefficient of component i
iSG
= Staverman-Guggenheim model for combinatorial

contribution to i
i(m)
= Segment activity coefficient of segment

component i
m in
S(m)
= Segment activity coefficient of segment

solvent mixture
m in
pi(m)
= Sigma profile of component i
pi(m)
= Sigma profile of solvent mixture
= Surface charge density
W(m,n)
= Exchange energy between segments
WHB(m,n)
= Hydrogen-bonding contribution to exchange energy

between segments m and n
= Coordination number, 10
Vi
= Molecular volume of component i
Ai
= Molecular surface area of component i
aeff
= Standard segment surface area, 7.50 2
Veff
= Standard component volume, 66.69 3
Aeff
= Standard component surface area, 79.53 2
'
= Misfit energy constant
m and n
The Cosmo-SAC model does not require binary parameters. For each
component, it has six input parameters. CSACVL is the component volume
parameter which is always defined in cubic angstroms, regardless of chosen
units sets. SGPRF1 to SGPRF5 are five component sigma profile parameters;
each can store up to 12 points of sigma profile values. All six input
parameters are obtained from COSMO calculation. The Aspen Physical
Property System includes a database of sigma profiles for over 1400
compounds from Mullins et al. (2006). The parameters were obtained by
permission from the Virginia Tech Sigma Profile Database website
(http://www.design.che.vt.edu/VT-2004.htm). Aspen Technology, Inc. does
not claim proprietary rights to these parameters.
Note: Starting in version V7.2, additional parameters SGPRF6 through
SGPRF9 and SGPR10 through SGPR14 are available in Aspen Plus and
Aspen Properties, as part of a planned expansion to allow larger sigma
profiles to be used. However, the model is not yet updated to use these
parameters and you should not yet try to use sigma profiles larger than 51
elements.
93
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
CSACVL
Vi
VOLUME (3)
SGPRF1
Ai pi(1-12)
SGPRF2
Ai pi(13-24)
SGPRF3
Ai pi(25-36)
SGPRF4
Ai pi(37-48)
SGPRF5
Ai pi(49-51)
Option Codes
The primary version of COSMO-SAC is the model by Lin and Sandler (2002).
Two other versions are available using an option code, as detailed in the table
below:
Option
Code
Description
COSMO-SAC model by Lin and Sandler (2002)
COSMO-RS model by Klamt (1995)
Lin and Sandler model with modified exchange energy (Lin

et al., 2002)
References
A. Klamt, "Conductor-like Screening Model for Real Solvents: A New Approach
to the Quantitative Calculation of Solvation Phenomena," J. Phys. Chem. 99,
2224 (1995).
S.-T. Lin, P. M. Mathias, Y. Song, C.-C. Chen, and S. I. Sandler,
"Improvements of Phase-Equilibrium Predictions for Hydrogen-Bonding
Systems from a New Expression for COSMO Solvation Models," presented at
the AIChE Annual Meeting, Indianapolis, IN, 3-8 November (2002).
S.-T. Lin and S. I. Sandler, "A Priori Phase Equilibrium Prediction from a
Segment Contribution Solvation Model," Ind. Eng. Chem. Res. 41, 899
(2002).
E. Mullins, et al. "Sigma-Profile Database for Using COSMO-Based
Thermodynamic Methods," Ind. Eng. Chem. Res. 45, 4389 (2006).
Electrolyte NRTL Activity Coefficient Model

(GMENRTL)
The Electrolyte NRTL activity coefficient model (GMENRTL) is a versatile
model for the calculation of activity coefficients. Using binary and pair
parameters, the model can represent aqueous electrolyte systems as well as
mixed solvent electrolyte systems over the entire range of electrolyte
concentrations. This model can calculate activity coefficients for ionic species
and molecular species in aqueous electrolyte systems as well as in mixed
solvent electrolyte systems. The model reduces to the well-known NRTL
model when electrolyte concentrations become zero (Renon and Prausnitz,
1969).
94
The electrolyte NRTL model uses the infinite dilution aqueous solution as the
reference state for ions. It adopts the Born equation to account for the
transformation of the reference state of ions from the infinite dilution mixed
solvent solution to the infinite dilution aqueous solution.
Water must be present in the electrolyte system in order to compute the
transformation of the reference state of ions. Thus, it is necessary to
introduce a trace amount of water to use the model for nonaqueous
electrolyte systems.
The Aspen Physical Property System uses the electrolyte NRTL model to
calculate activity coefficients, enthalpies, and Gibbs energies for electrolyte
systems. Model development and working equations are provided in
Theoretical Basis and Working Equations.
The adjustable parameters for the electrolyte NRTL model include the:
Pure component dielectric constant coefficient of nonaqueous solvents
Born radius of ionic species
NRTL parameters for molecule-molecule, molecule-electrolyte, and

electrolyte-electrolyte pairs
The pure component dielectric constant coefficients of nonaqueous solvents

and Born radius of ionic species are required only for mixed-solvent
electrolyte systems. The temperature dependency of the dielectric constant of
solvent B is:
Each type of electrolyte NRTL parameter consists of both the nonrandomness

factor, , and energy parameters, . The temperature dependency relations
of the electrolyte NRTL parameters are:
Molecule-Molecule Binary Parameters:
Electrolyte-Molecule Pair Parameters:
Electrolyte-Electrolyte Pair Parameters:
For the electrolyte-electrolyte pair parameters, the two electrolytes must

share either one common cation or one common anion:
95
Where:
Tref = 298.15K
Many parameter pairs are included in the electrolyte NRTL model parameter
databank (see Physical Property Data, Chapter 1).
Parameter
Symbol
No. of
Default MDS Units
Name
Elements
Dielectric Constant Unary Parameters
CPDIEC
AB
BB
CB
1
Ionic Born Radius Unary Parameters
298.15
TEMPERATURE
RADIUS
ri
1
Molecule-Molecule Binary Parameters
3x10-10
LENGTH
NRTL/1
ABB'
AB'B
BBB'
TEMPERATURE
BB'B
TEMPERATURE
NRTL/3
BB' = B'B
.3
NRTL/4
TEMPERATURE
NRTL/5
FBB'
TEMPERATURE
FB'B
TEMPERATURE
GBB'
TEMPERATURE
GB'B
Electrolyte-Molecule Pair Parameters
TEMPERATURE
GMELCC
NRTL/2
NRTL/6
GMELCD
GMELCE
GMELCN
Cca,B
CB,ca
Dca,B
TEMPERATURE
DB,ca
TEMPERATURE
Eca,B
EB,ca
ca,B = B,ca
.2
Electrolyte-Electrolyte Pair Parameters

GMELCC
GMELCD
GMELCE
96
Cca',ca''
Cca'',ca'
Cc'a,c''a
Cc''a,c'a
Dca',ca''
TEMPERATURE
Dca'',ca'
TEMPERATURE
Dc'a,c''a
TEMPERATURE
Dc''a,c'a
TEMPERATURE
Eca',ca''
Parameter
Symbol
No. of
Default MDS Units
Name
Elements
GMELCN
Eca'',ca'
Ec'a,c''a
Ec''a,c'a
ca',ca'' = ca'',ca'
c'a,c''a = c''a,c'a
.2
.2
Certain Electrolyte NRTL activity coefficient model parameters are used with
reciprocal temperature terms:
CPDIEC
NRTL/2
GMELCD for electrolyte-electrolyte or electrolyte-molecule pairs
When any of these parameters is specified, absolute temperature units are

used for the calculations in this model.
Reference: H. Renon, and J.M. Prausnitz, "Local Compositions in
Thermodynamic Excess Functions for Liquid Mixtures", AIChE J., Vol. 14, No.
1, (1968), pp. 135-144.
Theoretical Basis and Working Equations

In this section, the theoretical basis of the model is explained and the working
equations are given. The different ways parameters can be obtained are
discussed with references to the databank directories and the Data
Regression System (DRS). The parameter requirements of the model are
given in Electrolyte NRTL Activity Coefficient Model.
Development of the Model

The Electrolyte NRTL model was originally proposed by Chen et al., for
aqueous electrolyte systems. It was later extended to mixed solvent
electrolyte systems (Mock et al., 1984, 1986). The model is based on two
fundamental assumptions:
The like-ion repulsion assumption: states that the local composition of

cations around cations is zero (and likewise for anions around anions).
This is based on the assumption that the repulsive forces between ions of
like charge are extremely large. This assumption may be justified on the
basis that repulsive forces between ions of the same sign are very strong
for neighboring species. For example, in salt crystal lattices the immediate
neighbors of any central ion are always ions of opposite charge.
The local electroneutrality assumption: states that the distribution of

cations and anions around a central molecular species is such that the net
local ionic charge is zero. Local electroneutrality has been observed for
interstitial molecules in salt crystals.
Chen proposed an excess Gibbs energy expression which contains two

contributions: one contribution for the long-range ion-ion interactions that
exist beyond the immediate neighborhood of a central ionic species, and the
97
other related to the local interactions that exist at the immediate

neighborhood of any central species.
The unsymmetric Pitzer-Debye-Hckel model and the Born equation are used
to represent the contribution of the long-range ion-ion interactions, and the
Non-Random Two Liquid (NRTL) theory is used to represent the local
interactions. The local interaction contribution model is developed as a
symmetric model, based on reference states of pure solvent and pure
completely dissociated liquid electrolyte. The model is then normalized by
infinite dilution activity coefficients in order to obtain an unsymmetric model.
This NRTL expression for the local interactions, the Pitzer-Debye-Hckel
expression, and the Born equation are added to give equation 1 for the
excess Gibbs energy (see the following note).
(1)
This leads to
(2)
Note: The notation using * to denote an unsymmetric reference state is wellaccepted in electrolyte thermodynamics and will be maintained here. The
reader should be warned not to confuse it with the meaning of * in classical
thermodynamics according to IUPAC/ISO, referring to a pure component
property. In fact in the context of G or , the asterisk as superscript is never
used to denote pure component property, so the risk of confusion is minimal.
For details on notation, see Chapter 1 of Physical Property Methods.
References
C.-C. Chen, H.I. Britt, J.F. Boston, and L.B. Evans, "Local Compositions Model
for Excess Gibbs Energy of Electrolyte Systems: Part I: Single Solvent, Single
Completely Dissociated Electrolyte Systems:, AIChE J., Vol. 28, No. 4, (1982),
p. 588-596.
C.-C. Chen, and L.B. Evans, "A Local Composition Model for the Excess Gibbs
Energy of Aqueous Electrolyte Systems," AIChE J., Vol. 32, No. 3, (1986), p.
444-459.
B. Mock, L.B. Evans, and C.-C. Chen, "Phase Equilibria in Multiple-Solvent
Electrolyte Systems: A New Thermodynamic Model," Proceedings of the 1984
Summer Computer Simulation Conference, p. 558.
B. Mock, L.B. Evans, and C.-C. Chen, "Thermodynamic Representation of
Phase Equilibria of Mixed-Solvent Electrolyte Systems," AIChE J., Vol. 32, No.
10, (1986), p. 1655-1664.
Long-Range Interaction Contribution

The Pitzer-Debye-Hckel formula, normalized to mole fractions of unity for
solvent and zero for electrolytes, is used to represent the long-range
interaction contribution.
98
(3)
with
(4)
(5)
Where:
xi
Mole fraction of component i
Ms
Molecular weight of the solvent
Debye-Hckel parameter
NA
Avogadro's number
ds
Mass density of solvent
Qe
Electron charge
Dielectric constant of the solvent
Temperature
Boltzmann constant
Ix
Ionic strength (mole fraction scale)
xi
zi
Charge number of ion i
"Closest approach" parameter
Taking the appropriate derivative of equation 3, an expression for the activity

coefficient can then be derived.
(6)
The Born equation is used to account for the Gibbs energy of transfer of ionic
species from the infinite dilution state in a mixed-solvent to the infinite
dilution state in aqueous phase.
(7)
Where:
Dielectric constant of water
ri
Born radius of the ionic species i
99
The expression for the activity coefficient can be derived from (7):
(8)
The Debye-Hckel theory is based on the infinite dilution reference state for
ionic species in the actual solvent media. For systems with water as the only
solvent, the reference state is the infinite dilution aqueous solution. For
mixed-solvent systems, the reference state for which the Debye-Hckel
theory remains valid is the infinite dilution solution with the corresponding
mixed-solvent composition. However, the molecular weight Ms, the mass
density ds, and the dielectric constant s for the single solvent need to be
extended for mixed solvents; simple composition average mixing rules are
adequate to calculate them as follows:
(6a)
(7a)
(8a)
(8b)
(8c)
(8d)
Where:
xm
Mole fraction of the solvent m in the solution
Mm
Molecular weight of the solvent m
Molar volume of the solvent mixture
Dielectric constant of the solvent m
Vw*
Molar volume of water using the steam table
xnws
Sum of the mole fractions of all non-water

solvents.
Vnwsl
Liquid molar volume for the mixture of all nonwater solvents. It is calculated using the
Rackett equation.
Vm
100
It should be understood that equations 6a-8a should be used only in

equations 3, 4, and 7. Ms, ds, and s were already assumed as constants when
deriving equations 6 and 8 for mixed-solvent systems.
Local Interaction Contribution

The local interaction contribution is accounted for by the Non-Random Two
Liquid theory. The basic assumption of the NRTL model is that the nonideal
entropy of mixing is negligible compared to the heat of mixing: this is indeed
the case for electrolyte systems. This model was adopted because of its
algebraic simplicity and its applicability to mixtures that exhibit liquid phase
splitting. The model does not require specific volume or area data.
The effective local mole fractions Xji and Xii of species j and i, respectively, in
the neighborhood of i are related by:
(9)
Where:
Xj
xjCj
(Cj = zj for ions and Cj = unity for molecules)
Gji
ji
ji
Nonrandomness factor
gji and gii are energies of interaction between species j and i, and i and i,
respectively. Both gij and ij are inherently symmetric (gij = gji and ij = ji).
Similarly,
(10)
Where:
Gji,ki
ji,ki
ji,ki
Nonrandomness factor
Apparent Binary Systems

The derivations that follow are based on a simple system of one completely
dissociated liquid electrolyte ca and one solvent B. They will be later extended
101
to multicomponent systems. In this simple system, three different

arrangements exist:
In the case of a central solvent molecule with other solvent molecules,

cations, and anions in its immediate neighborhood, the principle of local
electroneutrality is followed: the surrounding cations and anions are such that
the neighborhood of the solvent is electrically neutral. In the case of a central
cation (anion) with solvent molecules and anions (cations) in its immediate
neighborhood, the principle of like-ion repulsion is followed: no ions of like
charge exist anywhere near each other, whereas opposite charged ions are
very close to each other.
The effective local mole fractions are related by the following expressions:
(11)
(central solvent cells)
(12)
(central cation cells)
(13)
(central anion cells)
Using equation 11 through 13 and the notation introduced in equations 9 and

10 above, expressions for the effective local mole fractions in terms of the
overall mole fractions can be derived.
(14)
i = c, a, or B
(15)
(16)
To obtain an expression for the excess Gibbs energy, let the residual Gibbs
energies, per mole of cells of central cation, anion, or solvent, respectively, be
,
, and
effective local mole fractions:
. These are then related to the

(17)
(18)
(19)
102
The reference Gibbs energy is determined for the reference states of

completely dissociated liquid electrolyte and of pure solvent. The reference
Gibbs energies per mole are then:
(20)
(21)
(22)
Where:
zc
Charge number on cations
za
Charge number on anions
The molar excess Gibbs energy can be found by summing all changes in
residual Gibbs energy per mole that result when the electrolyte and solvent in
their reference state are mixed to form the existing electrolyte system. The
expression is:
(23)
Using the previous relation for the excess Gibbs energy and the expressions
for the residual and reference Gibbs energy (equations 17 to 19 and 20 to
22), the following expression for the excess Gibbs energy is obtained:
(24)
The assumption of local electroneutrality applied to cells with central solvent

molecules may be stated as:
(25)
Combining this expression with the expression for the effective local mole
fractions given in equations 9 and 10, the following equality is obtained:
(26)
The following relationships are further assumed for nonrandomness factors:
(27)
(28)
and,
(29)
It can be inferred from equations 9, 10, and 26 to 29 that:
(30)
(31)
103
The binary parameters ca,B , ca,B and B,ca are now the adjustable parameters
for an apparent binary system of a single electrolyte and a single solvent.
The excess Gibbs energy expression (equation 24) must now be normalized
to the infinite dilution reference state for ions:
(32)
This leads to:

(33)
By taking the appropriate derivatives of equation 33, expressions for the

activity coefficients of all three species can be determined.
(34)
(35)
(36)
Multicomponent Systems
The Electrolyte NRTL model can be extended to handle multicomponent
systems.
The excess Gibbs energy expression is:
104
(37)
Where:
j and k can be any species (a, C, or B)
The activity coefficient equation for molecular components is given by:
(38)
The activity coefficient equation for cations is given by:

(39)
The activity coefficient equation for anions is given by:

(40)
Where:
105
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
It should be understood that

and
remained constant in
equation 37 when deriving the activity coefficients given by equations 38-40.
Parameters
The model adjustable parameters include:
Pure component dielectric constant coefficient of nonaqueous solvents
Born radius of ionic species
NRTL interaction parameters for molecule-molecule, molecule-electrolyte,

and electrolyte-electrolyte pairs
Note that for the electrolyte-electrolyte pair parameters, the two electrolytes
must share either one common cation or one common anion.
Each type of the electrolyte NRTL parameter consists of both the
nonrandomness factor, , and energy parameters, .
106
The pure component dielectric constant coefficients of nonaqueous solvents

and Born radius of ionic species are required only for mixed-solvent
The temperature dependency relations of these parameters are given in
Electrolyte NRTL Activity Coefficient Model.
Heat of mixing is calculated from temperature derivatives of activity
coefficients. Heat capacity is calculated from secondary temperature
derivative of the activity coefficient. As a result, the temperature dependent
parameters are critical for modeling enthalpy correctly. It is recommended
that enthalpy data and heat capacity data be used to obtain these
temperature dependency parameters. See also Electrolyte NRTL Enthalpy and
Electrolyte NRTL Gibbs Energy.
Obtaining Parameters
In the absence of electrolytes, the electrolyte NRTL model reduces to the
NRTL equation which is widely used for non-electrolyte systems. Therefore,
molecule-molecule binary parameters can be obtained from binary
nonelectrolyte systems.
Electrolyte-molecule pair parameters can be obtained from data regression of
apparent single electrolyte systems.
Electrolyte-electrolyte pair parameters are required only for mixed
electrolytes with a common ion. Electrolyte-electrolyte pair parameters can
affect trace ionic activity precipitation. Electrolyte-electrolyte pair parameters
can be obtained by regressing solubility data of multiple component
When the electrolyte-molecule and electrolyte-electrolyte pair parameters are
zero, the electrolyte NRTL model reduces to the Debye-Hckel limiting law.
Calculation results with electrolyte-molecule and electrolyte-electrolyte pair
parameters fixed to zero should be adequate for very dilute weak electrolyte
systems; however, for concentrated systems, pair parameters are required
for accurate representation.
See Physical Property Data, Chapter 1, for the pair parameters available from
the electrolyte NRTL model databank. The table contains pair parameters for
some electrolytes in aqueous solution at 100C. These values were obtained
by using the Aspen Physical Property Data Regression System (DRS) to
regress vapor pressure and mole fraction data at T=100C with SYSOP15S
(Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 56th Edition, CRC Press, 1975, p. E-1).
In running the DRS, standard deviations for the temperature (C), vapor
pressure (mmHg), and mole fractions were set at 0.2, 1.0, and 0.001,
respectively. In addition, complete dissociation of the electrolyte was
assumed for all cases.
Option Codes for Electrolyte NRTL Activity

Coefficient Model (GMENRTL)
The electrolyte NRTL activity coefficient model (GMENRTL) has three option
codes and the option codes can affect the performance of this model.
107
Option code 1. Use this option code to specify the default values of pair
parameters for water/solute and solvent/solute; the solute represents a
cation/anion pair. The value (1) sets the default values to zero and the value
(3) sets the default values for water/solute to (8,-4) and for solvent/solute to
(10,-2). The value (3) is the default choice of the option code.
Option code 2. Not used.
Option code 3. Always leave this option code set to the value (1) to use the
solvent/solvent binary parameters obtained from NRTL parameters.
ENRTL-SAC
eNRTL-SAC (ENRTLSAC, patent pending) is an extension of the nonrandom
two-liquid segment activity coefficient model (NRTL-SAC, patent pending) by
Chen and Song (Ind. Eng. Chem. Res., 2004, 43, 8354) to include
electrolytes in the solution. It can be used in usable in Aspen Properties and
Aspen Polymers. It is intended for the computation of ionic activity
coefficients and solubilities of electrolytes, organic and inorganic, in common
solvents and solvent mixtures. In addition to the three types of molecular
parameters defined for organic nonelectrolytes in NRTL-SAC (hydrophobicity
X, hydrophilicity Z, and polarity Y- and Y+), an electrolyte parameter, E, is
introduced to characterize both local and long-range ion-ion and ion-molecule
interactions attributed to ionized segments of electrolytes.
In applying the segment contribution concept to electrolytes, a new
conceptual electrolyte segment e corresponding to the electrolyte parameter
E, is introduced. This conceptual segment e would completely dissociate to a
cationic segment (c) and an anionic segment (a), both of unity charge. All
electrolytes, organic or inorganic, symmetric or unsymmetric, univalent or
multivalent, are to be represented with this conceptual uni-univalent
electrolyte segment e together with previously defined hydrophobic segment
x, polar segments y- and y+, and hydrophilic segment z in NRTL-SAC.
A major consideration in the extension of NRTL-SAC for electrolytes is the
treatment of the reference state for activity coefficient calculations. While the
conventional reference state for nonelectrolyte systems is the pure liquid
component, the conventional reference state for electrolytes in solution is the
infinite-dilution aqueous solution and the corresponding activity coefficient is
unsymmetric. The equation for the logarithm of the unsymmetric activity
coefficient of an ionic species is
With
108
109
Where:
110
I, J
Component index
i, j, m, c, a
Conceptual segment index
Conceptual molecular segment, x, y-, y+, z
Conceptual cationic segment
Conceptual anionic segment
i, j
m,c,a
I*
Unsymmetric activity coefficient of an ionic species I
I*lc
NRTL term
I*PDH
Pitzer-Debye-Hckel term
I*FH
Flory-Huggins term
Aqueous-phase infinite-dilution reference state
Activity coefficient of conceptual segment i
rI
Total segment number of component I
xI
Mole fraction of component I
rI,i
Number of conceptual segment i containing in component I
xi
Segment mole fraction of conceptual segment i in mixtures
ij
NRTL binary non-randomness factor parameter for

conceptual segments
ij
NRTL binary interaction energy parameter for conceptual

segments
Debye-Hckel parameter
Closest approach parameter, 14.9
Ix
Ionic strength (segment mole fraction scale)
Average solvent molecular weight, g/mol
Average solvent density, g/cm3
NA
Avogadros number
Qe
Absolute electronic charge
Average solvent dielectric constant
Water dielectric constant
rc
Born radius of cationic segment
ra
Born radius of anionic segment
NRTL binary parameters for conceptual segments

The NRTL binary parameters between conceptual molecular segments in are
determined by available VLE and LLE data between reference molecules
defined in NRTLSAC.
Segment (1) x
Segment (2) y-
x
z
yz
y+
z
x
y+
12
21
12 = 21
1.643
6.547
-2.000
2.000
1.643
1.834
10.949 1.787
1.787
1.834
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.3
NaCl is used as the reference electrolyte for the conceptual electrolyte

segment e. The NRTL binary parameters between conceptual molecular
111
segments and the electrolyte segment e are determined from literature data
or preset as follows:
Segment (1) x
Segment (2) e
ye
y+
e
z
e
12
21
12 = 21
15
12
12
8.885
-3
-3
-4.549
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
Parameters used in ENRTLSAC

Each component can have up to five parameters, rI,i (i = x, y-, y+, z, e),
although only one or two of these parameters are needed for most solvents
and ionic species in practice. Since conceptual segments apply to all species,
these five parameters are implemented together as a binary parameter,
NRTLXY(I, i) where I represents a component index and i represents a
conceptual segment index.
Option codes
There are three option codes in ENRTLSAC. The first is used to enable or
disable the Flory-Huggins term. The other two are only used internally and
you should not change their values. The Flory-Huggins term is included by
default in eNRTL-SAC model. You can remove this term using the first option
code. The table below lists the values for the first option code.
0
Flory-Huggins term included (default)
Others
Flory-Huggins term removed
References
C.-C. Chen and Y. Song, "Solubility Modeling with a Nonrandom Two-Liquid
Segment Activity Coefficient Model," Ind. Eng. Chem. Res. 43, 8354 (2004).
C.-C. Chen and Y. Song, "Extension of Nonrandom Two-Liquid Segment
Activity Coefficient Model for Electrolytes," Ind. Eng. Chem. Res. 44, 8909
(2005).
Hansen
Hansen is a solubility parameter model and is commonly used in the solvent
selection process. It is based on the regular solution theory and Hansen
solubility parameters. This model has no binary parameters and its application
merely follows the empirical guide like dissolves like.
The Hansen model calculates liquid activity coefficients. The equation for the
Hansen model is:
with
112
Where:
= Activity coefficient of component i
Vi
= Molar volume of component i
id
= Hansen solubility parameter of component i for nonpolar

effect
ip
= Hansen solubility parameter of component i for polar effect
ih
= Hansen solubility parameter of component i for hydrogenbonding effect
= Volume fraction of component i
xi
= Mole fraction of component i
= Gas constant
= Temperature
The Hansen model does not require binary parameters. For each component,
it has four input parameters.
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default
MDS
Lower Upper
Limit
Limit
Units
PRESSURE^0.5
PRESSURE^0.5
DELTAH
id
ip
ih
PRESSURE^0.5
HANVOL
Vi
VOLUME
DELTAD
DELTAP
Option codes
The Hansen volume is implemented as an input parameter. If the Hansen
volume is not input by the user it will be calculated by an Aspen Plus internal
method. You can also request the Aspen Plus method using Option Codes in
Aspen Plus Interface. The table below lists the option codes.
First Option Code in Hansen model

0
Hansen volume input by user (default)
113
Other values
Hansen volume calculated by Aspen Plus
Reference
Frank, T. C.; Downey, J. R.; Gupta, S. K. "Quickly Screen Solvents for
Organic Solids," Chemical Engineering Progress 1999, December, 41.
Hansen, C. M. Hansen Solubility Parameters: A Users Handbook; CRC Press,
2000.
Ideal Liquid
This model is used in Raoult's law. It represents ideality of the liquid phase.
This model can be used for mixtures of hydrocarbons of similar carbon
number. It can be used as a reference to compare the results of other activity
coefficient models.
The equation is:
ln
i = 0
NRTL (Non-Random Two-Liquid)

The NRTL model calculates liquid activity coefficients for the following
property methods: NRTL, NRTL-2, NRTL-HOC, NRTL-NTH, and NRTL-RK. It is
recommended for highly non-ideal chemical systems, and can be used for VLE
and LLE applications. The model can also be used in the advanced equationof-state mixing rules, such as Wong-Sandler and MHV2.
The equation for the NRTL model is:
for Tlower
T Tupper
Where:
Gij
ij
ij
ii
Gii
aij, bij, eij, and fij are unsymmetrical. That is, aij may not be equal to aji, etc.
114
Recommended cij Values for Different Types of Mixtures

cij
Mixtures
0.30
Nonpolar substances; nonpolar with polar non-associated liquids; small

deviations from ideality
0.20
Saturated hydrocarbons with polar non-associated liquids and systems that

exhibit liquid-liquid immiscibility
0.47
Strongly self-associated substances with nonpolar substances
The binary parameters aij, bij, cij, dij, eij, and fij can be determined from VLE
and/or LLE data regression. The Aspen Physical Property System has a large
number of built-in binary parameters for the NRTL model. The binary
parameters have been regressed using VLE and LLE data from the Dortmund
Databank. The binary parameters for the VLE applications were regressed
using the ideal gas, Redlich-Kwong, and Hayden O'Connell equations of state.
See Physical Property Data, Chapter 1, for details.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
NRTL/1
aij
-100.0
100.0
NRTL/2
bij
-30000
30000.0
TEMPERATURE
NRTL/3
cij
0.30
0.0
1.0
NRTL/4
dij
-0.02
0.02
TEMPERATURE
NRTL/5
eij
TEMPERATURE
NRTL/6
fij
TEMPERATURE
NRTL/7
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
NRTL/8
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
Note: If any of bij, dij, or eij is non-zero, absolute temperature units are
assumed for bij, dij, eij, and fij. Otherwise, user input units for temperature are
used. The temperature limits are always interpreted in user input units.
The NRTL-2 property method uses data set 2 for NRTL. All other NRTL
methods use data set 1.
References
H. Renon and J.M. Prausnitz, "Local Compositions in Thermodynamic Excess
Functions for Liquid Mixtures," AIChE J., Vol. 14, No. 1, (1968), pp. 135
144.
NRTL-SAC Model
NRTL-SAC (patent pending) is a segment contribution activity coefficient
model, derived from the Polymer NRTL model and extended to handle
electrolytes, but usable in Aspen Plus or Aspen Properties without Aspen
Polymers. NRTL-SAC can be used for fast, qualitative estimation of the
solubility of complex organic compounds in common solvents. It can also be
used as a general activity coefficient model in Aspen Plus, Aspen Properties,
and HYSYS.
Conceptually, the model treats the liquid non-ideality of mixtures containing
complex organic molecules (solute) and small molecules (solvent) in terms of
interactions between three pairwise interacting conceptual segments:
115
hydrophobic segment (x), hydrophilic segment (z), and polar segments (yand y+). In practice, these conceptual segments become the molecular
descriptors used to represent the molecular surface characteristics of each
solute or solvent molecule. Hexane, water, and acetonitrile are selected as
the reference molecules for the hydrophobic, hydrophilic, and polar segments,
respectively. The molecular parameters for all other solvents can be
determined by regression of available VLE or LLE data for binary systems of
solvent and the reference molecules or their substitutes.
The treatment results in four component-specific molecular parameters:
hydrophobicity X, hydrophilicity Z, and polarity Y- and Y+. The two types of
polar segments, Y- and Y+, are used to reflect the wide variations of
interactions between polar molecules and water.
NRTL-SAC can also be used to model electrolyte systems. In this case, an
electrolyte segment e, corresponding to the electrolyte parameter E, is
introduced. This conceptual segment e completely dissociates to a cationic
segment (c) and an anionic segment (a), both of unit charge. All electrolytes,
organic or inorganic, symmetric or unsymmetric, univalent or multivalent, are
to be represented with this conceptual 1-1 electrolyte segment e together
with the previously defined hydrophobic segment x, polar segments y- and
y+, and hydrophilic segment z in NRTL-SAC. The reference state for ions is by
default an unsymmetric state based on infinite dilution in aqueous solution,
but an option code is available to select the symmetric state of pure fused
salts. When there are no electrolytes present, the segment e is unused and
the current model reduces to the non-electrolyte version of NRTL-SAC present
in earlier releases.
The conceptual segment contribution approach in NRTL-SAC represents a
practical alternative to the UNIFAC functional group contribution approach.
This approach is suitable for use in the industrial practice of carrying out
measurements for a few selected solvents and then using NRTL-SAC to
quickly predict other solvents or solvent mixtures and to generate a list of
suitable solvent systems.
The NRTL-SAC model calculates liquid activity coefficients.
Note: This is the updated version of NRTL-SAC, represented with property
model GMNRTLS and property method NRTL-SAC. This version does not
require the specification of components as oligomers. For the old version, see
NRTLSAC for Segments/Oligomers and ENRTL-SAC.
For the model equations, see NRTL-SAC Model Derivation.
Parameters used in NRTL-SAC

Each component can have up to five parameters, rx,I, ry-,I, ry+,I, rz,I, and re,I,
representing the equivalent number of segments of each type for the NRTL
activity coefficient model. Only one or two of these molecular parameters are
needed for most solvents in practice. These parameters are implemented
together as pure parameter XYZE with five elements representing these five
parameters. Values for this parameter are available for many common
solvents in the NRTL-SAC databank.
116
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol
Default
MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper Limit Units
XYZE/1
rx,I
XYZE/2
ry-,I
XYZE/3
ry+,I
XYZE/4
rz,I
XYZE/5
re,I
Electrolytes must be modeled as ion pairs in this system, while the individual
ions are components in the Aspen Physical Property System, so for these ion
pairs, the five parameters are stored in binary parameter BXYZE which has
elements corresponding to those of XYZE.
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol
Default
MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper Limit Units
BXYZE/1
rx,CA
BXYZE/2
ry-,CA
BXYZE/3
ry+,CA
BXYZE/4
rz,CA
BXYZE/5
re,CA
The conceptual segment numbers of a cationic component
and
an anionic component
come from the dissociation of their
corresponding electrolyte component CA, as defined by the chemical equation
describing the dissociation of the electrolyte:
with
Since an electrolyte component CA can be measured by up to five conceptual

segments
single electrolyte.
, we can calculate ri,C and ri,A as follows for systems of
For an electrolyte system where multi-electrolytes may be generated, a

simple mixing rule is used:
117
where YC is a cationic charge composition fraction and YA is an anionic charge

composition fraction; they are defined as follows:
Notice that electrolyte here is meant to represent an ion-pair composed of a

cationic component and an anionic component in the solutions. The result is
that electrolytes are generated from all possible combinations of ions in the
solution; each generated electrolyte is not necessarily associated with an ionpair through the dissociation.
Option Codes in NRTL-SAC

Three option codes are available for NRTL-SAC to select the reference state
and to optionally exclude the Flory-Huggins and long-range interaction terms:
Option Code Value
Meaning
Reference state for ions is unsymmetric: infinite dilution in

aqueous solution (default)
Reference state for ions is symmetric: pure fused salts
Long-range interaction term included (default)
Long-range interaction term removed
2
3
References
C.-C. Chen and Y. Song, "Extension of Nonrandom Two-Liquid Segment
Activity Coefficient Model for Electrolytes," Ind. Eng. Chem. Res., 2005, 44,
8909.
Y. Song and C.-C. Chen, "Symmetric Nonrandom Two-Liquid Segment Activity
Coefficient Model for Electrolytes," Ind. Eng. Chem. Res., 2009, 48, 5522.
118
NRTL-SAC Reference States

The NRTL-SAC activity coefficient model for component I is composed of the
local composition term, ln Ilc, the Pitzer-Debye-Hckel long-range interaction
term, ln IPDH, and the Flory-Huggins term, IFH:
(1)
This equation needs to be normalized based on the reference states of

molecular and ionic components.
Reference state for molecular components

The reference state for a molecular component is defined as follows:
(2)
This definition is the so-called standard state of pure liquids for molecular
components and it is also called the symmetric reference state for molecular
components.
Reference state for ionic components

The standard state of pure liquids is hypothetical for ionic components in
electrolyte systems. The symmetric reference state is defined as the pure
fused salt state of each electrolyte component in the system.
However, the conventional reference state for ionic components is the
infinite-dilution activity coefficient in pure water; it is also called the
unsymmetric reference state for ionic components. In NRTL-SAC model, we
will consider both of these reference states; the unsymmetric state is the
default.
Pure fused salt state of an electrolyte component

For an electrolyte component CA, the pure fused salt state can be defined as
follows:
(3)
(4)
where is the mean ionic activity coefficient of the electrolyte component

and is related to the corresponding cationic and anionic activity coefficients
and A by this expression:
(5)
where C is the cationic stoichiometric coefficient and A is the anionic

stoichiometric coefficient, and =C+A (one mole of salt releases moles of
ions in solution). They are given by the chemical equation describing the
dissociation of the electrolyte. Therefore Eq. 5 can be written in terms of
charge numbers zC and zA:
119
(6)
At the pure fused salt state:

(7)
(8)
(9)
The symmetric reference state defined by Eq. 3 is restricted to systems

containing a single electrolyte component. For multi-electrolyte systems, the
symmetric reference state can be generalized from Eq. 3 as follows:
(10)
where I applies to all molecular components in the system. The symmetric

reference state is a molecular-component-free media.
Infinite-dilution aqueous solution

The condition of infinite-dilution solution for ionic components can be written
as follows:
(11)
This condition applies to all ionic components in the solution. In infinitedilution aqueous solutions, water must be present and is assumed to
represent the entire solution, so the unsymmetric reference state can be
written as follows:
(12)
This equation applies to all ionic components in the solution.
NRTL-SAC Local Composition Term

The segment-based excess Gibbs free energy of the local interactions for
systems with multiple molecular segments m and a single electrolyte segment
e (with a single cation segment c and anion segment a) can be written as
follows:
(13)
(14)
120
(15)
(16)
where I is the component index, i is the segment index, ri,I is the number of
segment i in component I, xI is the mole fraction of component I, xi is the
segment fraction of segment i, and ns is the total number of all segments in
the system.
Since there is only a single 1-1 electrolyte segment, the pair parameters
between a molecular segment and the electrolyte segment can be simplified
as follows:
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
We can then rewrite the excess Gibbs free energy as follows:

(21)
with
(22)
The local composition contribution to the segment activity coefficient can be

calculated as follows:
(23)
The local composition contribution to the activity coefficients for molecular

segments, the cationic segment, and the anionic segment can be calculated
out as follows:
121
(24)
(25)
(26)
The local composition term for the logarithm of the activity coefficient of
component I , before normalization to a chosen reference state, is computed
as the sum of the individual segment contributions.
(27)
Specifically, for non-electrolyte (molecular) components, the activity

coefficients are given as follows:
(28)
For a cationic component, we have
122
(29)
For an anionic component, we have

(30)
Molecular components
Applying Eq. 1, the normalization for molecular components can be done as
follows:
(31)
where mlc,I is the activity coefficient of the molecular segment m contained in

component I,
(32)
Ionic components with symmetric reference state

Applying Eq. 10, the local composition contribution to the symmetric activity
coefficients for ionic components in multi-electrolyte systems can be
normalized as follows:
(33)
(34)
(35)
where I applies to all molecular components in the solution and Ix0 is the ionic
strength at the symmetric reference state. In the case that electrolytes are
made up of only the conceptual 1-1 electrolyte segment and none of the
molecular segments, this reference state is equivalent to the molten state of
the conceptual 1-1 electrolyte.
Ionic components with infinite dilution aqueous solution

reference state
Applying Eq. 12, the unsymmetric activity coefficients for ionic components in
aqueous solutions can be normalized as follows:
(36)
(37)
123
where
solution:
and
are activity coefficients at the infinite dilution aqueous

(38)
(39)
NRTL-SAC Long-Range Interaction Term

To account for the long-range ion-ion interactions, the model uses the
symmetric Pitzer-Debye-Hckel (PDH) formula (Pitzer, 1986) on the segment
basis:
(40)
with
(41)
(42)
where ns is the total segment number of the solution, R is the gas constant,
A is the Debye-Hckel parameter, Ix is the segment-based ionic strength,
is the closest approach parameter, NA is Avogadro's number, v and are the
molar volume and dielectric constant of the solvent, Qe is the electron charge,
kB is the Boltzmann constant, zi is the charge number of segment i, and Ix0
represents Ix at the reference state. Since the "single 1-1 electrolyte segment
e=ca" is defined in the model, we can obtain:
(43)
For the symmetric reference state,

(44)
And for the unsymmetric reference state,

(45)
The long-range contribution to the activity coefficient of segment i can be

derived as follows:
(46)
124
For a molecular segment, the activity coefficient can be carried out as follows:
(47)
For the univalent cation or anion segment, the activity coefficient can be
carried out as follows:
(48)
The original Debye-Hckel theory is based on a single electrolyte with water

as the solvent. The molar volume v and the dielectric constant for the
single solvent water need to be extended for mixed-solvents based on the
molecular solvent properties; a simple composition average mixing rule is
proposed to calculate them as follows:
(49)
(50)
where S is a solvent component, MS is the solvent molecular weight, and each

sum is over all solvent components in the solution.
The long range interaction term for the logarithm of the activity coefficient of
component I is computed as the sum of the individual segment contributions.
(51)
For molecular components, the activity coefficients are given as follows:
(52)
From Eq. 47, it is easy to show that the PDH term activity coefficients for all
molecular components are normalized; that is
(53)
where I applies to all molecular components in the system.
125

Applying Eq. 10, the symmetric activity coefficients for ionic components from
the long range contribution are given as follows:
(54)
(55)
(56)
where I applies to all molecular components in the solution.

Applying Eq. 12, the unsymmetric activity coefficients for ionic components
from the long range contribution in aqueous solutions are given as follows:
(57)
(58)
Segment based Born correction term to activity coefficient

If the infinite dilution aqueous solution is chosen as the reference state, we
need to correct the change of the reference state from the mixed-solvent
composition to aqueous solution for the Debye-Hckel term. The Born term
(Robinson and Stokes, 1970; Rashin and Honig, 1985) is used for this
purpose:
(59)
where ri is the Born radius of segment species i and w is the dielectric

constant of water. GBorn is the Born term correction to the unsymmetric
Pitzer-Debye-Hckel formula Gex,PDH.
The Born correction activity coefficient of component i can be derived as
follows:
(60)
For a molecular segment, the correction to the activity coefficient is zero:

(61)
For the univalent cation or anion segment, the activity coefficient can be
carried out as follows:
126
(62)
Specifically,
(63)
(64)
The long range interaction term for the logarithm of the activity coefficient of
component I is computed as the sum of the individual segment contributions.
(65)
Activity coefficients given by Eq. 65 are already normalized for molecular

components as well as for ionic components with the infinite-dilution aqueous
solution reference state.
References
Pitzer, K.S., J.M. Simonson, "Thermodynamics of Multicomponent, Miscible,
Ionic Systems: Theory and Equations," J. Phys. Chem., 1986, 90, 3005-3009.
Robinson, R.A., Stokes, R.H., Electrolyte Solutions, 2nd revised edition,
Dover, 1970.
Rashig, A.A., Honig, B., "Reevaluation of the Born Model of Ion Hydration," J.
Phys. Chem., 1985, 89, 5588.
NRTL-SAC Flory-Huggins Term

We use the Flory-Huggins term to describe the combinatorial term:
(66)
(67)
where Gex,FH is the Flory-Huggins term for the excess Gibbs energy, I is the
segment fraction of component I, and rI is the number of all conceptual
segments in component I:
(68)
(69)
127
The contribution to the activity coefficient of component I from the

combinatorial term is thus:
(70)
It is easy to show that activity coefficients for molecular components from the
Flory-Huggins term are normalized; that is
(71)

Applying Eq. 10, the symmetric activity coefficients for ionic components from
the Flory-Huggins term can be carried out as follows:
(72)
(73)
with
(74)
(75)
(76)
(77)

Applying Eq. 12, the unsymmetric activity coefficients for ionic components in
aqueous solutions can be carried out as follows:
(78)
(79)
128
where
and
aqueous solution:
are activity coefficients at the infinite dilution

(80)
(81)
Henry Components in NRTL-SAC

Light gases (i.e. Henry components) are usually supercritical at the
temperature and pressure of the system. In that case pure component vapor
pressure is meaningless and therefore the pure liquid state at the
temperature and pressure of the system cannot serve as the reference state.
The reference state for a Henry component is redefined to be at infinite
dilution (that is, xI0) and at the temperature and pressure of the system.
The liquid phase reference fugacity, fI*,l, becomes the Henrys constant for
Henry components in the solution, HI, and the activity coefficient, I, is
converted to the infinite dilution reference state through the relationship:
(82)
where
is the infinite dilution activity coefficient of Henry component I
(xI0) in the solution. By this definition I* approaches unity as
xI approaches zero. The phase equilibrium relationship for Henry components
becomes:
(83)
The Henrys Law is available in all activity coefficient property methods. The
model calculates the Henrys constant for a dissolved gas component in all
solvent components in the mixture:
(84)
(85)
where HIS and

are the Henrys constant and the infinite dilution activity
coefficient of the dissolved gas component i in the solvent component S
(xI0 and xS1, respectively).
Since ionic species exist only in the liquid phase and therefore do not
participate directly in vapor-liquid equilibria, the activities of Henry
129
components are mainly through the local interactions with solvents. We can
calculate all three activity coefficients for Henry components as follows:
(86)
(87)
(88)
with
(89)
(90)
(91)
(92)
(93)
(94)
Notice that xH0 applies to all Henry components in the solution.
NRTLSAC for Segments/Oligomers

This is the original NRTLSAC model added in version 2006, which requires
that components be defined as oligomers. It is retained for compatibility, but
new models should use the NRTL-SAC model.
NRTL-SAC (patent pending) is a segment contribution activity coefficient
model, derived from the Polymer NRTL model, usable in Aspen Properties and
Aspen Polymers. NRTL-SAC can be used for fast, qualitative estimation of the
solubility of complex organic compounds in common solvents. Conceptually,
the model treats the liquid non-ideality of mixtures containing complex
organic molecules (solute) and small molecules (solvent) in terms of
interactions between three pairwise interacting conceptual segments:
hydrophobic segment (x), hydrophilic segment (z), and polar segments (yand y+). In practice, these conceptual segments become the molecular
descriptors used to represent the molecular surface characteristics of each
solute or solvent molecule. Hexane, water, and acetonitrile are selected as
the reference molecules for the hydrophobic, hydrophilic, and polar segments,
respectively. The molecular parameters for all other solvents can be
determined by regression of available VLE or LLE data for binary systems of
solvent and the reference molecules or their substitutes. The treatment
results in four component-specific molecular parameters: hydrophobicity X,
hydrophilicity Z, and polarity Y- and Y+. The two types of polar segments, Y-
130
and Y+, are used to reflect the wide variations of interactions between polar
molecules and water.
The conceptual segment contribution approach in NRTL-SAC represents a
practical alternative to the UNIFAC functional group contribution approach.
This approach is suitable for use in the industrial practice of carrying out
measurements for a few selected solvents and then using NRTL-SAC to
quickly predict other solvents or solvent mixtures and to generate a list of
suitable solvent systems.
The NRTL-SAC model calculates liquid activity coefficients.
The equation for the NRTL-SAC model is:
with
G = exp(-)
Where:
131
I, J
Component index
i, j, m
Conceptual segment indexx, y-, y+, z
Activity coefficient of component I
IC = IFH
Flory-Huggins term for combinatorial contribution to
IR = Ilc
NRTL term for local composition interaction contribution to
Segment mole fraction of component I
pI
Effective component size parameter
Empirical parameters for pI
rI
Total segment number of component I
xI
Mole fraction of component I
rI,m
Number of conceptual segment m containing in component

I
xi
Segment mole fraction of conceptual segment i in mixtures
im
NRTL binary non-randomness factor parameter for

conceptual segments
im
NRTL binary interaction energy parameter for conceptual

segments
sI and
NRTL binary parameters for conceptual segments

The NRTL binary parameters between conceptual segments in NRTLSAC are
determined by available VLE and LLE data between reference molecules
defined above.
Segment 1 x
Segment 2 y-
x
z
yz
y+
z
x
y+
12
21
12 = 21
1.643
6.547
-2.000
2.000
1.643
1.834
10.949 1.787
1.787
1.834
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.3
Parameters used in NRTLSAC

Each component can have up to four parameters, rI,x, rI,y-, rI,y+, and rI,z
although only one or two of these molecular parameters are needed for most
solvents in practice. Since conceptual segments apply to all molecules, these
four molecular parameters are implemented together as a binary parameter,
NRTLXY(I, m) where I represents a component (molecule) index and m
represents a conceptual segment index.
In addition, the Flory-Huggins size parameter, FHSIZE , is used in NRTLSAC
to calculate the effective component size parameter, pI. The Flory-Huggins
combinatorial term can be turned off by setting I = 0 for each component in
mixtures.
132
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units Comment
NRTLXY
rI,m
Binary,
symmetric
FHSIZE/1
sI
1.0
1E-15
1E15
Unary
FHSIZE/2
1.0
-1E10
1E10
Unary
Option codes
The Flory-Huggins term is included by default in the NRTLSAC model. You can
remove this term using the first option code. The table below lists the values
for this option code.
0
Others
NRTLSAC molecular parameters for common solvents

The molecular parameters are identified for 62 solvents and published.
Solvent name
rI,x
rI,y-
rI,y+
rI,z
ACETIC-ACID
0.045
0.164
0.157
0.217
ACETONE
0.131
0.109
0.513
ACETONITRILE
0.018
0.131
0.883
ANISOLE
0.722
BENZENE
0.607
1-BUTANOL
0.414
0.007
0.485
2-BUTANOL
0.335
0.082
0.355
N-BUTYL-ACETATE
0.317
0.030
0.330
METHYL-TERT-BUTYL-ETHER
1.040
0.219
0.172
CARBON-TETRACHLORIDE
0.718
0.141
CHLOROBENZENE
0.710
0.424
CHLOROFORM
0.278
0.039
CUMENE
1.208
0.541
CYCLOHEXANE
0.892
1,2-DICHLOROETHANE
0.394
0.691
1,1-DICHLOROETHYLENE
0.529
0.208
1,2-DICHLOROETHYLENE
0.188
0.832
DICHLOROMETHANE
0.321
1.262
1,2-DIMETHOXYETHANE
0.081
0.194
0.858
N,N-DIMETHYLACETAMIDE
0.067
0.030
0.157
N,N-DIMETHYLFORMAMIDE
0.073
0.564
0.372
DIMETHYL-SULFOXIDE
0.532
2.890
1,4-DIOXANE
0.154
0.086
ETHANOL
0.256
0.081
0.190
0.401
0.507
133
Solvent name
rI,x
rI,y-
rI,y+
2-ETHOXYETHANOL
0.071
0.318
ETHYL-ACETATE
0.322
0.049
0.237
0.421
0.141
ETHYLENE-GLYCOL
DIETHYL-ETHER
0.448
ETHYL-FORMATE
0.257
0.041
0.338
0.165
0.280
0.089
FORMAMIDE
0.341
0.252
FORMIC-ACID
0.707
N-HEPTANE
2.470
1.340
N-HEXANE
1.000
ISOBUTYL-ACETATE
1.660
ISOPROPYL-ACETATE
0.552
0.154
0.498
METHANOL
0.088
0.149
0.027
0.562
2-METHOXYETHANOL
0.052
0.043
0.251
0.560
METHYL-ACETATE
0.236
0.337
3-METHYL-1-BUTANOL
0.419
0.538
METHYL-BUTYL-KETONE
0.673
METHYLCYCLOHEXANE
1.162
METHYL-ETHYL-KETONE
0.247
0.036
0.480
METHYL-ISOBUTYL-KETONE
0.673
0.224
0.469
ISOBUTANOL
0.566
N-METHYL-2-PYRROLIDONE
0.197
NITROMETHANE
0.025
N-PENTANE
0.898
1-PENTANOL
0.474
0.223
1-PROPANOL
0.375
0.030
ISOPROPYL-ALCOHOL
0.351
0.070
0.003
N-PROPYL-ACETATE
0.514
0.134
0.587
PYRIDINE
0.205
0.135
0.174
SULFOLANE
0.210
TETRAHYDROFURAN
0.235
0.040
1,2,3,4-TETRAHYDRONAPHTHALENE 0.443
0.555
0.108
0.224
0.314
0.469
0.251
0.067
0.322
0.485
0.305
1.216
0.426
0.248
0.511
0.353
0.457
0.320
TOLUENE
0.604
0.304
1,1,1-TRICHLOROETHANE
0.548
0.287
TRICHLOROETHYLENE
0.426
0.285
M-XYLENE
0.758
0.021
0.316
1.000
WATER
134
rI,z
TRIETHYLAMINE
0.557
0.105
1-OCTANOL
0.766
0.032
0.624
0.335
Reference
C.-C. Chen and Y. Song, "Solubility Modeling with a Nonrandom Two-Liquid
Segment Activity Coefficient Model," Ind. Eng. Chem. Res. 43, 8354 (2004).
Using NRTLSAC
NRTLSAC (patent pending) is a segment contribution activity coefficient
model, derived from the Polymer NRTL model, usable in Aspen Properties and
Aspen Polymers. NRTLSAC can be used for fast, qualitative estimation of the
solubility of complex organic compounds in common solvents. For more
information about the model, see NRTLSAC for Segments/Oligomers.
Note: A newer version of NRTL-SAC comes with its own property method
named NRTL-SAC and does not require the specification of a method and
oligomer components as described below.
The NRTLSAC model for Segments/Oligomers in the Aspen Physical Property
System is a liquid activity coefficient model called NRTLSAC. To specify it:
1. On the Properties | Specifications sheet, specify process type ALL.
2. Specify base method NRTLSAC.
In order to use this version of NRTLSAC, all components must be defined as
oligomers. Four conceptual segments also must be defined. On the
Components | Polymers | Oligomers sheet, enter a number for at least
one conceptual segment for each oligomer component, as required by the
definition of an oligomer. These numbers are not used by NRTL-SAC.
On the Properties | Parameters | Binary Interaction | NRTL-1 form,
enter the binary parameters between conceptual segments. In the following
example, the conceptual segments are named X, Y-, Y+, and Z.
Segment 1 X
Segment 2 Y-
X
Z
YZ
Y+
Z
X
Y+
AIJ
1.643
6.547
-2.000
2.000
1.643
AJI
1.834
10.949 1.787
1.787
1.834
CIJ
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.2
0.3
On the Properties | Parameters | Binary Interaction | NRTLXY-1 form,

enter a non-zero value for at least one of the four parameters for each
component.
Pitzer Activity Coefficient Model

The Pitzer model was developed as an improvement upon an earlier model
proposed by Guggenheim ( 1935, 1955). The earlier model worked well at low
electrolyte concentrations, but contained discrepancies at higher
concentrations (>0.1M). The Pitzer model resolved these discrepancies,
without resorting to excessive arrays of higher-order terms.
Important: The model can be used for aqueous electrolyte systems, up to 6
molal ionic strength. It cannot be used for systems with any other solvent or
mixed solvents. Any non-water molecular components are considered solutes
and treated as Henry components.
135
This section provides theoretical background for the model. All model
equations and parameter requirements are included.
The Pitzer model is commonly used in the calculation of activity coefficients
for aqueous electrolytes up to 6 molal ionic strength. Do not use this model if
a non-aqueous solvent exists. Henry's law parameters are required for all
other components in the aqueous solution. The model development and
working equations are provided in the following sections. Parameter
conversion between the Pitzer notation and our notation is also provided.
The Pitzer model in the Aspen Physical Property System involves usersupplied parameters that are used in the calculation of binary and ternary
parameters for the electrolyte system.
Five elements (P1 through P5) account for the temperature dependencies of
parameters (0), (1), (2), (3), C , , and . These parameters follow the
temperature dependency relation:
Where:
Tref
298.15 K
The user must:
Supply these elements for the binary parameters using a Properties |

Parameters | Binary | T-Dependent form.
Supply these elements for on the Properties | Parameters |

Electrolyte Ternary form.
Specify Comp ID i and Comp ID j (and Comp ID k for ) on these forms,

using the same order that appears on the Components Specifications
Selection sheet.
The parameters are summarized in the following table. There is a Pitzer

parameter databank in the Aspen Physical Property System (see Physical
Property Data).
Parameter
Name
Provides
P1 - P5 for
No. of
Default MDS Units
Elements
Cation-Anion Parameters
5
GMPTB3
(0)
(1)
(2)
(3)
GMPTC
GMPTB0
GMPTB1
GMPTB2
Cation-Cation Parameters
GMPTTH
cc'
Anion-Anion Parameters
GMPTTH
aa'
Ternary Parameters
136
Parameter
Name
Provides
P1 - P5 for
No. of
Default MDS Units
Elements
GMPTPS,
GMPTP1,
GMPTP2,
GMPTP3,
GMPTP4
ijk
1 (in each 0
parameter)
Molecule-Ion and Molecule-Molecule Parameters

5
GMPTB1
(0)
(1)
GMPTC
GMPTB0
Model Development
The Pitzer model analyzes "hard-core" effects in the Debye-Hckel theory. It
uses the following expansion as a radial distribution function:
(1)
Where:
gij
Distribution function
Radius
qij
=
(pair potential of mean force)
With:
zi
Charge of ion i
Qe
Electron charge
j(r)
Average electric potential for ion j
Boltzmann's constant
Temperature
This radial distribution function is used in the so-called pressure equation that
relates this function and the intermolecular potential to thermodynamic
properties. From this relation you can obtain an expression for the osmotic
coefficient.
Pitzer proposes a general equation for the excess Gibbs energy. The basic
equation is:
(2)
Where:
GE
Excess Gibbs energy
137
Gas constant
Temperature
nw
Kilograms of water
mi
=
(molality of ion i)
With:
xi
Mole fraction of ion i
xw
Mw
Molecular weight of water (g/mol)
ni
Moles of ion i
The function f(I) is an electrostatic term that expresses the effect of longrange electrostatic forces between ions. This takes into account the hard-core
effects of the Debye-Hckel theory. This term is discussed in detail in the
following section. The parameters ij are second virial coefficients that
account for the short-range forces between solutes i and j. The parameters
ijk account for the interactions between solutes, i, j, k. For ion-ion
interactions, ij is a function of ionic strength. For molecule-ion or moleculemolecule interactions this ionic strength dependency is neglected. The
dependence of ijk on ionic strength is always neglected. The matrices ij and
ijk are also taken to be symmetric (that is, ij = ji).
Pitzer modified this expression for the Gibbs energy by identifying
combinations of functions. He developed interaction parameters that can be
evaluated using experimental data. He selected mathematical expressions for
these parameters that best fit experimental data.
Pitzer's model can be applied to aqueous systems of strong electrolytes and
to aqueous systems of weak electrolytes with molecular solutes. These
applications are discussed in the following section.
In the Aspen Physical Property System, this model is applied using the
reference state of infinite dilution solution in water for non-water molecular
solutes and ionic species. The properties such as DHAQFM are obtained at 25
C and 1 atm.
Application of the Pitzer Model to Aqueous Strong

Electrolyte Systems
Pitzer modified his basic equation to make it more useful for data correlation
of aqueous strong electrolytes. He defined a set of more directly observable
parameters to represent combinations of the second and third virial
coefficients. The modified Pitzer equation is:
138
(3)
zi
Charge of ion i
Subscripts c, c', and a, a' denote cations and anions of the solution. B, C, ,
and are interaction parameters. f(I) is an electrostatic term as a function of
ionic strength. The cation-anion parameters B and C are characteristic for an
aqueous single-electrolyte system. These parameters can be determined by
the properties of pure (apparent) electrolytes. B is expressed as a function of
(0) and (1), or of (0), (2), and (3) (see equations 11 through 15).
The parameters and are for the difference of interaction of unlike ions of
the same sign from the mean of like ions. These parameters can be measured
from common-ion mixtures. Examples are NaCl + KCl + H2O or NaCl + NaNO3
+ H2O (sic, Pitzer, 1989). These terms are discussed in detail later in this
section.
Frst and Renon (1982) propose the following expression as the Pitzer
equation for the excess Gibbs energy:
(4)
The difference between equations 3 and 4 is that Pitzer orders cation before
anions. Frst and Renon do not. All summations are taken over all ions i and j
(both cations and anions). This involves making the parameter matrices Bij,
Cij, ij, and ijk symmetric, as follows:
Second-order parameters are written Bij if i and j are ions of different sign. Bij
= 0 if the sign of zi = sign of zj, and Bii = 0. Since cations are not ordered
before anions, Bij = Bji. This eliminates the 2 in the second term in brackets in
Pitzer's original expression (equation 3). Second-order parameters are written
ij if i and j are ions of the same sign. Thus ij = 0 if the sign of zi is different
from the sign of zj, and ii = 0 with ij = ji.
Third-order parameters are written Cij if i and j are ions with different signs.
Cij = 0 if the sign of zi = sign of zj, and Cii = 0 with Cij = Cji. The factor of 2 in
the fifth bracketed term in Pitzer's original expression (equation 3) becomes
1/2 in equation 4. The matrix C is symmetric and
ions to make the equation symmetric.
is extended to all
139
ijk is written for three different ions ijk = kij = jki , and ikk = 0. ijk = 0
if the sign of zi =sign of zj =sign of zk. The factor of 1/6 is different from 1/2
in the last term in brackets in Pitzer's original expression. Pitzer distinguishes
between cations and anions. In Pitzer's original model this parameter appears
twice, as cc'a and c'ca. In this modified model, it appears six times, as cc'a;
c'ca; acc'; ac'c; cac'; and c'ac. Frst and Renon's expression, equation 4,
calculates the expressions for activity coefficients and osmotic coefficients.
Pitzer (1975) modified his model by adding the electrostatic unsymmetrical
mixing effects, producing this modified Pitzer equation for the excess Gibbs
energy:
(4a)
Calculation of Activity Coefficients

The natural logarithm of the activity coefficient for ions is calculated from
equation 4a to give:
(5)
Where is neglected and

effects:
ij and 'ij are the electrostatic unsymmetric mixing
The X parameters are calculated differently on the option code.

For option code = 1, there is no unsymmetric mixing correction term:
140
For option code = 0 (default), the unsymmetric mixing correction term is in

polynomial form:
For option code = 1, the unsymmetric mixing correction term is in integral

form:
For water the logarithm of the activity coefficient is calculated similarly, as

follows:
Applying:
to equation 3 and using:
Where Nw = moles water, gives:

(6)
f(I), the electrostatic term, is expressed as a function of ionic strength I :

(7)
I, the ionic strength, is defined as:
141
(8)
Taking the derivative of equation 7 with respect to I, gives:
(9)
So that:
(10)
This equation is used in equation 6. In equations 7 and 9, is the usual DebyeHckel constant for the osmotic coefficient, determined from:
(11)
Where:
NA
Avogadro's constant
dw
Water density
Dielectric constant of solvent B
b is an adjustable parameter, which has been optimized in this model to equal

1.2.
B and B' need expressions so that equations 5 and 6 can completely be solved
for the activity coefficients. The parameter B is determined differently for
different electrolyte pairings. For 1-n electrolytes (1-1, 1-2, 2-1, and so on)
the following expression gives the parameter B:
(12)
with
1=2.0.
For n-m electrolytes, n and m>1 (2-2, 2-3, 3-4, and so on), B is determined
by the following expression:
(13)
with
2 = 12.0 and 3 = 1.4.
By taking appropriate derivatives, expressions for B' can be derived for 1n

electrolytes:
(14)
142
and for n-m electrolytes:

(15)
The parameters (0),

Pitzer's articles .
(1), (2), (3) and also C, , and can be found in
After the activity coefficients are calculated, they can be converted to the
mole fraction scale from the molality scale by the following relations:
For solutes:
(16)
For water as a solvent:

(17)
Where:
Activity coefficient (molality scale)
Activity coefficient (mole fraction scale)
Application of the Pitzer Model to Aqueous

Electrolyte Systems with Molecular Solutes
In aqueous weak electrolyte systems with molecular solutes, the second and
third virial coefficients in the basic Pitzer equation for molecule-ion and
molecule-molecule interactions must be considered. The following extensions
of Pitzer's interaction parameters are made.
The second-order parameters Bij are extended to include molecule-molecule
and molecule-ion interaction parameters.
The third-order parameters ijk are extended to molecule-molecule-molecule
interactions. The following expressions relate ijk to Pitzer's original ijk:
iii = 6iii
However, molecule-molecule interactions were not taken into account by
Pitzer and coworkers. So iii is an artificially introduced quantity.
143
The equations for activity coefficients and the Gibbs free energy are the same
as equations 3 through 6.
Parameters
The Pitzer model in the Aspen Physical Property System involves usersupplied parameters. These parameters are used in the calculation of binary
and ternary parameters for the electrolyte system. These parameters include
the cation-anion parameters (0), (1), (2), (3) and C , cation-cation

parameter cc', anion-anion parameter aa', cation1-cation2-common anion
parameter cc'a, anion1-anion2-common cation parameter caa', and the
molecule-ion and molecule-molecule parameters (0), (1), and, C . The

parameter names in the Aspen Physical Property System and their
requirements are discussed in Pitzer Activity Coefficient Model.
Parameter Conversion
For n-m electrolytes, n and m>1 (2-2, 2-3, 3-4, and so on), the parameter
(3) corresponds to Pitzer's (1). (2) is the same in both the Aspen Physical
Property System and original Pitzer models. Pitzer refers to the n-m
electrolyte parameters as (1), (2), (0). (0) and (2) retain their meanings in
both models, but Pitzer's (1) is (3) in the Aspen Physical Property System. Be
careful to make this distinction when entering n-m electrolyte parameters.
Pitzer often gives values of (0), (1), (2), (3), and C that are corrected by
some factors (see Pitzer and Mayorga (1973) for examples). These factors
originate from one of Pitzer's earlier expressions for the excess Gibbs energy:
(18)
Where:
=
na
Mole number of anions
nc
Mole number of cation
Here (0), (1), (2), and (3) are multiplied by a factor of 2ncna. C is multiplied
by a factor of 2(ncna)3/2.
Aspen Physical Property System accounts for these correcting factors. Enter
the parameters without their correcting factors.
For example, Pitzer gives the values of parameters for MgCl2 as:
144
4/3(0)
0.4698
4/3(1)
2.242
0.00979
Perform the necessary conversions and enter the parameters as:

=
0.3524
1.6815
0.00520
Parameter Sources
Binary and ternary parameters for the Pitzer model for various electrolyte
systems are available from Pitzer's series on the thermodynamics of
electrolytes. These papers and the electrolyte parameters they give are:
Reference
Parameters available
(Pitzer, 1973)
Binary parameters ((0), (1), C ) for 13

dilute aqueous electrolytes
(Pitzer and Mayorga, 1973)
Binary parameters for 1-1 inorganic

electrolytes, salts of carboxylic acids (1-1),
tetraalkylammonium halids, sulfonic acids
and salts, additional 1-1 organic salts, 2-1
inorganic compounds, 2-1 organic
electrolytes, 3-1 electrolytes, 4-1 and 5-1
electrolytes
(Pitzer and Mayorga, 1974)
Binary parameters for 2-2 electrolytes in

water at 25C
(Pitzer and Kim, 1974)
Binary and ternary parameters for mixed

electrolytes, binary mixtures without a
common ion, mixed electrolytes with three
or more solutes
(Pitzer, 1975)
Ternary parameters for systems mixing

doubly and singly charged ions
(Pitzer and Silvester, 1976)
Parameters for phosphoric acid and its buffer

solutions
(Pitzer, Roy and Silvester, 1977)
Parameters and thermodynamic properties

for sulfuric acid
(Silvester and Pitzer, 1977)
Data for NaCl and aqueous NaCl solutions
(Pitzer, Silvester, and Peterson, 1978)
Rare earth chlorides, nitrates, and

perchlorates
(Peiper and Pitzer, 1982)
Aqueous carbonate solutions, including

mixtures of sodium carbonate, bicarbonate,
and chloride
(Phutela and Pitzer, 1983)
Aqueous calcium chloride
(Conceicao, de Lima, and Pitzer, 1983)
Saturated aqueous solutions, including

mixtures of sodium chloride, potassium
chloride, and cesium chloride
145
Reference
Parameters available
(Pabalan and Pitzer, 1987)
Parameters for polynomial unsymmetric

mixing term
(Kim and Frederick, 1988)
Parameters for integral unsymmetric mixing

term
Pitzer References
Conceicao, M., P. de Lima, and K.S. Pitzer, "Thermodynamics of Saturated
Aqueous Solutions Including Mixtures of NaCl, KCl, and CsCl, "J. Solution
Chem, Vol. 12, No. 3, (1983), pp. 171-185.
Frst, W. and H. Renon, "Effects of the Various Parameters in the Application
of Pitzer's Model to Solid-Liquid Equilibrium. Preliminary Study for Strong 1-1
Electrolytes," Ind. Eng. Chem. Process Des. Dev., Vol. 21, No. 3, (1982),
pp. 396-400.
Guggenheim, E.A., Phil. Mag., Vol. 7, No. 19, (1935), p. 588.
Guggenheim, E.A. and J.C. Turgeon, Trans. Faraday Soc., Vol. 51, (1955), p.
747.
Kim, H. and W.J. Frederick, "Evaluation of Pitzer Ion Interaction Parameters
of Aqueous Mixed Electrolyte Solution at 25C, Part 2: Ternary Mixing
Parameters," J. Chem. Eng. Data, 33, (1988), pp. 278-283.
Pabalan, R.T. and K.S. Pitzer, "Thermodynamics of Concentrated Electrolyte
Mixtures and the Prediction of Mineral Solubilities to High Temperatures for
Mixtures in the system Na-K-Mg-Cl-SO4-OH-H2O," Geochimica Acta, 51,
(1987), pp. 2429-2443.
Peiper, J.C. and K.S. Pitzer, "Thermodynamics of Aqueous Carbonate
Solutions Including Mixtures of Sodium Carbonate, Bicarbonate, and
Chloride," J. Chem. Thermodynamics, Vol. 14, (1982), pp. 613-638.
Phutela, R.C. and K.S. Pitzer, "Thermodynamics of Aqueous Calcium
Chloride," J. Solution Chem., Vol. 12, No. 3, (1983), pp. 201-207.
Pitzer, K.S., "Thermodynamics of Electrolytes. I. Theoretical Basis and
General Equations, " J. Phys. Chem., Vol. 77, No. 2, (1973), pp. 268-277.
Pitzer, K.S., J. Solution Chem., Vol. 4, (1975), p. 249.
Pitzer, K.S., "Fluids, Both Ionic and Non-Ionic, over Wide Ranges of
Temperature and Composition," J. Chen. Thermodynamics, Vol. 21, (1989),
pp. 1-17. (Seventh Rossini lecture of the commission on Thermodynamics of
the IUPAC, Aug. 29, 1988, Prague, ex-Czechoslovakia).
Pitzer, K.S. and J.J. Kim, "Thermodynamics of Electrolytes IV; Activity and
Osmotic Coefficients for Mixed Electrolytes," J.Am. Chem. Soc., Vol. 96
(1974), p. 5701.
Pitzer, K.S. and G. Mayorga, "Thermodynamics of Electrolytes II; Activity and
Osmotic Coefficients for Strong Electrolytes with One or Both Ions Univalent,"
J. Phys. Chem., Vol. 77, No. 19, (1973), pp. 2300-2308.
Pitzer, K.S. and G. Mayorga, J. Solution Chem., Vol. 3, (1974), p. 539.
146
Pitzer, K.S., J.R. Peterson, and L.F. Silvester, "Thermodynamics of

Electrolytes. IX. Rare Earth Chlorides, Nitrates, and Perchlorates, "J. Solution
Chem., Vol. 7, No. 1, (1978), pp. 45-56.
Pitzer, K.S., R.N. Roy, and L.F. Silvester, "Thermodynamics of Electrolytes 7
Sulfuric Acid," J. Am. Chem. Soc., Vol. 99, No. 15, (1977), pp. 4930-4936.
Pitzer, K.S. and L.F. Silvester, J. Solution Chem., Vol. 5, (1976), p. 269.
Silvester, L.F. and K.S. Pitzer, "Thermodynamics of Electrolytes 8 HighTemperature Properties, Including Enthalpy and Heat Capacity, With
Application to Sodium Chloride," J. Phys. Chem., Vol. 81, No. 19, (1977), pp.
1822-1828.

This model represents activity coefficient as an empirical function of
composition and temperature. It is used frequently in metallurgical
applications where multiple liquid and solid solution phases can exist.
The equation is:
Where:
Ai
Bi
Ci
Di
Ei
For any component i, the value of the activity coefficient can be fixed:
i = fi
This model is not part of any property method. To use it:
1. On the Properties | Specifications sheet, specify an activity coefficient
model, such as NRTL.
2. Click the Properties | Property Methods folder.
3. In the Object Manager, click New.
4. In the Create New ID dialog box, enter a name for the new method.
5. In the Base Property Method field, select NRTL.
6. Click the Models tab.
7. Change the Model Name for GAMMA from GMRENON to GMPOLY.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default
MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
GMPLYP/1
ai1
GMPLYP/2
ai2
GMPLYP/3
ai3
147
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default
MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
GMPLYP/4
bi1
GMPLYP/5
bi2
GMPLYP/6
bi3
GMPLYP/7
ci1
GMPLYP/8
ci2
GMPLYP/9
ci3
GMPLYP/10
di1
GMPLYP/11
di2
GMPLYP/12
di3
GMPLYP/13
ei1
GMPLYP/14
ei2
GMPLYP/15
ei3
GMPLYO
fi
Note: If you specify GMPLYP on the Properties | Parameters | Pure

Component | T-Dependent sheet, you can only enter the first 12 elements.
If you want to specify values for elements 13 to 15, you should go to the
Flowsheeting Options | Add-Input | Add After sheet in Aspen Plus or the
Add-Input | Add-Input | Add After sheet in Aspen Properties, and enter
the values of all 15 elements as in the following example:
PROP-DATA GMPLYP-1
IN-UNITS SI
PROP-LIST GMPLYP
PVAL WATER 0.0 1.5
0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0
0.0 16.
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
&
&
&
&
Redlich-Kister
This model calculates activity coefficients. It is a polynomial in the difference
between mole fractions in the mixture. It can be used for liquid and solid
mixtures (mixed crystals).
The equation is:
Where:
148
nc
Number of components
A1,ij
aij / T + bij
A2,ij
cij / T + dij
A3,ij
eij / T + fij
A4,ij
gij / T + hij
A5,ij
mij / T + nij
An,ii
An,jj = 0.0
An,ji
An,ij(-1)(n-1)
An,kj
An,jk(-1)(n-1)
i = vi
Parameter Name/
Element
Symbol
Default
MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
GMRKTB/1
aij
GMRKTB/2
bij
GMRKTB/3
cij
GMRKTB/4
dij
GMRKTB/5
eij
GMRKTB/6
fij
GMRKTB/7
gij
GMRKTB/8
hij
GMRKTB/9
mij
GMRKTB/10
nij
GMRKTO
vi
The Scatchard-Hildebrand model calculates liquid activity coefficients. It is
used in the CHAO-SEA property method and the GRAYSON property method.
The equation for the Scatchard-Hildebrand model is:
Where:
Aij
Vm*,l
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TC
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
Tci
5.0
149
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
DELTA
103
105
SOLUPARAM
VLCVT1
Vi*,CVT
0.0005
1.0
MOLEVOLUME
GMSHVL
Vi*,l
0.01
1.0
MOLEVOLUME
GMSHXL
kij
-5
0.0
This model can be used to describe the excess properties of liquid and solid
solutions. It does not find much use in chemical engineering applications, but
is still widely used in metallurgical applications. Note that the binary
parameters for this model do not have physical significance.
The equation is:
Where kij is a binary parameter:
i = di
Parameter Name/ Symbol
Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
GMMRGB/1
aij
TEMPERATURE
GMMRGB/2
bij
GMMRGB/3
cij
GMMRGO
di
References
M. Margules, "ber die Zusammensetzung der gesttigten Dmpfe von
Mischungen," Sitzungsber. Akad. Wiss. Vienna, Vol. 104, (1895), p. 1293.
D.A. Gaskell, Introduction to Metallurgical Thermodyanics, 2nd ed., (New
York: Hemisphere Publishing Corp., 1981), p. 360.
R.C. Reid, J.M. Prausnitz, and B.E. Poling, The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 4th ed., (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987).
150
Symmetric and Unsymmetric Electrolyte

NRTL Activity Coefficient Model
The Symmetric Electrolyte NRTL activity coefficient model (GMENRTLS) uses a
symmetric reference state for ions as pure fused salts, rather than infinite
dilution in aqueous solution. This basis is easier to use for nonaqueous and
mixed-solvent systems, and eliminates the need to introduce water into
otherwise water-free systems. It also allows the model to reduce to the
standard NRTL model when there are no electrolytes in the system. The
ENRTL-SR property method is based on this model.
Chemical constants, enthalpy, and Gibbs free energy are calculated with
respect to the symmetric ionic reference state.
The Unsymmetric Electrolyte NRTL activity coefficient model (GMENRTLQ)
uses the same equations as GMENRTLS, but the unsymmetric reference state
for ions (infinite dilution in aqueous solution). The ENRTL-RK property method
is based on this model. Unlike the original Electrolyte NRTL activity coefficient
model, GMENRTLQ is also used to calculate enthalpy and Gibbs free energy
from thermodynamics based on the unsymmetric ionic reference state.
These models also handle zwitterions.
Parameters
Both symmetric and unsymmetric models share the same binary and pair
parameters. The adjustable model parameters are the symmetric non-random
factor parameters, , and the asymmetric binary interaction energy
parameters, . These parameters exist for molecule-molecule pairs (mm' =
m'm while mm' m'm), molecule-electrolyte pairs (m,ca = ca,m while m,ca
ca,m where ca represents an ion pair), and electrolyte-electrolyte pairs (ca,ca'
= ca',ca and ca,c'a = c'a,ca while ca,ca' ca',ca and ca,c'a c'a,ca)
The parameters for ion pairs are temperature-dependent:
151
where
The NRTL parameters are used for molecule-molecule parameters, with

temperature dependence:
The temperature dependency of the dielectric constant is given by:
Option codes can affect the performance of this model. See Option Codes for
Activity Coefficient Models for details.
The following table lists the parameters used by GMENRTLS and GMENRTLQ:
Parameter
Symbol
No. of
Default MDS Units
Name
Elements
CPDIEC
T
1
Ionic Born Radius Unary Parameters
298.15
TEMPERATURE
RADIUS
ri
1
Molecule-Molecule Binary Parameters
3x10-10
LENGTH
NRTL/1
ref
aij
aji
bij
TEMPERATURE
bji
TEMPERATURE
NRTL/3
cij=cji
.3
NRTL/4
dij=dji
TEMPERATURE
NRTL/5
eij
TEMPERATURE
eji
TEMPERATURE
fji
NRTL/2
NRTL/6
152
TEMPERATURE
fji
Electrolyte-Molecule Pair Parameters
TEMPERATURE
GMENCC
Cca,m
Cm,ca
Parameter
Symbol
No. of
Default MDS Units
Name
Elements
GMENCD
GMENCE
GMENCN
Dca,m
TEMPERATURE
Dm,ca
TEMPERATURE
Eca,m
Em,ca
ca,m = m,ca
.2
Electrolyte-Electrolyte Pair Parameters

GMENCC
GMENCD
GMENCE
GMENCN
Cca,c'a
Cc'a,ca
Cca,ca'
Cca',ca
Dca,c'a
TEMPERATURE
Dc'a,ca
TEMPERATURE
Dca,ca'
TEMPERATURE
Dca',ca
TEMPERATURE
Eca,c'a
Ec'a,ca
Eca,ca'
Eca',ca
ca,c'a = c'a,ca
ca,ca' = ca',ca
.2
.2
Zwitterions in Symmetric and Unsymmetric

Electrolyte NRTL
The Symmetric and Unsymmetric Electrolyte NRTL models support
zwitterions, compounds with both positive and negative charges but net
charge of zero. Zwitterions are defined as:
Components of type Conventional, similar to solvents
Parameter ZWITTER set to 1; all other components in the Aspen Physical

Property System default to zero for ZWITTER
Parameter PLXANT/1 less than -1.0E10 so that they are non-volatile.
Zwitterions are handled as follows:
A zwitterion interacts with other molecular species through NRTL

parameters only, excluding any interactions through Henry constants and
pair parameters.
The activity coefficient is calculated as a solvent.
The contribution from zwitterions to the solution enthalpy and Gibbs free
energy are calculated as solutes using the infinite dilution heat capacity
model CPAQ0, DGAQFM, and DHAQFM.
153
Working Equations for Symmetric and

The symmetric and unsymmetric electrolyte NRTL models have two
contributions, one from local interactions that exist at the immediate
neighbourhood of any species, and the other from the long-range ion-ion
interactions that exist beyond the immediate neighbourhood of an ionic
species. To account for the local interactions, the model uses the electrolyte
NRTL expression. To account for the long-range interactions, the model uses
the Pitzer-Debye-Hckel (PDH) formula (Pitzer, 1980, 1986). The following
equation is the basis of the electrolyte NRTL model for the excess Gibbs free
energy of electrolyte systems:
(1)
The excess Gibbs free energy Gmex is defined as:
(2)
where Gm is the Gibbs free energy of electrolyte systems and Gmid is the Gibbs
free energy of an ideal solution at the same conditions of temperature,
pressure, and composition.
The activity coefficient
i of component i can be derived from Eq. 1 as follows:

(3)
or
(4)
Each of these terms will be discussed in subsequent sections.
Reference States in Electrolyte Systems

The activity coefficient needs to be normalized by choosing a reference state
for any molecular and ionic component, respectively.
Reference state for molecular components

The reference state for a molecular component m is defined as follows:
(5)
This definition is the so-called standard state of pure liquids for molecular
components and it is also called the symmetric reference state for molecular
components.
154
Reference state for ionic components

The standard state of pure liquids is hypothetical for ionic components in
electrolyte systems. Instead, the symmetric reference state is defined as the
pure fused salt state of each electrolyte component in the system.
However, the conventional reference state for ionic components is the
infinite-dilution activity coefficients; it is also called the unsymmetric
reference state for ionic components.
GMENRTLS uses the symmetric reference state, while GMENRTLQ uses the
unsymmetric reference state.
Pure fused salt state of an electrolyte component

For an electrolyte component ca, the pure fused salt state can be defined as
follows:
(6)
(7)
Where is the mean ionic activity coefficient of the electrolyte component
and is related to the corresponding cationic and anionic activity coefficients
and a by this expression:
(8)
where c is the cationic stoichiometric coefficient and a is the anionic
stoichiometric coefficient, and =c+a (one mole of salt releases moles of
ions in solution). They are given by the chemical equation describing the
dissociation of the electrolyte:
(9)
with
(10)
Therefore Eq. 4 can be written in terms of charge numbers zc and za:
(11)
At the pure fused salt state, the total moles of ionic components (for one
mole of salt) are:
=c+a
(12)
therefore
(13)
155
(14)
(15)
The symmetric reference state defined by Eq. 6 is restricted to systems
containing a single electrolyte component. For multi-electrolyte systems, the
symmetric reference state can be generalized from Eq. 6 as follows:
(16)
where m applies to all molecular components in the system. The symmetric
reference state is a molecular-component-free medium.
Infinite-dilution aqueous solution

The condition of infinite-dilution aqueous solution for ionic components can be
written as follows:
xc=xa=0
(17)
This condition applies to all ionic components in the solution, and water must
be present in the solution for this reference state. In terms of the activity
coefficients for ionic components, the condition for the aqueous solution as
the unsymmetric reference state can be written as follows (where w=water):
(18)
This equation applies to all ionic components in the solution.
Local Interaction Term

In an electrolyte system, all component species can be categorized as one of
three types: molecular species (solvents), m; cationic species (cations), c;
and anionic species (anions), a. The model assumes that there are three
types of local composition interactions. The first type consists of a central
molecular species with other molecular species, cationic species, and anionic
species in the immediate neighbourhood. Here, local electroneutrality is
maintained. The other two types are based on the like-ion repulsion
assumption and have either a cationic or anionic species as the central
species. They also have an immediate neighbourhood consisting of molecular
species and oppositely charged ionic species. Accordingly, the excess Gibbs
energy from local interactions for an electrolyte system can be written as
follows:
(19)
or
156
(20)
with
(21)
(22)
where the first term is the contribution when a molecular species is at the
center, the second is the contribution when a cationic species is at the center,
and the third term is the contribution when an anionic species is at the
center. In Eq. 21, Ci=zi (charge number) for ionic species and Ci=1 for
molecular species. Finally, in Eqs. 19 and 20, G and are local binary
quantities related to each other by the NRTL non-random factor parameter :
(23)
The contribution to the activity coefficient of component i can be derived as
follows:
(24)
The results are:

(25)
(26)
157
(27)
Binary Parameters
The adjustable binary parameters for these models include moleculemolecule, molecule-electrolyte, and electrolyte-electrolyte binary parameters,
where electrolyte here means an ion-pair composed of a cationic species and
an anionic species. For each of these types, there are asymmetric binary
interaction energy parameters, , and symmetric non-random factor
parameters, (for calculating G). That is to say that the following are the
adjustable parameters:
(28)
However, as seen in the preceding equations, we need these parameters for

molecule-molecule, molecule-cation, molecule-anion, and cation-anion pairs.
The molecule-molecule parameters are given directly by the model's
adjustable binary parameters. The remaining parameters cm, am, mc, ma,
ca, ac, cm, am, mc, ma, ca, and ac, are calculated from these parameters.
The parameters for pairs involving cations and anions are calculated from
the adjustable binary parameters by applying a simple composition-average
mixing rule.
(29)
(30)
(31)
(32)
where Yc is a cationic charge composition fraction and Ya is an anionic charge
composition fraction, defined as follows:
(33)
158
(34)
G for these pairs is calculated the same way:

(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
And then the binary parameters
are calculated from G using Eq. 23:

(41)
Normalized contributions to activity coefficients

From Eq. 5, it is easy to show that the local interaction contributions to
activity coefficients for all molecular components are normalized; that is
(42)
for all molecular components m in the system.
For ionic components with symmetric reference state, apply Eq. 16 to find:
(43)
(44)
159
(45)
(46)
(47)
(48)
where xm0 applies to all molecular components in the solution.
For ionic components with infinite-dilution aqueous solution as reference
state, apply Eq. 18 to get:
(49)
(50)
where
and
are local interaction contributions to activity
coefficients at infinite dilution aqueous solution:
(51)
(52)
Long-Range Interaction Term

To account for the long-range ion-ion interactions, the Symmetric and
Unsymmetric Electrolyte NRTL models use the symmetric Pitzer-Debye-Hckel
(PDH) formula (Pitzer, 1986):
(53)
160
with
(54)
(55)
where n is the total mole number of the solution, A is the Debye-Hckel

parameter, Ix is the ionic strength, is the closest approach parameter, NA is
Avogadro's number, vs is the molar volume of the solvent, Qe is the electron
charge, s is the dielectric constant of the solvent, kB is the Boltzmann
constant, zi is the charge number of component i, and Ix0 represents Ix at the
reference state.
For the unsymmetric reference state, Ix0 = 0.
For the symmetric reference state, the Debye-Hckel theory is originally
based on a single electrolyte with water as the solvent. Therefore, we can
obtain Ix0 from Eqs. 13 and 14:
(56)
For multi-electrolyte systems with mixed-solvents, Ix0 can take this form:
(57)
(58)
(59)
so that
(60)
where xm0 applies to all molecular components in the solution. This
definition ensures that the excess Gibbs free energy from the long range
interactions will be zero at the symmetric reference state regardless of how
many electrolytes are present in the solution.
The contribution to the activity coefficient from component i can be derived
as:
(61)
161
For a solvent component, this is:

(62)
For a cation or anion component:

(63)
For the unsymmetric reference state:

(64)
And for the symmetric reference state:

(65)
(66)
(67)
or
(68)
(69)
The Debye-Hckel theory is original based on a single electrolyte with water

as the solvent. The molar volume vs and the dielectric constant s for the
single solvent need to be extended for mixed-solvents; a simple composition
average mixing rule is adequate to calculate them as follows:
162
(70)
(71)
where s is a solvent component in the mixture and Msis the solvent molecular
weight. Each sum is over all solvent components in the solution.
Born term correction

If the infinite dilution aqueous solution is chosen as the reference state, we
need to correct the the Debye-Hckel term for the change of the reference
state from the mixed-solvent composition to aqueous solution. The Born term
(Robinson and Stokes, 1970; Rashin and Honig, 1985) is used for this
purpose:
(72)
where NA is the Avogadro constant and R is the gas constant.

is the
Born term correction to the unsymmetric Pitzer-Debye-Hckel formula,
, and
of species i.
w is the dielectric constant of water, and ri is the Born radius
The Born contribution to the activity coefficient of component i can be derived

as follows:
(73)
For a cation or anion component, this is:

(74)
The correction to the activity coefficient for a solvent component is zero:

(75)
Henry Components in the Symmetric and

Unsymmetric Electrolyte NRTL Models
Light gases (Henry components) are usually supercritical at the temperature
and pressure of the system. In that case, pure component vapor pressure is
163
meaningless and therefore the pure liquid state at the temperature and
pressure of the system cannot serve as the reference state. The reference
state for a Henry component is redefined to be at infinite dilution (that is, at
xi0) and at the temperature and pressure of the system.
The liquid phase reference fugacity, fi*,l, becomes the Henrys constant for
Henry components in the solution, Hi, and the activity coefficient, i, is
converted to the infinite dilution reference state through the relationship:
(76)
where i is the infinite dilution activity coefficient of Henry component i

(xi0) in the solution.
By this definition i* approaches unity as xi approaches zero. The phase
equilibrium relationship for Henry components becomes:
(77)
The Henrys Law is available in all activity coefficient property methods. The
model calculates the Henrys constant for a dissolved gas component in all
solvent components in the mixture:
(78)
(79)
where His and is are the Henrys constant and the infinite dilution activity
coefficient of the dissolved gas component i in the solvent component s (xi0
and xs1), respectively.
Since ionic species exist only in the liquid phase and therefore do not
participate directly in vapor-liquid equilibria, the activities of Henry
components are mainly through the local interactions with solvents. We can
calculate the activity coefficients for Henry components as follows:
(80)
(81)
(82)
where xh0 applies to all Henry components in the solution.
164
Activity Coefficient Basis for Henry Components

Regardless of the reference state for ionic components, there are two
possibilities for the basis of unsymmetric activity coefficients h of Henry

components: aqueous and mixed-solvent. This can be specified on the Setup
| Simulation Options | Reactions sheet. Mixed-solvent is the default.
For mixed-solvent basis,
h is calculated as follows:
(83)
where xh0 applies to all Henry components and xi0 to all ionic
components in the solution.
For aqueous basis, the unsymmetric activity coefficients of Henry components
are calculated as follows:
(84)
Electrolyte Chemical Equilibria

In determining the composition of an electrolyte system, it is important to
know the equilibrium constants of the reactions taking place. An equilibrium
constant is expressed as the product of the activity of each species raised to
its stoichiometric coefficients. Two different scales are used in Aspen Plus: the
molality scale and the mole fraction scale but both are based on aqueous
electrolyte chemical equilibrium. For instance, the equilibrium constant for the
mole fraction scale in Aspen Plus is written in one of these:
(85)
(86)
Where:
K
Equilibrium constant
xw
Water mole fraction
Water activity coefficient
xs
Non-water solvent mole fraction
Non-water solvent activity coefficient
xi
Mole fraction of solute component (Henry or

ion)
i*
Unsymmetric activity coefficient of solute

component
Stoichiometric coefficient
The above equations are limited to aqueous electrolyte chemical equilibria

only. Therefore, the chemical constants in Aspen Plus databanks for
165
electrolyte systems with infinite dilution aqueous reference state cannot be

used for electrolyte systems with the symmetric reference state for ionic
components.
The chemical constants for electrolyte systems with the symmetric reference
state can be written in these forms:
(87)
(88)
where i indicates a molecular or ionic component and h represents a Henry

component. Eq. 83 or 84 is used for calculation of the unsymmetric activity
coefficients of Henry components. However, the calculation for the activity
coefficients of ionic components is carried out with the symmetric reference
state.
Other Thermophysical Properties

The activity coefficient model can be related to other properties through fundamental
thermodynamic equations. These properties (called excess liquid functions) are relative to the
ideal liquid mixture at the same condition:
Excess molar liquid Gibbs free energy
(89)
Excess molar liquid enthalpy
(90)
Excess molar liquid entropy

(91)
The excess liquid functions given by Equations 89-91 are calculated from the
same activity coefficient model. In practice, however, the activity coefficient i
is often derived first from the excess liquid Gibbs free energy of a mixture
from an activity coefficient model:
(92)
with
(93)
(94)
166
Where
is the liquid Gibbs free energy of mixing; it is defined as the
difference between the Gibbs free energy of the mixture and that of the pure
component and
is the ideal Gibbs free energy of mixing. Once the
excess liquid functions are known, the thermodynamic properties of liquid
mixtures can be computed as follows:
(95)
(96)
(97)
where Hil and Hiig are the enthalpy and ideal gas enthalpy of component i at
the system conditions. Similarly, Gil and Giig are the Gibbs free energy and
ideal gas Gibbs free energy of component i at the system conditions. In Aspen
Plus, both Hiig and Giig are computed by the expressions:
(98)
(99)
where
is the standard enthalpy of formation of ideal gas at

,
is the ideal gas heat capacity, and
is the
standard Gibbs free energy of formation of ideal gas at
However, the above equations are directly not applicable to mixtures

containing ionic components because the ideal gas model becomes invalid for
ionic components.
The formulation to calculate the enthalpy and Gibbs free energy for
electrolyte systems can be carried out as follows:
(100)
(101)
(102)
where indexes s, h, and ca are meant to represent the contributions from

solvents, Henry components and ionic components, respectively.
167
Solvents
The contribution from solvents can be written as follows:
(103)
(104)
(105)
(106)
(107)
(108)
where
is the liquid fugacity coefficient of pure solvent
component i, pisat is the vapor pressure of pure component at the system
temperature T, iv is the vapor fugacity coefficient of pure component at T
and pisat (normally calculated from an equation-of-state model), and
is the Poynting pressure correction from pisat to p,
and Vi is the liquid molar volume at T and p.
l
Henry components
The contribution from Henry components can be written as follows:
(109)
(110)
(111)
(112)
(113)
168
(114)
(115)
Ionic components
The contribution from ionic components can be written as follows:
(116)
(117)
(118)
(119)
(120)
(121)
where Hiref and Giref are the enthalpy and Gibbs free energy of ionic
component i at the system conditions with a specified reference state
(symmetric or unsymmetric).
The property calculations for solvents and Henry components are the same
when the reference state is changed. Only for ionic components do the
property methods need to be specified with a reference state. The methods
with the unsymmetric reference state are available already in Aspen Plus and
Aspen Properties. New methods are needed only for the symmetric reference
state. Overall, the calculated total enthalpy or Gibbs free energy for the same
electrolyte solution should be the same, regardless of the reference state
specified.
Enthalpy and Gibbs free energy of ionic components with the symmetric
reference state can be written as follows:
(122)
(123)
where
and
are enthalpy and Gibbs free energy of ionic component
i with the unsymmetric reference state, respectively, and available already in
169
Aspen Plus and Aspen Properties.

the symmetric reference state.
Hi and Gi are the new contributions from
The unsymmetric enthalpy for an ionic component

the infinite dilution aqueous phase heat capacity
is calculated from
as follows:
(124)
where Tref = 298.15K. By default,

is calculated from the aqueous
infinite dilution heat capacity polynomial. If the polynomial model parameters
are not available,
is calculated from the Criss-Cobble correlation.
The unsymmetric Gibbs free energy for an ionic component
is
calculated from the infinite dilution aqueous phase heat capacity

follows:
as
(125)
(126)
where the term RT ln (1000/Mw) is added because

are based on a molality scale, and
and
is based on a mole fraction scale.
Hi and Gi for the symmetric reference state

The reference state for ionic components in the symmetric electrolyte NRTL
model is the pure fused salts containing these ions, so the enthalpy or Gibbs
free energy of the ionic components at the symmetric reference state is the
enthalpy contributions or the Gibbs free energy contributions of these ions to
the system of the pure fused salts. The condition of the pure fused salts can
be defined as follows:
(127)
which applies to all molecular components in the solution.
Given that the calculated total enthalpy or total Gibbs free energy of an
electrolyte solution by any reference state should be the same, the
formulation of enthalpy or Gibbs free energy of the ionic components at the
symmetric reference state can be derived from the unsymmetric electrolyte
NRTL enthalpy or Gibbs free energy calculations at the condition that all
molecular components (solvents and Henry components) approach zero, i.e.
170
the pure fused salts. Applying Eq. 127, the system enthalpy and Gibbs free
energy with the unsymmetric reference state can be expressed as:
(128)
(129)
where
and
are the total enthalpy and total Gibbs
free energy of the solution calculated by the unsymmetric electrolyte NRTL
model at the limit of all molecular components approach zero, that is, the
pure fused salts state, and
and
are the
excess enthalpy and excess Gibbs free energy of ion i at the same limit
condition.
Applying Eq. 127, the system enthalpy and Gibbs free energy with the
symmetric reference state can be expressed as:
(130)
(131)
Comparing Eqs. 130 and 131 to Eqs. 128 and 129, we can get:
(132)
(133)
Therefore, the enthalpy and Gibbs free energy of ionic components with the
symmetric reference state can be written as:
(134)
(135)
171
References for Symmetric and Unsymmetric

Electrolyte NRTL
C.-C. Chen and L.B. Evans, "A Local Composition Model for the Excess Gibbs
Energy of Aqueous Electrolyte Systems," AIChE Journal, 1986, 32, 444.
Y. Song and C.-C. Chen, "Symmetric Nonrandom Two-Liquid Activity
Coefficient Model for Electrolytes" (to be published).
K.S. Pitzer, "Electrolytes. From Dilute Solutions to Fused Salts," J. Am. Chem.
Soc., 1980, 102, 2902-2906.
K.S. Pitzer and J.M. Simonson, "Thermodynamics of Multicomponent, Miscible,
Ionic Systems: Theory and Equations," J. Phys. Chem., 1986, 90, 3005-3009.
R.A. Robinson and R.H. Stokes, Electrolyte Solutions, Second Revised Edition.
Butterworths: London, 1970.
A.A. Rashin and B. Honig, "Reevaluation of the Born Model of Ion Hydration,"
J. Phys. Chem., 1985, 89 (26), pp 55885593.
UNIFAC Activity Coefficient Model

The UNIFAC model calculates liquid activity coefficients for the following
property methods: UNIFAC, UNIF-HOC, and UNIF-LL. Because the UNIFAC
model is a group-contribution model, it is predictive. All published group
parameters and group binary parameters are stored in the Aspen Physical
Property System.
The equation for the original UNIFAC liquid activity coefficient model is made
up of a combinatorial and residual term:
ln
ln
ic
ln
ic + ln ir
Where the molecular volume and surface fractions are:
and
Where nc is the number of components in the mixture. The coordination
number z is set to 10. The parameters ri and qi are calculated from the group
volume and area parameters:
and
Where ki is the number of groups of type k in molecule i, and ng is the
number of groups in the mixture.
The residual term is:
172
k is the activity coefficient of a group at mixture composition, and ki is the
activity coefficient of group k in a mixture of groups corresponding to pure i.

The parameters k and ki are defined by:
With:
And:
The parameter Xk is the group mole fraction of group k in the liquid:
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
m, ...)
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper Units
Limit
UFGRP
(k,k, m,
GMUFQ
Qk
GMUFR
Rk
GMUFB
bkn
TEMPERATURE
The parameter UFGRP stores the UNIFAC functional group number and
number of occurrences of each group. UFGRP is stored in the Aspen Physical
Property System pure component databank for most components. For
nondatabank components, enter UFGRP on the Properties Molecular Structure
Functional Group sheet. See Physical Property Data, Chapter 3, for a list of
the UNIFAC functional groups.
UNIFAC-PSRK
The PSRK property method uses GMUFPSRK, the UNIFAC-PSRK model, which
is a variation on the standard UNIFAC model. UNIFAC-PSRK has special
groups defined for the light gases CO2, H2, NH3, N2, O2, CO, H2S, and argon,
and the group binary interaction parameters are temperature-dependent,
173
using the values in parameter UNIFPS, instead of the constant value from
GMUFB used above, so that:
Where a, b, and c are the three elements of UNIFPS.
References
Aa. Fredenslund, J. Gmehling and P. Rasmussen, "Vapor-Liquid Equilibria
using UNIFAC," (Amsterdam: Elsevier, 1977).
Aa. Fredenslund, R.L. Jones and J.M. Prausnitz, AIChE J., Vol. 21, (1975), p.
1086.
H.K. Hansen, P. Rasmussen, Aa. Fredenslund, M. Schiller, and J. Gmehling,
"Vapor-Liquid Equilibria by UNIFAC Group Contribution. 5 Revision and
Extension", Ind. Eng. Chem. Res., Vol. 30, (1991), pp. 2352-2355.
UNIFAC (Dortmund Modified)

The UNIFAC modification by Gmehling and coworkers (Weidlich and
Gmehling, 1987; Gmehling et al., 1993), is slightly different in the
combinatorial part. It is otherwise unchanged compared to the original
UNIFAC:
With:
The temperature dependency of the interaction parameters is:
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
m, ...)
Default MDS Lower Upper

Limit Limit
Units
UFGRPD
(k,k, m,
GMUFDQ
Qk
GMUFDR
Rk
UNIFDM/1
amn,1
TEMPERATURE
UNIFDM/2
amn,2
TEMPERATURE
UNIFDM/3
amn,3
TEMPERATURE
The parameter UFGRPD stores the group number and the number of
occurrences of each group. UFGRPD is stored in the Aspen Physical Property
System pure component databank. For nondatabank components, enter
UFGRPD on the Properties Molecular Structure Functional Group sheet. See
Physical Property Data, Chapter 3, for a list of the Dortmund modified UNIFAC
functional groups.
174
References
U. Weidlich and J. Gmehling, "A Modified UNIFAC Model 1. Prediction of VLE,
hE and
," Ind. Eng. Chem. Res., Vol. 26, (1987), pp. 13721381.
J. Gmehling, J. Li, and M. Schiller, "A Modified UNIFAC Model. 2. Present

Parameter Matrix and Results for Different Thermodynamic Properties," Ind.
Eng. Chem. Res., Vol. 32, (1993), pp. 178193.
UNIFAC (Lyngby Modified)

The equations for the "temperature-dependent UNIFAC" (Larsen et al., 1987)
are similar to the original UNIFAC:
,
Volume fractions are modified:
With:
Where k and
defined as:
ki have the same meaning as in the original UNIFAC, but
With:
175
The temperature dependency of a is described by a function instead of a

constant:
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
m, ...)
Default MDS
Lower Upper Units

Limit Limit
UFGRPL
(k,k, m,
GMUFLQ
Qk
GMUFLR
Rk
UNIFLB/1
amn,1
TEMPERATURE
UNIFLB/2
amn,2
TEMPERATURE
UNIFLB/3
amn,3
TEMPERATURE
The parameter UFGRPL stores the modified UNIFAC functional group number
and the number of occurrences of each group. UFGRPL is stored in the Aspen
Physical Property System pure component databank. For nondatabank
components, enter UFGRP on the Properties | Molecular Structure |
Functional Group sheet. See Physical Property Data, Chapter 3, for a list of
the Larsen modified UNIFAC functional groups.
Reference: B. Larsen, P. Rasmussen, and Aa. Fredenslund, "A Modified
UNIFAC Group-Contribution Model for Prediction of Phase Equilibria and Heats
of Mixing," Ind. Eng. Chem. Res., Vol. 26, (1987), pp. 2274 2286.
UNIQUAC Activity Coefficient Model

The UNIQUAC model calculates liquid activity coefficients for these property
methods: UNIQUAC, UNIQ-2, UNIQ-HOC, UNIQ-NTH, and UNIQ-RK. It is
recommended for highly non-ideal chemical systems, and can be used for VLE
and LLE applications. This model can also be used in the advanced equations
of state mixing rules, such as Wong-Sandler and MHV2.
The equation for the UNIQUAC model is:
Where:
176
i'
li
t i'
ij
10
aij, bij, cij, and dij are unsymmetrical. That is, aij may not be equal to aji, etc.
Absolute temperature units are assumed for the binary parameters aij, bij, cij,
dij, and eij.
can be determined from VLE and/or LLE data regression. The Aspen Physical
Property System has a large number of built-in parameters for the UNIQUAC
model. The binary parameters have been regressed using VLE and LLE data
from the Dortmund Databank. The binary parameters for VLE applications
were regressed using the ideal gas, Redlich-Kwong, and Hayden-O'Connell
equations of state. See Physical Property Data, Chapter 1, for details.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
GMUQR
ri
GMUQQ
qi
GMUQQ1
qi'
UNIQ/1
aij
-50.0
50.0
UNIQ/2
bij
-15000.0
15000.0
TEMPERATURE
UNIQ/3
cij
TEMPERATURE
UNIQ/4
dij
TEMPERATURE
UNIQ/5
Tlower
0K
TEMPERATURE
UNIQ/6
Tupper
1000 K x
TEMPERATURE
UNIQ/7
eij
TEMPERATURE
Absolute temperature units are assumed for elements 2 through 4 and 7 of

UNIQ.
The UNIQ-2 property method uses data set 2 for UNIQ. All other UNIQUAC
References
D.S. Abrams and J.M. Prausnitz, "Statistical Thermodynamics of liquid
mixtures: A new expression for the Excess Gibbs Energy of Partly or
Completely Miscible Systems," AIChE J., Vol. 21, (1975), p. 116.
A. Bondi, "Physical Properties of Molecular Crystals, Liquids and Gases," (New
York: Wiley, 1960).
Simonetty, Yee and Tassios, "Prediction and Correlation of LLE," Ind. Eng.
Chem. Process Des. Dev., Vol. 21, (1982), p. 174.
177
Van Laar Activity Coefficient Model

The Van Laar model (Van Laar 1910) calculates liquid activity coefficients for
the property methods: VANLAAR, VANL-2, VANL-HOC, VANL-NTH, and VANLRK. It can be used for highly nonideal systems.
Where:
zi
Ai
Bi
Ci
Aij
Cij
Cij
Cji
Aii
Bii = Cii = 0
aij and bij are unsymmetrical. That is, aij may not be equal to aji, and bij may
not be equal to bji.
Parameters
Symbol DefaultMDS
Name/Element
Lower Limit Upper

Limit
Units
VANL/1
aij
-50.0
50.0
VANL/2
bij
-15000.0
15000.0
TEMPERATURE
VANL/3
cij
-50.0
50.0
VANL/4
dij
-15000.0
15000.0
TEMPERATURE
The VANL-2 property method uses data set 2 for VANL. All other Van Laar
References
J.J. Van Laar, "The Vapor Pressure of Binary Mixtures," Z. Phys. Chem., Vol.
72, (1910), p. 723.
Liquids, 4th ed. (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987).
178
Wagner Interaction Parameter

The Wagner Interaction Parameter model calculates activity coefficients. This
model is used for dilute solutions in metallurgical applications.
The relative activity coefficient with respect to the reference activity
coefficient of a solute i (in a mixture of solutes i, j, and l and solvent A) is:
Where:
The parameter
iref is the reference activity coefficient of solute i:
kij is a binary parameter:
i = gi
This model is recommended for dilute solutions.
Parameter Name/ Symbol Default MDS
Element
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
GMWIPR/1
ai
TEMPERATURE
GMWIPR/2
bi
GMWIPR/3
ci
GMWIPB/1
dij
TEMPERATURE
GMWIPB/2
eij
GMWIPB/3
fij
GMWIPO
gi
GMWIPS
GMWIPS is used to identify the solvent component. You must set GMWIPS to
1.0 for the solvent component. This model allows only one solvent.
References
A.D. Pelton and C. W. Bale, "A Modified Interaction Parameter Formalism for
Non-Dilute Solutions," Metallurgical Transactions A, Vol. 17A, (July 1986),
p. 1211.
Wilson Activity Coefficient Model

The Wilson model calculates liquid activity coefficients for the following
property methods: WILSON, WILS2, WILS-HOC, WILS-NTH, WILS-RK, WILS-
179
HF, WILS-LR, and WILS-GLR. It is recommended for highly nonideal systems,

especially alcohol-water systems. It can also be used in the advanced
equation-of-state mixing rules, such as Wong-Sandler and MHV2. This model
cannot be used for liquid-liquid equilibrium calculations.
The equation for the Wilson model is:
Where:
ln Aij
The extended form of ln Aij provides more flexibility in fitting phase

equilibrium and enthalpy data. aij, bij, cij, dij, and eij are unsymmetrical. That
is, aij may not be equal to aji, etc.
The binary parameters aij, bij, cij, dij, and eij must be determined from data
regression or VLE and/or heat-of-mixing data. The Aspen Physical Property
System has a large number of built-in binary parameters for the Wilson
model. The binary parameters have been regressed using VLE data from the
Dortmund Databank. The binary parameters were regressed using the ideal
gas, Redlich-Kwong, and Hayden-O'Connell equations of state. See Physical
Property Data, Chapter 1, for details.
Parameter
Symbol Default MDS
Name/Element
Lower Limit Upper

Limit
Units
WILSON/1
aij
-50.0
50.0
WILSON/2
bij
-15000.0
15000.0
TEMPERATURE
WILSON/3
cij
TEMPERATURE
WILSON/4
dij
TEMPERATURE
WILSON/5
Tlower
0K
TEMPERATURE
WILSON/6
Tupper
1000 K x
TEMPERATURE
WILSON/7
eij
TEMPERATURE
The WILS-2 property method uses data set 2 for WILSON. All other Wilson
In the original formulation of the Wilson model, aij = ln Vj/Vi, cij = dij = eij =
0, and
bij = -(ij - ii)/R, where Vj and Vi are pure component liquid molar volume at
25C.
If any of biA, ciA, and eiA are non-zero, absolute temperature units are
assumed for all coefficients. If biA, ciA, and eiA are all zero, the others are
interpreted in input units. The temperature limits are always interpreted in
input units.
180
References
G.M. Wilson, J. Am. Chem. Soc., Vol. 86, (1964), p. 127.
Wilson Model with Liquid Molar Volume

This Wilson model (used in the method WILS-VOL) calculates liquid activity
coefficients using the original formulation of Wilson (Wilson 1964) except that
liquid molar volume is calculated at system temperature, instead of at 25C.
It is recommended for highly nonideal systems, especially alcohol water
systems. It can be used in any activity coefficient property method or in the
advanced equation of state mixing rules, such as Wong Sandler and MHV2.
This model cannot be used for liquid liquid equilibrium calculations.
The equation for the Wilson model is:
Where:
ln Aij
Vj and Vi are pure component liquid molar volume at the system temperature
calculated using the General Pure Component Liquid Molar Volume model. The
extended form of ln Aij provides more flexibility in fitting phase equilibrium
and enthalpy data. aij, bij, cij, dij, and eij are unsymmetrical. That is, aij may
not be equal to aji, etc.
The binary parameters aij, bij, cij, dij, and eij must be determined from data
regression of VLE and/or heat-of-mixing data. There are no built in binary
parameters for this model.
Parameter
Symbol Default MDS
Name/Element
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
WSNVOL/1
aij
-50.0
50.0
WSNVOL/2
bij
-15000.0
15000.0
TEMPERATURE
WSNVOL/3
cij
TEMPERATURE
WSNVOL/4
dij
TEMPERATURE
WSNVOL/5
eij
TEMPERATURE
WSNVOL/6
Tlower
0K
TEMPERATURE
WSNVOL/7
Tupper
1000 K x
TEMPERATURE
Pure component parameters for the General Pure Component Liquid Molar
Volume model are also required.
In the original formulation of the Wilson model, aij = cij = dij = eij = 0 and
. Vj and Vi are calculated at 25C.
181
input units.
Reference: G.M. Wilson, J. Am. Chem. Soc., Vol. 86, (1964), p. 127.
Vapor Pressure and Liquid

Fugacity Models
The Aspen Physical Property System has the following built-in vapor pressure
and liquid fugacity models. This section describes the vapor pressure and
liquid fugacity models available.
Model
Type
General Pure Component Liquid Vapor

Pressure
Vapor pressure
API Sour
Vapor pressure
Braun K-10
Vapor pressure
Chao-Seader
Fugacity
Grayson-Streed
Fugacity
Kent-Eisenberg
Fugacity
Maxwell-Bonnell
Vapor pressure
Solid Antoine
Vapor pressure
General Pure Component Liquid Vapor

Pressure
The Aspen Physical Property System has several submodels for calculating
vapor pressure of a liquid. It uses parameter THRSWT/3 to determine which
submodel is used. See Pure Component Temperature-Dependent Properties
for details.
182
If THRSWT/3
is
Then this equation is And this parameter is used

used
Extended Antoine
PLXANT
200-211
Barin
CPLXP1, CPLXP2, CPIXP1, CPIXP2,

and CPIXP3
301
Wagner
WAGNER
302
PPDS Modified Wagner
WAGNER
400
PML
LNVPEQ and one of LNVP1, LOGVP1,

LNPR1, LOGPR1, LNPR2, LOGPR2
401
IK-CAPE
PLPO
501
NIST TDE Polynomial
PLTDEPOL
502
NIST Wagner 25
WAGNER25
Extended Antoine Equation

Parameters for many components are available for the extended Antoine
equation from the Aspen Physical Property System pure component databank.
This equation can be used whenever the parameter PLXANT is available.
The equation for the extended Antoine vapor pressure model is:
Extrapolation of ln pi*,l versus 1/T occurs outside of temperature bounds.

Parameter
Symbol
Name/ Element
Default MDS
Lower Upper
Limit
Limit
Units
PLXANT/1
C1i
PRESSURE,
TEMPERATURE
PLXANT/2
C2i
TEMPERATURE
PLXANT/3, . . . , 7 C3i, ..., C7i 0
TEMPERATURE
PLXANT/8
C8i
TEMPERATURE
PLXANT/9
C9i
1000
TEMPERATURE
If C5i, C6i, or C7i is non-zero, absolute temperature units are assumed for all
coefficients C1i through C7i. The temperature limits are always in user input
units.
Barin
See Barin Equations for Gibbs Energy, Enthalpy, Entropy, and Heat Capacity
for details about this submodel.
Wagner Vapor Pressure Equation

The Wagner vapor pressure equation is the best equation for correlation. The
equation can be used if the parameter WAGNER is available:
Where:
Tri = T / Tci
pri*,l = pi*,l / pci
Linear extrapolation of ln pi*,l versus T occurs outside of temperature bounds.
temperature units.
PPDS Modified Wagner Vapor Pressure Equation

The PPDS equation also uses the same parameter WAGNER as the standard
Wagner equation:
183
Where:
Tri = T / Tci
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
WAGNER/1
C1i
WAGNER/2
C2i
WAGNER/3
C3i
WAGNER/4
C4i
WAGNER/5
C5i
TEMPERATURE
WAGNER/6
C6i
1000
TEMPERATURE
TC
Tci
TEMPERATURE
PC
pci
PRESSURE
NIST Wagner 25 Liquid Vapor Pressure Equation

This equation is the same as the PPDS Modified Wagner equation above, but
it uses parameter WAGNER25 instead of WAGNER, and it uses critical
properties from this parameter set also.
Where:
Tri = T / Tci
184
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
WAGNER25/1
C1i
WAGNER25/2
C2i
WAGNER25/3
C3i
WAGNER25/4
C4i
WAGNER25/5
ln pci
WAGNER25/6
Tci
WAGNER25/7
Tlower
WAGNER25/8
Tupper
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
1000
TEMPERATURE
IK-CAPE Vapor Pressure Equation

The IK-CAPE model is a polynomial equation. If the parameter PLPO is
available, the Aspen Physical Property System can use the IK-CAPE vapor
pressure equation:

Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
PLPO/1
C1i
PLPO/2, ..., 10
C2i , ..., C10i
PLPO/11
PLPO/12
Default MDS
Lower Upper
Limit Limit
Units
PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
C11i
TEMPERATURE
C12i
1000
TEMPERATURE
PML Vapor Pressure Equations

The PML vapor pressure equations are modified versions of the Antoine and
Wagner equations. Each equation comes in two alternate forms, identical
except for the use of natural or base-10 logarithms. Parameter LNVPEQ/1
specifies the number of the equation used. Each equation uses a separate
parameter: LNVP1 for equation 1, LOGVP1 for 2, LNPR1 for 3, LOGPR1 for 4,
LNPR2 for 5, and LOGPR2 for 6.
Equation 1 (natural logarithm) and 2 (base 10 logarithm):
Where:
Tri = T / Tci
LNVPEQ/2 and LNVPEQ/3 are the lower and upper temperature limits,
respectively.
In equations 1-4, if elements 4, 7, or 8 are non-zero, absolute temperature
units are assumed for all elements.
185
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
LNVP1/1, ...,8
C1i, ..., C8i
PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
LOGVP1/1, ..., 8
C1i, ..., C8i
PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
LNPR1/1, ..., 8
C1i, ..., C8i
PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
LOGPR1/1, ..., 8
C1i, ..., C8i
PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE
LNPR2/1,2
C1i, C2i
LOGPR2/1,2
C1i, C2i
LNVPEQ/1
(equation
number)
LNVPEQ/2
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
LNVPEQ/3
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
TC
Tci
TEMPERATURE
PC
pci
PRESSURE
NIST TDE Polynomial for Liquid Vapor Pressure

This equation can be used for calculating vapor pressure when parameter
PLTDEPOL is available.

If elements 2, 3, 6, or 8 are non-zero, absolute temperature units are
assumed for all elements.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
DefaultMDS
Lower Upper
Limit Limit
Units
PLTDEPOL/1
C1i
PLTDEPOL/2
C2i
PLTDEPOL/3
C3i
PLTDEPOL/4, ..., 8 C4i , ..., C8i
TEMPERATURE
PLTDEPOL/9
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
PLTDEPOL/10
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
X
TEMPERATURE
References
Reid, Prausnitz, and Poling, The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th ed.,
(New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987).
186
Harlacher and Braun, "A Four-Parameter Extension of the Theorem of

Corresponding States," Ind. Eng. Chem. Process Des. Dev., Vol. 9, (1970), p.
479.
W. Wagner, Cryogenics, Vol. 13, (1973), pp. 470-482.
D. Ambrose, M. B. Ewing, N. B. Ghiassee, and J. C. Sanchez Ochoa "The
ebulliometric method of vapor-pressure measurement: vapor pressures of
benzene, hexafluorobenzene, and naphthalene," J. Chem. Thermodyn. 22
(1990), p. 589.
API Sour Model

The API Sour model is based on the API sour water model for correlating the
ammonia, carbon dioxide, and hydrogen sulfide volatilities from aqueous sour
water system. The model assumes aqueous phase chemical equilibrium
reactions involving CO2, H2S, and NH3. The model is not usable with chemistry
in the true component approach. Use the apparent component approach with
this model.
The model is applicable from 20 C to 140 C. The authors developed the model
using available phase equilibrium data and reported average errors between
the model and measured partial pressure data as follows
Compound
Average Error, %
Up to 60 C
Above 60 C
Ammonia
10
36
Carbon dioxide
11
24
Hydrogen sulfide
12
29
Detail of the model is described in the reference below and is too involved to
be reproduced here.
Reference
New Correlation of NH3, CO2, and H2S Volatility Data from Aqueous Sour
Water Systems, API Publication 955, March 1978 (American Petroleum
Institute).
Braun K-10 Model

The BK10 model uses the Braun K-10 K-value correlations, which were
developed from the K10 charts (K-values at 10 psia) for both real and pseudo
components. The form of the equation used is an extended Antoine vapor
pressure equation with coefficients specific to real components and pseudo
component boiling ranges.
This method is strictly applicable to heavy hydrocarbons at low pressures.
However, our model includes coefficients for a large number of hydrocarbons
and light gases. For pseudocomponents the model covers boiling ranges 450
700 K (350 800F). Heavier fractions can also be handled using the
methods developed by AspenTech.
187
References
B.C. Cajander, H.G. Hipkin, and J.M. Lenoir, "Prediction of Equilibrium Ratios
from Nomograms of Improved Accuracy," Journal of Chemical Engineering
Data, vol. 5, No. 3, July 1960, p. 251-259.
J.M. Lenoir, "Predict K Values at Low Temperatures, part 1," Hydrocarbon
Processing, p. 167, September 1969.
J.M. Lenoir, "Predict K Values at Low Temperatures, part 2," Hydrocarbon
Processing, p. 121, October 1969.
Chao-Seader Pure Component Liquid

Fugacity Model
The Chao-Seader model calculates pure component fugacity coefficient, for
liquids. It is used in the CHAO-SEA property method. This is an empirical
model with the Curl-Pitzer form. The general form of the model is:
Where:
=
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower Limit Upper

Limit
Units
TC
Tci
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PC
pci
105
108
PRESSURE
OMEGA
-0.5
2.0
References
K.C. Chao and J.D. Seader, "A General Correlation of Vapor-Liquid Equilibria
in Hydrocarbon Mixtures," AIChE J., Vol. 7, (1961), p. 598.
Grayson-Streed Pure Component Liquid

Fugacity Model
The Grayson-Streed model calculates pure component fugacity coefficients for
liquids, and is used in the GRAYSON/GRAYSON2 property methods. It is an
empirical model with the Curl-Pitzer form. The general form of the model is:
Where:
188
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower Limit Upper

Limit
Units
TC
Tci
5.0
TEMPERATURE
2000.0
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower Limit Upper

Limit
Units
PC
pci
105
108
PRESSURE
OMEGA
-0.5
2.0
References
H.G. Grayson and C.W. Streed, Paper 20-PO7, Sixth World Petroleum
Conference, Frankfurt, June 1963.
Kent-Eisenberg Liquid Fugacity Model

The Kent-Eisenberg model calculates liquid mixture component fugacity
coefficients and liquid enthalpy for the AMINES property method.
The chemical equilibria in H2S + CO2 + amine systems are described using
these chemical reactions:
Where:
R'
Alcohol substituted alkyl groups
The equilibrium constants are given by:
The chemical equilibrium equations are solved simultaneously with the

balance equations. This obtains the mole fractions of free H2S and CO2 in
solution. The equilibrium partial pressures of H2S and CO2 are related to the
respective free concentrations by Henry's constants:
189
The apparent fugacities and partial molar enthalpies, Gibbs energies and
entropies of H2S and CO2 are calculated by standard thermodynamic
relationships. The chemical reactions are always considered.
The values of the coefficients for the seven equilibrium constants (A1i, ... A5i)
and for the two Henry's constants B1i and B2i are built into the Aspen Physical
Property System. The coefficients for the equilibrium constants were
determined by regression. All available data for the four amines were used:
monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, disopropanolamine and diglycolamine.
You are not required to enter any parameters for this model.
References
R.L. Kent and B. Eisenberg, Hydrocarbon Processing, (February 1976),
pp. 87-92.
Maxwell-Bonnell Vapor Pressure Model

The Maxwell-Bonnell model calculates vapor pressure using the MaxwellBonnell vapor pressure correlation for all hydrocarbon pseudo-components as
a function of temperature. This is an empirical correlation based on API
procedure 5A1.15, 5A1.13. This model is used in property method MXBONNEL
for calculating vapor pressure and liquid fugacity coefficients (K-values).
References
API procedure 5A1.15 and 5A1.13.
Solid Antoine Vapor Pressure Model

The vapor pressure of a solid can be calculated using the Antoine equation.
Parameters for some components are available for the extended Antoine
equation from the Aspen Physical Property System pure component databank.
This equation can be used whenever the parameter PSANT is available.
The equation for the solid Antoine vapor pressure model is:
Extrapolation of ln pi*,s versus 1/T occurs outside of temperature bounds.
190
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower Limit Upper

Limit
Units
PSANT/1
C1i
PRESSURE,
TEMPERATURE
PSANT/2
C2i
TEMPERATURE
PSANT/3
C3i
TEMPERATURE
PSANT/4
C4i
TEMPERATURE
PSANT/5
C5i
1000
TEMPERATURE
General Pure Component Heat

of Vaporization
pure component heat of vaporization. It uses parameter THRSWT/4 to
determine which submodel is used. See Pure Component TemperatureDependent Properties for details.
If THRSWT/4
is
Then this equation is used And this parameter is

used
Watson
DHVLWT
106
DIPPR
DHVLDP
301
PPDS
DHVLDS
401
IK-CAPE
DHVLPO
505
NIST TDE Watson equation
DHVLTDEW
DIPPR Heat of Vaporization Equation

The DIPPR equation is used to calculate heat of vaporization when THRSWT/4
is set to 106. (Other DIPPR equations may sometimes be used. See Pure
Component Temperature-Dependent Properties for details.)
The equation for the DIPPR heat of vaporization model is:
Where:
Tri = T / Tci
temperature units.
Linear extrapolation of vapHi* versus T occurs outside of temperature bounds,
using the slope at the temperature bound, except that vapHi* is zero for
.
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
DHVLDP/1
MOLE-ENTHALPY
DHVLDP/2, ..., 5 C2i, ..., C5i 0
C1i
DHVLDP/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
DHVLDP/7
C7i
1000
TEMPERATURE
TC
Tci
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
Watson Heat of Vaporization Equation

The Watson equation is used to calculate heat of vaporization when
THRSWT/4 is set to 0. See Pure Component Temperature-Dependent
Properties for details.
191
The equation for the Watson model is:
Where:
vapHi*(T1)
= Heat of vaporization at temperature T1
Linear extrapolation of vapHi* versus T occurs below the minimum

temperature bound, using the slope at the temperature bound.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TC
Tci
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
5.0
4
DHVLWT/1
vapHi*(T1)
5x10
DHVLWT/2
T1
4.0
3500.0
TEMPERATURE
DHVLWT/3
ai
0.38
-2.0
2.0
DHVLWT/4
bi
-2.0
2.0
DHVLWT/5
Tmin
0.0
1500.0
TEMPERATURE
5x10
MOLE-ENTHALPY
PPDS Heat of Vaporization Equation

The PPDS equation is used to calculate heat of vaporization when THRSWT/4
is set to 301. See Pure Component Temperature-Dependent Properties for
details.
The equation for the PPDS model is:
where R is the gas constant.

using the slope at the temperature bound.
192
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TC
Tci
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
DHVLDS/1
C1i
DHVLDS/2
C2i
DHVLDS/3
C3i
DHVLDS/4
C4i
DHVLDS/5
C5i
DHVLDS/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
DHVLDS/7
C7i
1000
TEMPERATURE
IK-CAPE Heat of Vaporization Equation

The IK-CAPE equation is used to calculate heat of vaporization when
The equation for the IK-CAPE model is:

using the slope at the temperature bound
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
DHVLPO/1
MOLEENTHALPY
DHVLPO/2, ..., 10C2i, ..., C10i
MOLEENTHALPY
TEMPERATURE
DHVLPO/11
C11i
TEMPERATURE
DHVLPO/12
C12i
1000
TEMPERATURE
C1i
NIST TDE Watson Heat of Vaporization

Equation
The NIST TDE Watson equation is used to calculate heat of vaporization when
The equation is:

using the slope at the temperature bound
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
DHVLTDEW/1
DHVLTDEW/2, 3, C2i, C3i, C4i

4
C1i
DHVLTDEW/5
Tci
TEMPERATURE
DHVLTDEW/6
nTerms
DHVLTDEW/7
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
DHVLTDEW/8
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
193
Clausius-Clapeyron Equation
The Aspen Physical Property System can calculate heat of vaporization using
the Clausius Clapeyron equation:
Where:
=
Slope of the vapor pressure curve calculated from the Extended

Antoine equation
Vi*,v
Vapor molar volume calculated from the Redlich Kwong

equation of state
Vi*,l
Liquid molar volume calculated from the Rackett equation
For parameter requirements, see General Pure Component Liquid Vapor

Pressure, the General Pure Component Liquid Molar Volume model, and
Redlich Kwong.
Molar Volume and Density

Models
The Aspen Physical Property System has the following built-in molar volume
and density models available. This section describes the molar volume and
density models.
Model
Type
API Liquid Volume
Liquid volume
Brelvi-O'Connell
Partial molar liquid

volume of gases
Clarke Aqueous Electrolyte Volume
Liquid volume
Liquid volume
Debye-Hckel Volume
Electrolyte liquid volume
Liquid Constant Molar Volume Model
Liquid volume
General Pure Component Liquid Molar

Volume
Liquid volume/liquid
density
Rackett/Campbell-Thodos Mixture Liquid

Volume
Liquid volume
Modified Rackett
Liquid volume
General Pure Component Solid Molar Volume Solid volume

Liquid Volume Quadratic Mixing Rule
Liquid volume
API Liquid Molar Volume

This model calculates liquid molar volume for a mixture, using the API
procedure and the Rackett model. Ideal mixing is assumed:
194
Where:
xp
= Mole fraction of pseudocomponents
xr
= Mole fraction of real components
For pseudocomponents, the API procedure is used:
Where:
fcn
= A correlation based on API procedure 6A3.5 (API Technical Data

Book, Petroleum Refining, 4th edition)
At high density, the Ritter equation is used (adapted from Ritter, Lenoir, and
Schweppe, Petrol. Refiner 37 [11] 225 (1958)):
Where SG is the specific gravity, Tb is the mean average boiling point in

Rankine, T is the temperature of the system in Rankine, and the mass volume
is produced in units of cubic feet per pound-mass.
This procedure is valid over the following conditions:
UOPK: 10.5 - 12.5
API: 0 - 95
Mean Average Boiling Point: 0 - 1100 F
Temperature: 0 - 1000 F
Calculated density: 0.4 - 1.05 g/cc
The effect of pressure is automatically accounted for using procedure 6A3.10.

This procedure has the following validity range:
Density at low pressure: 0.7 - 1.0 g/cc
Pressure: 0 - 100,000 psig
For real components, the mixture Rackett model is used:

temperature units.
See the Rackett model for descriptions.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TB
Tb
4.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
API
API
-60.0
500.0
TC
Tc
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
195
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
PC
pc
RKTZRA
RA
105
108
PRESSURE
ZC
0.1
0.5
There are two versions of this model: VL2API and VL2API5. Model VL2API is
used in route VLMX20, while model VL2API5 is used in route VLMX24.
The main difference between the VL2API and VL2API5 models is as follows:
The VL2API model calculates the liquid density for each pseudocomponent
using the API procedure 6A3.5 (or Ritter equation), then computes the
density of the pseudocomponent mixture as a mole-fraction-weighted
average.
The VL2API5 model calculates the liquid density of the mixture of the
pseudocomponents as a whole. It first computes the specific gravity and
mean average boiling point of the pseudocomponent mixture, then uses the
API procedure 6A3.5 (or Ritter equation) to compute the mixture liquid
density.
Both models use the same procedure 6A3.10 for pressure correction.
Experience shows that VL2API5 is less sensitive to how the
pseudocomponents are generated from the same assay (number of cut
points, etc.).
Brelvi-O'Connell
The Brelvi-O'Connell model calculates partial molar volume of a supercritical
component i at infinite dilution in pure solvent A. Partial molar volume at
infinite dilution is required to compute the effect of pressure on Henry's
constant. (See Henry's Constant.)
The general form of the Brelvi-O'Connell model is:
Where:
i
= Solute or dissolved-gas component
= Solvent component
The liquid molar volume of solvent is obtained from the Rackett model:

temperature units.
196
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TC
TcA
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PC
pcA
10
RKTZRA
ZARA
ZC
0.1
10
1.0
PRESSURE
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
VLBROC/1
ViBO
VC
-1.0
1.0
MOLE-VOLUME
VLBROC/2
-0.1
0.1
TEMPERATURE
References
S.W. Brelvi and J.P. O'Connell, AIChE J., Vol. 18, (1972), p. 1239.
S.W. Brelvi and J.P. O'Connell, AIChE J., Vol. 21, (1975), p. 157.
Clarke Aqueous Electrolyte Volume

The Clarke model calculates liquid molar volume for electrolytes solutions.
The model is applicable to mixed solvents and is based on:
Molar volume of molecular solvents (equation 2)
The relationship between the partial molar volume of an electrolyte and its
mole fraction in the solvent (equation 4)
All quantities are expressed in terms of apparent components.

If option code 1 is set to 1, the liquid volume quadratic mixing rule is used
instead. The default option uses this equation to calculate the liquid molar
volume for electrolyte solutions:
(1)
Where:
Vm l
Liquid molar volume for electrolyte solutions.
Vsl
Liquid molar volume for solvent mixtures.
Vel
Liquid molar volume for electrolytes.
Apparent Component Approach

For molecular solvents, the liquid molar volume is calculated by:
(2)
Where:
xw
Vw*
Molar volume of water from the steam table.
xnws
Sum of the mole fractions of all non-water

solvents.
Vnwsl
Liquid molar volume for the mixture of all nonwater solvents. It is calculated using the
Rackett equation.
For electrolytes:
197
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Where:
xca
Apparent mole fraction of electrolyte ca
Vca
Liquid molar volume for electrolyte ca
The mole fractions xca are reconstituted arbitrarily from the true ionic
concentrations, even if you use the apparent component approach. This
technique is explained in Electrolyte Calculation in Physical Property Methods.
The result is that electrolytes are generated from all possible combinations of
ions in solution. The following equation is consistently applied to determine
the amounts of each possible apparent electrolyte nca:
(7)
Where:
nca
Number of moles of apparent electrolyte ca
zc
Charge of c
zfactor
zc if c and a have the same number of

charges; otherwise 1.
nc
Number of moles of cation c
na
Number of moles of anion a
For example: given an aqueous solution of Ca2+, Na+, SO42-, Cl- four
electrolytes are found: CaCl2, Na2SO4, CaSO4, and NaCl. The Clarke
parameters of all four electrolytes are used. You can rely on the default,
which calculates the Clarke parameters from ionic parameters. Otherwise, you
must enter parameters for any electrolytes that may not exist in the
components list. If you do not want to use the default, the first step in using
the Clarke model is to add any needed components for electrolytes not in the
components list.
True Component Approach

The true molar volume is obtained from the apparent molar volume:
198
(8)
Where:
Vml,t
Liquid volume per number of true species
Vml,a
Liquid volume per number of apparent species, Vml

of equation 1
na
Number of apparent species
Number of true species
The apparent molar volume is calculated as explained in the preceding

subsection.
Temperature Dependence
The temperature dependence of the molar volume of the solution is
approximately equal to the temperature dependence of the molar volume of
the solvent mixture:
(9)
Where Vml(298.15K) is calculated from equation 1.

Parameter
Name/Element
Applicable
Components
VLCLK/1
Cation-Anion
VLCLK/2
Cation-Anion
Symbol
Aca
Default
Units
MOLE-VOLUME
0.020
MOLE-VOLUME
If VLCLK/1 is missing, it is calculated based on VLBROC and CHARGE as

follows:
(10)
If VLBROC/1 is missing, the default value of -0.0012 is used. See the BrelviO'Connell model for VLBROC and also Rackett/Campbell-Thodos Mixture
Liquid Volume for additional parameters used in the Rackett equation.
Reference
C.C. Chen, private communication.

The equation for the COSTALD liquid volume model is:
199
Where:
VmR,0 and VmR, are functions or Tr for

For
, there is a linear interpolation between the liquid density at
Tr = 0.95 and the vapor density at Tr = 1.05. This model can be used to
calculate saturated and compressed liquid molar volume. The compressed
liquid molar volume is calculated using the Tait equation:
Where B and C are functions of T,

at T.
, Tc, Pc and Psat is the saturated pressure

temperature units.
Mixing Rules:
Where:
To improve results, the Aspen Physical Property System uses a special

correlation for water when this model is used. Changing the VSTCTD and
OMGCTD parameters for water will not affect the results of the special
correlation.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TC
Tci
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
VSTCTD
Vr*,CTD
VC
0.001
3.5
MOLE-VOLUME
OMGCTD
OMEGA X
-0.5
2.0
References
R.W. Hankinson and G.H. Thomson, AIChE J., Vol. 25, (1979), p. 653.
G.H. Thomson, K.R. Brobst, and R.W. Hankinson, AIChE J., Vol. 28, (1982),
p. 4, p. 671.
200
Debye-Hckel Volume
The Debye-Hckel model calculates liquid molar volume for aqueous
electrolyte solutions.
The equation for the Debye-Hckel volume model is:
Where:
Vk is the molar volume for water and is calculated from the ASME steam
table.
Vk is calculated from the Debye-Hckel limiting law for ionic species. It is
assumed to be the infinite dilution partial volume for molecular solutes.
Where:
Partial molar ionic volume at infinite dilution
zk
Charge number of ion k
Av
Debye-Hckel constant for volume
1.2
Vk
the ionic strength, with

mk
Molarity of ion k
Av is computed as follows:
Where:
A
Debye-Hckel constant for the osmotic

coefficients (Pitzer, 1979)
Density of water (kg / m3)
Dielectric constant of water (Fm-1), a function

of pressure and temperature (Bradley and
Pitzer, 1979)
Parameter Name
Applicable
Components
VLBROC
Ions, molecular Solutes Vk
Symbol
Default
Units
MOLE-VOLUME
201
References
D. J. Bradley, K. S. Pitzer, "Thermodynamics of Electrolytes," J. Phys. Chem.,
83 (12), 1599 (1979).
H.C. Helgeson and D.H. Kirkham, "Theoretical prediction of the
thermodynamic behavior of aqueous electrolytes at high pressure and
temperature. I. Thermodynamic/electrostatic properties of the solvent", Am.
J. Sci., 274, 1089 (1974).
K.S. Pitzer, "Theory: Ion Interaction Approach," Activity Coefficients in
Electrolyte Solutions, Pytkowicz, R. ed., Vol. I, (CRC Press Inc., Boca Raton,
Florida, 1979).
Liquid Constant Molar Volume Model

This model, VL0CONS, uses a constant value entered by the user as the pure
component liquid molar volume. It is not a function of temperature or
pressure. This is used with the solids handling property method for modeling
nonconventional solids.
Parameter Name
Default
MDS
Units
VLCONS
MOLE-VOLUME
General Pure Component Liquid Molar

Volume
liquid molar volume. It uses parameter THRSWT/2 to determine which
for details.
If THRSWT/2 is This equation is used
And this parameter is used
Rackett
RKTZRA
100-116
DIPPR
DNLDIP
301
PPDS
DNLPDS
401
IK-CAPE
VLPO
503
NIST ThermoML
Polynomial
DNLTMLPO
504
NIST TDE expansion
DNLEXSAT
514
NIST TDE Rackett
DNLRACK
515
NIST COSTALD
DNLCOSTD
For liquid molar volume of mixtures, the Rackett mixture equation is always
used by default. This is not necessarily consistent with the pure component
molar volume or density. If you need consistency, select route VLMX26 on the
Properties | Property Methods form. This route calculates mixture molar
volume from the mole-fraction average of pure component molar volumes.
Many of these equations calculate density first, and return calculate liquid
molar volume based on that density:
202
DIPPR
DIPPR equation 105 is the default DIPPR equation for most substances:
This equation is similar to the Rackett equation.

DIPPR equation 116 is the default equation for water.
= 1 - T / Tc
Other DIPPR equations, such as equation 100, may be used for some
substances. Check the value of THRSWT/2 to determine the equation used.
See Pure Component Temperature-Dependent Properties for details about
DIPPR equations.
In either case, linear extrapolation of
temperature bounds.
i*,l versus T occurs outside of
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower Upper
Limit Limit
Units
DNLDIP/1
C1i
MOLE-DENSITY
DNLDIP/2
C2i
DNLDIP/3
C3i
Tci
TEMPERATURE
DNLDIP/4
C4i
DNLDIP/5
C5i
DNLDIP/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
DNLDIP/7
C7i
1000
TEMPERATURE
For equation 116, the units are MOLE-DENSITY for parameters DNLDIP/1
through DNLDIP/5 and the default for DNLDIP/3 is 0. For equation 105,
DNLDIP/5 is not used, and absolute temperature units are assumed for
DNLDIP/3.
PPDS
The PPDS equation is:
Linear extrapolation of
i*,l versus T occurs outside of temperature bounds.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
DefaultMDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MW
Mi
5000.0
1.0
203
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
DefaultMDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
VC
Vci
0.001
3.5
MOLE-VOLUME
TC
Tci
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
DNLPDS/1
C1i
MASS-DENSITY
DNLPDS/2
C2i
MASS-DENSITY
DNLPDS/3
C3i
MASS-DENSITY
DNLPDS/4
C4i
MASS-DENSITY
DNLPDS/5
C5i
TEMPERATURE
DNLPDS/6
C6i
1000
TEMPERATURE
IK-CAPE
The IK-CAPE equation is:
Linear extrapolation of Vi*,l versus T occurs outside of temperature bounds.

Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
VLPO/1
C1i
MOLEVOLUME
VLPO/2, ..., 10
C2i, ..., C10i
MOLEVOLUME
TEMPERATURE
VLPO/11
C11i
TEMPERATURE
VLPO/12
C12i
1000
TEMPERATURE
NIST ThermoML Polynomial

This equation can be used when parameter DNLTMLPO is available.
204
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
DNLTMLPO/1
MOLEDENSITY
DNLTMLPO/2, 3, C2i, C3i, C4i

4
MOLEDENSITY
TEMPERATURE
DNLTMLPO/5
DNLTMLPO/6
TEMPERATURE
DNLTMLPO/7
1000
TEMPERATURE
C1i
nTerms
Rackett
The Rackett equation is:
Where:
Tr = T / Tci
temperature units.
Note: Above Tr=0.99 an extrapolation method is used to smooth the
transition to constant molar volume equal to the critical volume.
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TC
Tci
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
10
ZC
0.1
PC
RKTZRA
pci
Zi
*,RA
10
1.0
PRESSURE
NIST TDE Rackett Parameters

This equation can be used when the parameter DNLRACK is available.

Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
DNLRACK/1
Zc
DNLRACK/2
2/7
DNLRACK/3
Tci
TEMPERATURE
DNLRACK/4
pci
PRESSURE
DNLRACK/5
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
DNLRACK/6
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
NIST COSTALD Parameters

This equation can be used when the parameter DNLCOSTD is available.
205

Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
DNLCOSTD/1
Voi
VOLUME
DNLCOSTD/2
DNLCOSTD/3
Tci
TEMPERATURE
DNLCOSTD/4
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
DNLCOSTD/5
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
NIST TDE Expansion

This equation can be used when the parameter DNLEXSAT is available.

Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol
Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
DNLEXSAT/1
ci
MOLEDENSITY
DNLEXSAT/2
C1i
MOLEDENSITY
DNLEXSAT/3,
C2i, ..., C6i
..., DNLEXSAT/7
MOLEDENSITY
DNLEXSAT/8
Tci
TEMPERATURE
DNLEXSAT/9
nTerms
DNLEXSAT/10
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
DNLEXSAT/11
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
References
H.G. Rackett, J.Chem. Eng. Data., Vol. 15, (1970), p. 514.
C.F. Spencer and R.P. Danner, J. Chem. Eng. Data, Vol. 17, (1972), p. 236.
206
Rackett/Campbell-Thodos Mixture Liquid

Volume
The Rackett equation calculates liquid molar volume for all activity coefficient
based and petroleum tuned equation of state based property methods. In the
last category of property methods, the equation is used in conjunction with
the API model. The API model is used for pseudocomponents, while the
Rackett model is used for real components. (See API Liquid Volume .)
Campbell-Thodos is a variation on the Rackett model which allows the
compressibility term Zi*,RA to vary with temperature.
Rackett
The equation for the Rackett model is:
Where:
Tc
ZmRA
Vcm
Tr
T / Tc

temperature units.
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TC
Tci
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
10
PC
pci
10
VCRKT
Vci
VC
0.001
3.5
MOLEVOLUME
RKTZRA
Zi*,RA
ZC
0.1
1.0
RKTKIJ
kij
-5.0
5.0
PRESSURE
207
Campbell-Thodos
The Campbell-Thodos model uses the same equation and parameters as the
Rackett model, above, except that ZmRAis allowed to vary with temperature:
ZmRA
Campbell-Thodos also uses separately-adjustable versions of the critical

parameters. Tmin and Tmax define the temperature range where the
equation is applicable.
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
RACKET/1
R*Tci/Pci
R*Tci/Pci
MOLEVOLUME
RACKET/2
Zi*,RA
RKTZRA
0.1
1.0
RACKET/3
di
0.11
RACKET/4
Tmin
TEMPERATURE
RACKET/5
Tmax
1000
TEMPERATURE
The Campbell-Thodos model is used when RACKET/3 is set to a value less

than 0.11. The default value, 2/7, indicates that the standard Rackett
equation should be used. When Campbell-Thodos is not used, RACKET/3
should be kept at its default value of 2/7 for all components.
References
H.G. Rackett, J.Chem, Eng. Data., Vol. 15, (1970), p. 514.
Modified Rackett Liquid Molar Volume

The Modified Rackett equation improves the accuracy of liquid mixture molar
volume calculation by introducing additional parameters to compute the pure
component parameter RKTZRA and the binary parameter kij.
The equation for the Modified Rackett model is:
Where:
Tc
kij
=
=
208
ZmRA
Zi*,RA
Vcm
Tr
T / Tc

temperature units.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default
MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MRKZRA/1
ai
RKTZRA
0.1
0.5
MRKZRA/2
bi
MRKZRA/3
ci
MRKKIJ/1
Aij
MRKKIJ/2
Bij
MRKKIJ/3
Cij
References
H.G. Rackett, J.Chem, Eng. Data., Vol. 15, (1970), p. 514.
Rackett Extrapolation Method

The Rackett equation has a formula involving an exponent of 1+(1-Tr )2/7
which is invalid above the critical temperature. As a result, a special
extrapolation method is required for this equation. This method involves the
calculation of an intermediate temperature T00 near the critical temperature.
When the temperature exceeds T00, the volume is constant at the critical
volume. When the temperature is between 0.99Tc and T00, a circle equation is
used to smoothly interpolate the volume between the value and slope at
0.99Tc and the constant value at T00.
209
Details
First the volume V0 at 0.99Tc and the critical volume Vc are calculated:
Then the volume difference is calculated, as well as the temperature

difference required for the circle equation:
From this, the required intermediate temperature T00 can be calculated:
Then the volume V00 at the circle's center can be calculated:
Finally, the equation of the circle is used to determine any point (T,V) for
0.99Tc < T < T00:
210
General Pure Component Solid Molar

Volume
solid molar volume. It uses parameter THRSWT/1 to determine which
for details.
And this parameter is

used
Aspen
VSPOLY
100
DIPPR
DNSDIP
401
IK-CAPE
VSPO
503
NIST ThermoML
polynomial
DNSTMLPO
Aspen Polynomial
The equation for the Aspen solids volume polynomial is:
Linear extrapolation of Vi*,s versus T occurs outside of temperature bounds.

Parameter
Name
Applicable
Components
Symbol
MDS
Default
Units
VSPOLY/1
Salts, CI solids
C1i
MOLE-VOLUME
TEMPERATURE
VSPOLY/2, ..., 5 Salts, CI solids
C2i, ..., C5i
MOLE-VOLUME
TEMPERATURE
VSPOLY/6
Salts, CI solids
C6i
MOLE-VOLUME
TEMPERATURE
VSPOLY/7
Salts, CI solids
C7i
1000
MOLE-VOLUME
TEMPERATURE
IK-CAPE Equation
Linear extrapolation of Vi*,s versus T occurs outside of temperature bounds.

Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
VSPO/1
MOLEVOLUME
C1i
211
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
VSPO/2, ..., 10
C2i, ..., C10i
MOLEVOLUME
TEMPERATURE
VSPO/11
C11i
TEMPERATURE
VSPO/12
C12i
1000
TEMPERATURE
DIPPR
The DIPPR equation is:
Vi*,s = 1 /
i*,s versus T occurs outside of temperature bounds.
i*,s
(Other DIPPR equations may sometimes be used. See Pure Component

Temperature-Dependent Properties for details.)
The model returns solid molar volume for pure components.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
DNSDIP/1
C1i
MOLEDENSITY
DNSDIP/2, ..., 5
C2i, ..., C5i
MOLEDENSITY,
TEMPERATURE
DNSDIP/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
DNSDIP/7
C7i
1000
TEMPERATURE
Vi*,s = 1 /
212
i*,s versus T occurs outside of temperature bounds.
i*,s
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
DNSTMLPO/1
C1i
MOLEDENSITY
DNSTMLPO/2,...,8 C2i, ..., C8i
MOLEDENSITY,
TEMPERATURE
DNSTMLPO/9
nTerms
DNSTMLPO/10
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
DNSTMLPO/11
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
Liquid Volume Quadratic Mixing Rule

With i and j being components, the liquid volume quadratic mixing rule is:
Option Codes
Option Code Value
Descriptions
Use normal pure component liquid volume model for all

components (default)
Use steam tables for water
Use mole basis composition (default)
Use mass basis composition
Parameter
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default
MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
VLQKIJ
Kij
This model is not part of any property method. To use it, you will need to
define a property method on the Properties | Property Methods form.
Specify the route VLMXQUAD for VLMX on the Routes sheet of this form, or
the model VL2QUAD for VLMX on the Models sheet.

The Aspen Physical Property System has five built-in heat capacity models.
This section describes the heat capacity models available.
Model
Type
Aqueous Infinite Dilution Heat Capacity

Polynomial
Electrolyte liquid
Criss-Cobble Aqueous Infinite Dilution

Ionic Heat Capacity
Electrolyte liquid
General Pure Component Liquid Heat

Capacity
Liquid
General Pure Component Ideal Gas Heat

Capacity
Ideal gas
General Pure Component Solid Heat

Capacity
Solid
Aqueous Infinite Dilution Heat Capacity

The aqueous phase infinite dilution enthalpies, entropies, and Gibbs energies
are calculated from the heat capacity polynomial. The values are used in the
calculation of aqueous and mixed solvent properties of electrolyte solutions:
213
versus T is linearly extrapolated using the slope at C7i for T < C7i
versus T is linearly extrapolated using the slope at C8i for T < C8i
Parameter
Name/Element
Applicable
Components
Symbol
Default Units
CPAQ0/1
Ions, molecular solutes C1i
TEMPERATURE and
HEAT CAPACITY
CPAQ0/2,,6
Ions, molecular solutes C2i, ..., C6i
TEMPERATURE and
HEAT CAPACITY
CPAQ0/7
TEMPERATURE
CPAQ0/8
1000
TEMPERATURE
If any of C4i through C6i is non-zero, absolute temperature units are

assumed for C1i through C6i . Otherwise, user input units for temperature are
used. The temperature limits are always interpreted in user input units.
Criss-Cobble Aqueous Infinite Dilution Ionic

Heat Capacity
The Criss-Cobble correlation for aqueous infinite dilution ionic heat capacity is
used if no parameters are available for the aqueous infinite dilution heat
capacity polynomial. From the calculated heat capacity, the thermodynamic
properties entropy, enthalpy and Gibbs energy at infinte dilution in water are
derived:
Parameter Applicable Symbol

Name
Components
Default
Ion Type 0
Units
IONTYP
Ions
SO25C
Anions
MOLE-ENTROPY
Cations
MOLE-ENTROPY
General Pure Component Liquid Heat

Capacity
liquid heat capacity. It uses parameter THRSWT/6 to determine which
for details.
214
100
CPLDIP
DIPPR
200-211
Barin
CPLXP1, CPLXP2
301
PPDS
CPLPDS
401
IK-CAPE heat capacity

polynomial
CPLPO
403
IK-CAPE liquid heat

capacity
CPLIKC
503
NIST ThermoML
polynomial
CPLTMLPO
506
NIST TDE equation
CPLTDECS
This liquid heat capacity model is used to calculate pure component liquid
heat capacity and pure component liquid enthalpy. To use this model, two
conditions must exist:
One of the parameters for calculating heat capacity (see table) is

available.
The component is not supercritical (HENRY-COMP).
The model uses a specific method (see Methods in Property Calculation

Methods and Routes):
Where
= Reference enthalpy calculated at Tref
= Ideal gas enthalpy
= Vapor enthalpy departure
= Enthalpy of vaporization
Tref is the reference temperature; it defaults to 298.15 K. You can enter a
different value for the reference temperature. This is useful when you want to
use this model for very light components or for components that are solids at
298.15K.
Activate this model by specifying the route DHL09 for the property DHL on
the Properties Property Methods Routes sheet. For equation of state property
method, you must also modify the route for the property DHLMX to use a
route with method 2 or 3, instead of method 1. For example, you can use the
route DHLMX00 or DHLMX30. You must ascertain that the route for DHLMX
that you select contains the appropriate vapor phase model and heat of
mixing calculations. Click the View button on the form to see details of the
route.
Optionally, you can specify that this model is used for only certain
components. The properties for the remaining components are then
calculated by the standard model. Use the parameter COMPHL to specify the
215
components for which this model is used. By default, all components with the
CPLDIP or CPLIKC parameters use this model.
Barin
DIPPR Liquid Heat Capacity

The DIPPR equation is used to calculate liquid heat capacity when parameter
THRSWT/6 is 100.
Linear extrapolation occurs for Cp*,l versus T outside of bounds.

Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default
MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper Units
Limit
CPLDIP/1
C1i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY,
TEMPERATURE
CPLDIP/2, ..., 5
C2i, ..., C5i 0
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY,
TEMPERATURE
CPLDIP/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
CPLDIP/7
C7i
1000
TEMPERATURE
ref
TREFHL
298.15
TEMPERATURE
COMPHL
To specify that the model is used for a component, enter a value of 1.0 for
COMPHL.
PPDS Liquid Heat Capacity

The PPDS equation is used to calculate liquid heat capacity when parameter
THRSWT/6 is 301.
Where R is the gas constant.

Linear extrapolation occurs for Cp*,l versus T outside of bounds.
216
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default
MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper Units
Limit
CPLPDS/1
C1i
CPLPDS/2
C2i
CPLPDS/3
C3i
CPLPDS/4
C4i
CPLPDS/5
C5i
CPLPDS/6
C6i
CPLPDS/7
C7i
TEMPERATURE
CPLPDS/8
C8i
0.99 TC
TEMPERATURE
IK-CAPE Liquid Heat Capacity

Two IK-CAPE equations can be used to calculate liquid heat capacity. Linear
extrapolation occurs for Cp*,l versus T outside of bounds for either equation.
When THRSWT/6 is 403, the IK-CAPE liquid heat capacity equation is used.
The equation is:
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
CPLIKC/1
C1i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY
CPLIKC/2,...,4
C2i, ..., C4i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY,
TEMPERATURE
CPLIKC/5
C5i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY,
TEMPERATURE
CPLIKC/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
CPLIKC/7
C7i
1000
TEMPERATURE
If C5i is non-zero, absolute temperature units are assumed for C2i through
C5i. Otherwise, user input units for temperature are used. The temperature
limits are always interpreted in user input units.
When THRSWT/6 is 401, the IK-CAPE heat capacity polynomial is used.The
equation is:
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
CPLPO/1
C1i
MOLE-CAPACITY
CPLPO/2,,10
C2i, ..., C10i
MOLE-CAPACITY
TEMPERATURE
CPLPO/11
C11i
TEMPERATURE
217
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
CPLPO/12
1000
TEMPERATURE
C12i
See Pure Component Temperature-Dependent Properties for details on the

THRSWT parameters.
NIST Liquid Heat Capacity

Two NIST equations can be used to calculate liquid heat capacity. Linear
extrapolation occurs for Cp*,l versus T outside of bounds for either equation.
When THRSWT/6 is 503, the ThermoML polynomial is used to calculate liquid
heat capacity:
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
CPLTMLPO/1
J/K^2/mol
CPLTMLPO/2,,5 C2i, ..., C5i
J/K^2/mol
CPLTMLPO/6
nTerms
CPLTMLPO/7
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
CPLTMLPO/8
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
C1i
When THRSWT/6 is 506, the TDE equation is used to calculate liquid heat
capacity:
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
CPLTDECS/1
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY
CPLTDECS/2,,4 C2i, ..., C4i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY
CPLTDECS/5
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY
CPLTDECS/6
Tci
TEMPERATURE
CPLTDECS/7
nTerms
CPLTDECS/8
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
CPLTDECS/9
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
C1i
See Pure Component Temperature-Dependent Properties for details on the

THRSWT parameters.
218
General Pure Component Ideal Gas Heat

Capacity
ideal gas heat capacity. It uses parameter THRSWT/7 to determine which
for details.

used
Ideal gas heat capacity

polynomial
CPIG
107, 127
DIPPR 107 or 127
CPIGDP
200-211
Barin
CPIXP1, CPIXP2, CPIXP3
301
PPDS
CPIGDS
401

polynomial
CPIGPO
503
NIST ThermoML
polynomial
CPITMLPO
513
NIST Aly-Lee
CPIALEE
These equations are also used to calculate ideal gas enthalpies, entropies,
and Gibbs energies.
Aspen Ideal Gas Heat Capacity Polynomial

The ideal gas heat capacity polynomial is available for components stored in
ASPENPCD, AQUEOUS, and SOLIDS databanks. This model is also used in
PCES.
Cp*,ig is linearly extrapolated using slope at

Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower Upper Units

Limit Limit
CPIG/1
C1i
MOLE-HEAT-CAPACITY,
TEMPERATURE
CPIG/2, ..., 6 C2i, ..., C6i
MOLE-HEAT-CAPACITY,
TEMPERATURE
CPIG/7
C7i
TEMPERATURE
CPIG/8
C8i
1000
TEMPERATURE
CPIG/9, 10,
11
C9i, C10i, C11i
MOLE-HEAT-CAPACITY,
TEMPERATURE
If C10i or C11i is non-zero, then absolute temperature units are assumed for
C9i through C11i. Otherwise, user input temperature units are used for all
parameters. User input temperature units are always used for C1i through C8i.
219

This equation can be used when parameter CPITMLPO is available.
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower Upper Units

Limit Limit
CPITMLPO /1
C1i
J/K^2/mol
CPITMLPO /2, C2i, ..., C6i

..., 6
J/K^2/mol
CPITMLPO/7
nTerms
CPITMLPO /8
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
CPITMLPO /9
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
DIPPR Equation 107

The DIPPR ideal gas heat capacity equation 107 by Aly and Lee 1981 is:
No extrapolation is used with this equation.

Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
CPIGDP/1
C1i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY
CPIGDP/2
C2i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY
CPIGDP/3
C3i
TEMPERATURE
CPIGDP/4
C4i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY
CPIGDP/5
C5i
TEMPERATURE
CPIGDP/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
CPIGDP/7
C7i
1000
TEMPERATURE
Absolute temperature units are assumed for C3i and C5i. The temperature
DIPPR Equation 127

The DIPPR ideal gas heat capacity equation 127 is:
220

Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
CPIGDP/1
C1i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY
CPIGDP/2
C2i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY
CPIGDP/3
C3i
TEMPERATURE
CPIGDP/4
C4i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY
CPIGDP/5
C5i
TEMPERATURE
CPIGDP/6
C6i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY
CPIGDP/7
C7i
TEMPERATURE
Absolute temperature units are assumed for C3i, C5i and C7i.
Barin
NIST Aly-Lee
This equation is the same as the DIPPR Aly and Lee equation 107 above, but
it uses a different parameter set. Note that elements 6 and 7 of the CPIALEE
parameter are not used in the equation.
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
CPIALEE/1
C1i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY
CPIALEE/2
C2i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY
CPIALEE/3
C3i
TEMPERATURE
CPIALEE/4
C4i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY
CPIALEE/5
C5i
TEMPERATURE
CPIALEE/8
C6i
TEMPERATURE
CPIALEE/9
C7i
1000
TEMPERATURE
Absolute temperature units are assumed for C3i and C5i. The temperature
PPDS
221
where R is the gas constant.

Linear extrapolation of Cp*,ig versus T is performed outside temperature
bounds.
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
CPIGDS/1
C1i
TEMPERATURE
CPIGDS/2, , 8
C2i, ..., C8i
CPIGDS/9
C9i
TEMPERATURE
CPIGDS/10
C10i
1000
TEMPERATURE
IK-CAPE Heat Capacity Polynomial

The equation is:
Linear extrapolation of Cp*,ig versus T is performed outside temperature

bounds.
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
CPIGPO/1
C1i
MOLE-CAPACITY
CPIGPO/2,,10
C2i, ..., C10i
MOLE-CAPACITY
TEMPERATURE
CPIGPO/11
C11i
TEMPERATURE
CPIGPO/12
C12i
1000
TEMPERATURE
References
Data for the Ideal Gas Heat Capacity Polynomial: Reid, Prausnitz and Poling,
The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th ed., (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987).
The Aspen Physical Property System combustion data bank, JANAF
Thermochemical Data, Compiled and calculated by the Thermal Research
Laboratory of Dow Chemical Company.
F. A. Aly and L. L. Lee, "Self-Consistent Equations for Calculating the Ideal
Gas Heat Capacity, Enthalpy, and Entropy, Fluid Phase Eq., Vol. 6, (1981), p.
169.
222
General Pure Component Solid Heat

Capacity
solid heat capacity. It uses parameter THRSWT/5 to determine which
for details.

used
Aspen solid heat capacity CPSPO1

polynomial
100 or 102
DIPPR
CPSDIP
200-211
Barin
CPSXP1, CPSXP2, ,
CPSXP7
401

polynomial
CPSPO
503
NIST ThermoML
polynomial
CPSTMLPO
The enthalpy, entropy, and Gibbs energy of solids are also calculated from
these equations:
Aspen Solid Heat Capacity Polynomial

The Aspen equation is:
Linear extrapolation occurs for Cp,i*,s versus T outside of bounds.

Parameter
Name
Applicable Symbol
Components
MDS
Default
Units
CPSPO1/1
Solids, Salts C1i
CPSPO1/2, ..., 6 Solids, Salts C2i, ..., C6i
CPSPO1/7
Solids, Salts C7i
CPSPO1/8
Solids, Salts C8i
1000
The units are TEMPERATURE and HEAT-CAPACITY for all elements. If any of
C4i through C6i are non-zero, absolute temperature units are assumed for
elements C1i through C6i. Otherwise, user input temperature units are
assumed for all elements. The temperature limits are always interpreted in
user input units.
Barin
DIPPR
There are two DIPPR equations that may generally be used.
The more common one, DIPPR equation 100, is:
223

Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default
MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper Units
Limit
CPSDIP/1
C1i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY,
TEMPERATURE
CPSDIP/2,...,5
C2i, ..., C5i 0
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY,
TEMPERATURE
CPSDIP/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
CPSDIP/7
C7i
1000
TEMPERATURE
DIPPR equation 102 is:

Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default
MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper Units
Limit
CPSDIP/1
C1i
MOLE-HEATCAPACITY,
TEMPERATURE
CPSDIP/2
C2i
CPSDIP/3,4
C3i, C4i
TEMPERATURE
CPSDIP/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
CPSDIP/7
C7i
1000
TEMPERATURE
If C3i or C4i are non-zero or C2i is negative, absolute temperature units are
assumed for elements C1i through C4i. Otherwise, user input temperature
units are assumed for all elements. The temperature limits are always
interpreted in user input units.

The equation is:
224
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default
MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper Units
Limit
CPSTMLPO/1
J/K^2/mol
CPSTMLPO/2,...,5 C2i, ..., C5i 0
J/K^2/mol
CPSTMLPO/6
nTerms
CPSTMLPO/7
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
C1i
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default
MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper Units
Limit
CPSTMLPO/8
1000
Tupper
TEMPERATURE
IK-CAPE Heat Capacity Polynomial

The equation is:

Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
CPSPO/1
C1i
MOLE-CAPACITY
CPSPO/2,,10
C10i
MOLE-CAPACITY
TEMPERATURE
CPSPO/11
C11i
TEMPERATURE
CPSPO/12
C12i
1000
TEMPERATURE
Solubility Correlations
The Aspen Physical Property System has three built-in solubility correlation
models. This section describes the solubility correlation models available.
Model
Type
Henry's constant
Gas solubility in liquid
Water solubility
Water solubility in organic liquid
Hydrocarbon solubility
Hydrocarbon solubility in water-rich

liquid
Henry's Constant
The Henry's constant model is used when Henry's Law is applied to calculate
K-values for dissolved gas components in a mixture. Henry's Law is available
in all activity coefficient property methods, such as the WILSON property
method. The model calculates Henry's constant for a dissolved gas component
(i) in one or more solvents (A or B):
Where:
wA
ln HiA(T, pA*,l)
225
Linear extrapolation occurs for ln HiA versus T outside of bounds.

HiA(T, P)
is obtained from the Brelvi-O'Connell model. pA*,l is
The parameter
obtained from the Antoine model.

coefficient model.
is obtained from the appropriate activity
The Henry's constants aiA, biA, ciA, diA, and eiA are specific to a solute-solvent
pair. They can be obtained from regression of gas solubility data. The Aspen
Physical Property System has a large number of built-in Henry's constants for
many solutes in solvents. These parameters were obtained using data from
the Dortmund Databank. In addition, a small number of Henry's constants
from the literature are available in the BINARY databank. See Physical
Property Data, Chapter 1, for details.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower Upper Units

Limit
Limit
VC
VcA
0.001
3.5
MOLE-VOLUME
HENRY/1
aiA
PRESSURE,
TEMPERATURE
HENRY/2
biA
TEMPERATURE
HENRY/3
ciA
TEMPERATURE
HENRY/4
diA
TEMPERATURE
HENRY/5
TL
TEMPERATURE
HENRY/6
TH
2000
TEMPERATURE
HENRY/7
eiA
TEMPERATURE
input units.
If aiA is missing,
renormalized.
is set to zero and the weighting factor wA is
Reference for BINARY Databank

E. Wilhelm, R. Battino, and R.J. Wilcock, "Low-Pressure Solubility of Gases in
Liquid Water," Chemical Reviews, 1977, Vol. 77, No. 2, pp 219 - 262.
Water Solubility
This model calculates solubility of water in a hydrocarbon-rich liquid phase.
The model is used automatically when you model a hydrocarbon-water
system with the free-water option. See Free-Water Immiscibility Simplification
in Free-Water and Three-Phase Calculations for details.
226
The expression for the liquid mole fraction of water in the ith hydrocarbon
species is:

The parameters for about 60 components are stored in the Aspen Physical
Property System pure component databank.
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
WATSOL/1
C1i
fcn(Tbi, SGi, Mi)
-10.0
33.0
WATSOL/2
C2i
fcn(Tbi, SGi, Mi)
-10000.0 3000.0
TEMPERATURE
WATSOL/3
C3i
-0.05
0.05
TEMPERATURE
WATSOL/4
C4i
0.0
500
TEMPERATURE
WATSOL/5
C5i
1000
4.0
1000
TEMPERATURE
Absolute temperature units are assumed for elements 2 through 5.
Hydrocarbon Solubility
This model calculates solubility of hydrocarbon in a water-rich liquid phase.
The model is used automatically when you model a hydrocarbon-water
system with the dirty-water option. See Free-Water Immiscibility
Simplification in Free-Water and Rigorous Three-Phase Calculations for
details.
The expression for the liquid mole fraction of the ith hydrocarbon species in
water is:

The parameters for about 40 components are stored in the Aspen Physical
Property System pure component databank.
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
HCSOL/1
C1i
fcn(carbon
number)
-1000.0
1000.0
HCSOL/2
C2i
-100000.0 100000.0 TEMPERATURE
HCSOL/3
C3i
-100.0
100.0
TEMPERATURE
HCSOL/4
C4i
0.0
500
TEMPERATURE
HCSOL/5
C5i
1000
4.0
1000
TEMPERATURE
For Hydrocarbons and pseudocomponents, the default values are estimated

by the method given by API Procedure 9A2.17 at 25 C.
Absolute temperature units are assumed for elements 2 and 3. The
temperature limits are always interpreted in user input units.
227
Reference
C. Tsonopoulos, Fluid Phase Equilibria, 186 (2001), 185-206.
Other Thermodynamic Property

Models
The Aspen Physical Property System has some built-in additional
thermodynamic property models that do not fit in any other category. This
section describes these models:
Cavett Liquid Enthalpy Departure
Barin Equations for Gibbs Energy, Enthalpy, Entropy and Heat Capacity
Electrolyte NRTL Enthalpy
Electrolyte NRTL Gibbs Energy
Liquid Enthalpy from Liquid Heat Capacity Correlation
Enthalpies Based on Different Reference States
Cavett
The general form for the Cavett model is:
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TC
Tci
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
10
ZC
0.1
PC
pci
DHLCVT
10
0.5
PRESSURE
Barin Equations for Gibbs Energy, Enthalpy,

Entropy, and Heat Capacity
The following equations are used when parameters from the Aspen Physical
Property System inorganic databank are retrieved.
Gibbs energy:
(1)
Enthalpy:
(2)
228
Entropy:
(3)
Heat capacity:
(4)
refers to an arbitrary phase which can be solid, liquid, or ideal gas. For each
phase, multiple sets of parameters from 1 to n are present to cover multiple
temperature ranges. The value of the parameter n depends on the phase.
(See tables that follow.) When the temperature is outside all these
temperature ranges, linear extrapolation of properties versus T is performed
using the slope at the end of the nearest temperature bound.
The four properties Cp, H, S, and G are interrelated as a result of the
thermodynamic relationships:
There are analytical relationships between the expressions describing the

properties Cp, H, S, and G (equations 1 to 4). The parameters an,i to hn,i can
occur in more than one equation.
The Aspen Physical Property System has other models which can be used to
calculate temperature-dependent properties which the BARIN equations can
calculate. The Aspen Physical Property System uses the parameters in
THRSWT to determine which model is used. See Pure Component
Temperature-Dependent Properties for details.
If this parameter is 200 to 211 Then the BARIN equations are
used to calculate
THRSWT/3
Liquid vapor pressure
THRSWT/5
Solid heat capacity
THRSWT/6
Liquid heat capacity
THRSWT/7
Ideal gas heat capacity
The liquid vapor pressure is computed from Gibbs energy as follows:

ln p = (GL - GV)/RT + ln pref
where p is the vapor pressure, and pref is the reference pressure 101325 Pa.
Thus, parameters for both liquid and vapor are necessary to calculate vapor
pressure.
Solid Phase
The parameters in range n are valid for temperature: Tn,ls < T < Tn,hs
229
When you specify this parameter, be sure to specify at least elements 1

through 3.
Parameter Name Symbol Default MDS Lower
/Element
Limit
CPSXPn/1
Tn,ls
s
Upper
Limit
Units
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
CPSXPn/2
Tn,h
CPSXPn/3
an,i
CPSXPn/4
bn,is
CPSXPn/5
CPSXPn/6
dn,i
CPSXPn/7
en,is
CPSXPn/8
CPSXPn/9
CPSXPn/10
cn,i
fn,i
gn,i
hn,i
n is 1 through 7. CPSXP1 vector stores solid parameters for the first

temperature range. CPSXP2 vector stores solid parameters for the second
temperature range, and so on.
TEMPERATURE, ENTHALPY, ENTROPY
Liquid Phase
The parameters in range n are valid for temperature: Tn,ll < T < Tn,hl
through 3.
/Element
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
CPLXPn/1
Tn,ll
TEMPERATURE
CPLXPn/2
Tn,hl
TEMPERATURE
CPLXPn/4
bn,i
CPLXPn/5
cn,il
CPLXPn/6
dn,i
CPLXPn/7
en,i
CPLXPn/8
fn,il
gn,i
hn,i
CPLXPn/3
CPLXPn/9
CPLXPn/10
an,i
n is 1 through 2. CPLXP1 stores liquid parameters for the first temperature

range. CPLXP2 stores liquid parameters for the second temperature range.
Ideal Gas Phase

The parameters in range n are valid for temperature: Tn,lig < T < Tn,hig
through 3.
230

/Element
Limit
CPIXPn/1
CPIXPn/2
Tn,lig
Tn,h
ig
ig
Upper
Limit
Units
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
CPIXPn/3
an,i
CPIXPn/4
bn,iig
CPIXPn/5
ig
CPIXPn/6
dn,i
ig
CPIXPn/7
en,iig
CPIXPn/8
cn,i
fn,i
ig
CPIXPn/9
gn,i
ig
CPIXPn/10
hn,iig
n is 1 through 3. CPIXP1 vector stores ideal gas parameters for the first
temperature range. CPIXP2 vector stores ideal gas parameters for the second
temperature range, and so on.
Electrolyte NRTL Enthalpy Model

(HMXENRTL)
The equation for the electrolyte NRTL enthalpy model (HMXENRTL) is:
The molar enthalpy Hm* and the molar excess enthalpy Hm*E are defined with
the asymmetrical reference state: the pure solvent water and infinite dilution
of molecular solutes and ions. (here * refers to the asymmetrical reference
state.)
Hw* is the pure water molar enthalpy, calculated from the Ideal Gas model
and the ASME Steam Table equation-of-state. (here * refers to pure
component.)
Hs*,l is the enthalpy contribution from a non-water solvent. It is calculated as

usual for components in activity coefficient models:
Hs*,l(T) = Hs*,ig + DHVs(T,p) -
Hs,vap(T).
The term DHVs(T,p) = Hs*,v - Hs*,ig is the vapor enthalpy departure

contribution to liquid enthalpy; option code 5 determines how this is
calculated.
The aqueous infinite dilution thermodynamic enthalpy Hk is calculated from

the infinite dilution aqueous phase heat capacity
as follows:
231
where the subscript k refers to any ion or molecular solute. By default,

is calculated from the aqueous infinite dilution heat capacity polynomial. If
the polynomial model parameters are not available,
the Criss-Cobble correlation for ionic solutes.
is calculated from
For molecular solutes (e.g. Henry components), if the aqueous infinite dilution
heat capacity polynomial model parameters are not available, Hk is

calculated from Henry's law:
Hm*E is calculated from the electrolyte NRTL activity coefficient model.

See Criss-Cobble correlation model and Henry's law model for more
information.
Parameter
Name
Applicable
Components
Symbol
Default Units
IONTYP
Ions
Ion
SO25C
Cations
Sc
(T=298)
MOLE-ENTROPY
Anions
Sa
(T=298)
MOLE-ENTROPY
DHAQFM
Ions, Molecular Solutes
f Hk,aq
MOLE-ENTHALPY
CPAQ0
Cp,k
,aq
HEAT-CAPACITY
DHFORM
Molecular Solutes
f Hi*,ig
MOLE-ENTHALPY
Water, Solvents
f Hw*,ig
MOLE-ENTHALPY
*,ig
CPIG
Molecular Solutes
Water, Solvents
,aq
,aq
Cp,i
Cp,w
*,ig
IONTYP is not needed if CPAQ0 is given for ions.

DHFORM is not used if DHAQFM and CPAQ0 are given for molecular solutes
(components declared as Henry's components). If CPAQ0 is missing, DHFORM
and Henry's constants are used to calculate infinite dilution enthalpy for
solutes.
The unit keywords for CPIG are TEMPERATURE and HEAT-CAPACITY. If
CPIG/10 or CPIG/11 is non-zero, then absolute temperature units are
assumed for CPIG/9 through CPIG/11. Otherwise, user input temperature
units are used for all elements of CPIG. User input temperature units are
always used for other elements of CPIG.
232
Option Codes for Electrolyte NRTL Enthalpy Model

(HMXENRTL)
The electrolyte NRTL enthalpy model (HMXENRTL) has seven option codes
and the option codes can affect the performance of this model.
Option code 2. Use this option code to specify the vapor phase equation-ofstate (EOS) model used for the liquid enthalpy calculation. The value (0) sets
the ideal gas EOS model and the value (1) sets the HF EOS model. The value
(0) is the default.
Option code 5. Use this option code to specify how the vapor phase enthalpy
departure (DHV) is calculated. The value (0) sets DHV = 0, the value (1)
specifies using Redlich-Kwong equation of state, and the value (3) specifies
using Hayden-OConnell equation of state. The value (0) is the default.
Option code 7. Use this option code to specify the method for handling
Henry components and multiple solvents. The value (0) sets the pure liquid
enthalpy to that calculated by aqueous infinite dilution heat capacity (only
water as solvent) and the value (1) sets the pure liquid enthalpy for Henry
components using Henrys law. Use value (1) when there are multiple
solvents. The value (0) is the default.
Electrolyte NRTL Gibbs Free Energy Model

(GMXENRTL)
The equation for the NRTL Gibbs free energy model (GMXENRTL) is:
The molar Gibbs free energy and the molar excess Gibbs free energy Gm* and
Gm*E are defined with the asymmetrical reference state: as pure water and
infinite dilution of molecular solutes and ions. (* refers to the asymmetrical
reference state.) The ideal mixing term is calculated normally, where j refers
to any component. The molar Gibbs free energy of pure water (or
thermodynamic potential) w* is calculated from the ideal gas contribution.
This is a function of the ideal gas heat capacity and the departure function.
(here * refers to the pure component.)
The departure function is obtained from the ASME steam tables.
233
s*,l is the Gibbs free energy contribution from a non-water solvent. It is

calculated as usual for components in activity coefficient models.
The aqueous infinite dilution thermodynamic potential k is calculated from

the infinite dilution aqueous phase heat capacity polynomial model, by
default. Subscript k refers to any ion or molecular solute. If polynomial model
parameters are not available, it is calculated from the Criss-Cobble model for
ionic solutes:
where the subscript k refers to any ion or molecular solute and the term RT
ln(1000/Mw) is added because f Hk ,aq and f Gk ,aq are based on a molality
scale, while k is based on mole fraction scale.

By default,
is calculated from the aqueous infinite dilution heat
capacity polynomial. If the polynomial model parameters are not available,
is calculated from the Criss-Cobble correlation for ionic solutes.
For molecular solutes (e.g. Henry components), if the aqueous infinite dilution
heat capacity polynomial model parameters are not available, k is

calculated from Henry's law:
Gm*E is calculated from the electrolyte NRTL activity coefficient model.

See the Criss-Cobble correlation model and Henry's law model for more
information.
Parameter
Name
Applicable
Components
Symbol
Default Units
IONTYP
Ions
Ion
(T=298)
MOLE-ENTROPY
(T=298)
MOLE-ENTROPY
MOLE-ENTHALPY
SO25C
234
,aq
Cations
Sc
Anions
Sa
DGAQFM
f Gk,aq
CPAQ0
Cp,k
HEAT-CAPACITY
DGFORM
Molecular Solutes
f Gi
MOLE-ENTHALPY
Water, Solvents
f Gw
MOLE-ENTHALPY
,aq
,aq
Parameter
Name
Applicable
Components
Symbol
Default Units
CPIG
Molecular Solutes
Cp,i*,ig
Water, Solvents
Cp,w
*,ig
IONTYP and SO25C are not needed if CPAQ0 is given for ions.
DGFORM is not needed if DHAQFM and CPAQ0 are given for molecular
solutes.
The unit keywords for CPIG are TEMPERATURE and HEAT-CAPACITY. If
CPIG/10 or CPIG/11 is non-zero, then absolute temperature units are
assumed for CPIG/9 through CPIG/11. Otherwise, user input temperature
units are used for all elements of CPIG. User input temperature units are
always used for other elements of CPIG.
Option Codes for Electrolyte NRTL Gibbs Free Energy

Model (GMXENRTL)
The electrolyte NRTL Gibbs free energy model (GMXENRTL) has six option
codes and the option codes can affect the performance of this model.
Option code 2. Use this option code to specify the vapor phase equation-ofstate (EOS) model used for the liquid Gibbs free energy calculation. The value
(0) sets the ideal gas EOS model and the value (1) sets the HF EOS model.
The value (0) is the default.
Option code 5. Use this option code to specify how the pure vapor phase
fugacity coefficient (PHIV) is calculated. The value (0) sets PHIV = 1 (ideal
gas law), the value (1) specifies using Redlich-Kwong equation of state, and
the value (3) specifies using Hayden-OConnell equation of state. The value
(0) is the default.
Option code 6. Use this option code to specify the method for handling
Henry components and multiple solvents. The value (0) sets the pure liquid
Gibbs free energy to that calculated by aqueous infinite dilution heat capacity
(only water as solvent) and the value (1) sets the pure liquid Gibbs free
energy for Henry components using Henrys law. Use value (1) when there
are multiple solvents. The value (0) is the default.
Liquid Enthalpy from Liquid Heat Capacity

Correlation
Liquid enthalpy is directly calculated by integration of liquid heat capacity:
235
The reference enthalpy is calculated at Tref as:
Where:
Hi*,ig
Ideal gas enthalpy
Hi*,v - Hi*,ig
Vapor enthalpy departure from equation of state
vapHi*,l
Heat of vaporization from General model
Tref
Reference temperature, specified by user. Defaults to

298.15 K
See General Pure Component Heat of Vaporization for parameter requirement

and additional details.
Enthalpies Based on Different Reference

States
Two property methods, WILS-LR and WILS-GLR, are available to calculate
enthalpies based on different reference states. The WILS-LR property method
is based on saturated liquid reference state for all components. The WILS-GLR
property method allows both ideal gas and saturated liquid reference states
for different components.
These property methods use an enthalpy method that optimizes the accuracy
tradeoff between liquid heat capacity, heat of vaporization, and vapor heat
capacity at actual process conditions. This highly recommended method
eliminates many of the problems associated with accurate thermal properties
for both phases, especially the liquid phase.
The liquid enthalpy of mixture is calculated by the following equation (see the
table labeled Liquid Enthalpy Methods):
Where:
Hmig
Enthalpy of ideal gas mixture
=
Hi*,ig
Ideal gas enthalpy of pure component i
(Hml-Hmig)
Enthalpy departure of mixture
For supercritical components, declared as Henry's components, the enthalpy

departure is calculated as follows:
236
For subcritical components:

Hml-Hmig
HmE,l
HA*,l-HA*,ig
Enthalpy departure of pure component A
H*,ig and H*,l can be calculated based on either saturated liquid or ideal gas as
reference state as described in the sections that follow.
For the WILS-LR property method, H*,ig and H*,l are calculated based on the
saturated liquid reference state for all components.
For the WILS-GLR property method, H*,ig and H*,l can be calculated based on
the saturated liquid reference state for some components and the ideal gas
reference state for other components. You can set the value of a pure
component parameter called RSTATE to specify the reference state for each
component. RSTATE = 1 denotes ideal gas reference state. RSTATE = 2
denotes saturated liquid reference state. If it is not set, the following default
rules apply based on the normal boiling point of the component, i, TB(i):
If TB(i) <= 298.15 K, ideal gas reference state is used
If TB(i) > 298.15 K, saturated liquid reference state is used.
Saturated Liquid as Reference State

The saturated liquid enthalpy at temperature T is calculated as follows:
Where:
Hiref,l
Reference enthalpy for liquid state at Tiref,l
Cp,i*,l
Liquid heat capacity of component i
The saturated liquid Gibbs free energy is calculated as follows:
Where:
Giref,l
Reference Gibbs free energy for liquid state at Tiref,l
i*,l
Liquid fugacity coefficient of component i
System pressure
pref
Reference pressure (=101325 N/m2)
For the WILS-LR property method, Hiref,l and Giref,l default to zero (0). The
reference temperature Tiref,l defaults to 273.15K.
For the WILS-GLR property method, the reference temperature Tiref,l defaults
to 298.15K and Hiref,l defaults to:
237
And Giref,l defaults to:
Where:
Hiref,ig
Ideal gas enthalpy of formation for liquid state at

298.15K
Giref,ig
Ideal gas Gibbs free energy of formation for liquid

state at 298.15K
Hi*,v
Vapor enthalpy departure of component i
Gi*,v
Vapor Gibbs free energy departure of component i
vapHi*
Enthalpy of vaporization of component i
Note that we cannot default the liquid reference enthalpy and Gibbs free
energy to zero, as is the case for WILS-LR, because it will cause inconsistency
with the enthalpy of components that use ideal-gas reference state. The
default values used result in the enthalpies of all components being on the
same basis. In fact, if you enter values for Hiref,l and Giref,l for a liquidreference state component you must make sure that they are consistent with
each other and are consistent with the enthalpy basis of the remaining
components in the mixture. If you enter a value for Hiref,l, you should also
enter a value for Giref,l to ensure consistency.
When the liquid-reference state is used, the ideal gas enthalpy at
temperature T is not calculated from the integration of the ideal gas heat
capacity equation (see Ideal Gas as Reference State section below). For
consistency, it is calculated from liquid enthalpy as follows:
Where:
Ticon,l
Temperature of conversion from liquid to vapor

enthalpy for component i
vapHi*(Ticon,l)
Heat of vaporization of component i at

temperature of Tcon,l
Hi*,v(Ticon,l, pi*,l)
Vapor enthalpy departure of component i at the

conversion temperature and vapor pressure pi*,l
pi*,l
Liquid vapor pressure of component i
Ideal gas heat capacity of component i
Ticon,l is the temperature at which one crosses from liquid state to the vapor
state. This is a user defined temperature that defaults to the system
temperature T. Ticon,l may be selected such that heat of vaporization for
component i at the temperature is most accurate.
238
The vapor enthalpy is calculated from ideal gas enthalpy as follows:
Where:
Hi*,v(T, P)
Vapor enthalpy departure of pure component i at the

system temperature and pressure
The liquid heat capacity and the ideal gas heat capacity can be calculated
from the General Pure Component Liquid Heat Capacity and General Pure
Component Ideal Gas Heat Capacity, or other available models. The heat of
vaporization can be calculated from the General Pure Component Heat of
Vaporization, or other available models. The enthalpy departure is obtained
from an equation-of-state that is being used in the property method. For
WILS-LR and WILS-GLR, the ideal gas equation of state is used.
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
RSTATE
TREFHL
Tiref,l
TEMPERATURE
ref,l
MOLE ENTHALPY
ref,l
MOLE ENTHALPY
TEMPERATURE
DHLFRM
Hi
DGLFRM
Gi
TCONHL
Ticon,l
Enthalpy reference state given by RSTATE. 2 denotes saturated liquid as

reference state.
For WILS-LR property method TREFHL defaults to 273.15K. For WILS-GLR
property method, TREFHL defaults to 298.15 K.
For WILS-LR property method, DHLFRM defaults to zero (0). For WILSGLR property method, DHLFRM defaults to the equation above.
For WILS-LR property method, DGLFRM defaults to zero (0). For WILSGLR property method, DGLFRM defaults to the equation above.
Liquid heat capacity equation is required for all components.
Ideal Gas as Reference State

The saturated liquid enthalpy is calculated as follows:
Where:
Hiref,ig
Tiref,ig
Reference state enthalpy for ideal gas at Tiref,ig
Heat of formation of ideal gas at 298.15 K by default
Reference temperature corresponding to Hiref,ig.

Defaults to 298.15 K
239
Ticon,ig
The temperature at which one crosses from vapor

state to liquid state. This is a user defined
temperature that defaults to the system temperature
T. Ticon,igmay be selected such that heat of
vaporization of component i at the temperature is
most accurate.
The ideal gas enthalpy is calculated as follows:
The vapor enthalpy is calculated as follows:
The liquid heat capacity and the ideal gas heat capacity can be calculated
from the General Pure Component Liquid Heat Capacity and General Pure
Component Ideal Gas Heat Capacity, or other available models. The heat of
vaporization can be calculated from the General Pure Component Heat of
Vaporization, or other available models. The enthalpy departure is obtained
from an equation of state that is being used in the property method. For
WILS-LR and WILS-GLR, the ideal gas equation of state is used.
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
RSTATE
TREFHI
Ti
ref,ig
TEMPERATURE
ref,ig
MOLE ENTHALPY
TEMPERATURE
DHFORM
Hi
TCONHI
Ticon,ig
Enthalpy reference state RSTATE for a component. Value of 1 denotes ideal

gas.
For components with TB 298.15 K, RSTATE defaults to 1 (ideal gas).
TREFHI defaults to 298.15 K. For components with TB > 298.15 K, RSTATE
defaults to 2 (liquid) and TREFHI does not apply to these components. See
the Saturated Liquid as Reference State section for more details.

The Helgeson equations of state for standard volume
, heat capacity
entropy
, enthalpy of formation
, and Gibbs energy of formation
at infinite dilution in aqueous phase are:
240
Where:
241
Where:
Pressure constant for a solvent (2600 bar for water)
Temperature constant for a solvent (228 K for

water)
Born coefficient
Dielectric constant of a solvent
Tr
Reference temperature (298.15 K)
Pr
Reference pressure (1 bar)

temperature units.
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
AHGPAR/1, ... , a1, ..., a4

4
CHGPAR/1, ... , c1, c2

2
DHAQHG
-0.5x1010 0.5x1010
MOLE-ENTHALPY
DGAQHG
-0.5x1010 0.5x1010
MOLE-ENTHALPY
S25HG
-0.5x1010 0.5x1010
MOLE-ENTROPY
OMEGHG
-0.5x1010 0.5x1010
MOLE-ENTHALPY
If pressure is under 200 bar, AHGPAR may not be required.
References
Tanger, J.C. IV and H.C. Helgeson, "Calculation of the thermodynamic and
transport properties of aqueous species at high pressures and temperatures:
Revised equation of state for the standard partial properties of ions and
electrolytes," American Journal of Science, Vol. 288, (1988), p. 19-98.
Shock, E.L. and H.C. Helgeson, "Calculation of the thermodynamic and
transport properties of aqueous species at high pressures and temperatures:
242
Correlation algorithms for ionic species and equation of state predictions to 5

kb and 1000 C," Geochimica et Cosmochimica Acta, Vol. 52, p. 2009-2036.
Shock, E.L., H.C. Helgeson, and D.A. Sverjensky, "Calculation of the
thermodynamic and transport properties of aqueous species at high pressures
and temperatures: Standard partial molal properties of inorganic neutral
species," Geochimica et Cosmochimica Acta, Vol. 53, p. 2157-2183.

The quadratic mixing rule is a general-purpose mixing rule which can be
applied to various properties. For a given property Q, with i and j being
components, the rule is:
The pure component properties Qi and Qj are calculated by the default model
for that property, unless modified by option codes. Composition xi and xj is in
mole fraction unless modified by option codes. Kij is a binary parameter
specific to the mixing rule for each property. A variation on the equation using
the logarithm of the property is used for viscosity.
243
3 Transport Property Models
This section describes the transport property models available in the Aspen
Physical Property System. The following table provides an overview of the
available models. This table lists the Aspen Physical Property System model
names, and their possible use in different phase types, for pure components
and mixtures.
Viscosity models
These models calculate MUL (pure) and/or MULMX (mixture) for the liquid
phase, and MUV (pure) and/or MUVMX (mixture) for the vapor phase, except
models marked with * calculate MUVLP (pure) and/or MUVMXLP (mixture) for
the vapor phase, and models marked with ** calculate MUVPC (pure) and
MUVMXPC (mixture).
244
Model
Model name
Phase(s) Pure
Mixture
Andrade Liquid Mixture

Viscosity
MUL2ANDR
General Pure Component

Liquid Viscosity
MUL0ANDR
API Liquid Viscosity
MUL2API
API 1997 Liquid Viscosity
MULAPI97
Aspen Liquid Mixture Viscosity MUASPEN
ASTM Liquid Mixture Viscosity MUL2ASTM

Vapor Viscosity *
MUV0CEB
Chapman-Enskog-BrokawWilke Mixing Rule *
MUV2BROK,
MUV2WILK
Chung-Lee-Starling Low
Pressure *
MUV0CLSL,
MUV2CLSL
Chung-Lee-Starling
MUV0CLS2,
MUV2CLS2,
MUL0CLS2,
MUL2CLS2
VL
Dean-Stiel Pressure Correction MUV0DSPC,

**
MUV2DSPC
IAPS Viscosity
VL
MUV0H2O,
MUL0H2O
Model
Model name
Phase(s) Pure
Mixture
Jones-Dole Electrolyte
Correction
MUL2JONS
Letsou-Stiel
MUL0LEST,
MUL2LEST
Lucas
MUV0LUC,
MUV2LUC
TRAPP viscosity
MUL0TRAP,
MUL2TRAP,
MUV0TRAP,
MUV2TRAP
VL
Twu liquid viscosity
MUL2TWU
Viscosity quadratic mixing rule MUL2QUAD
Thermal conductivity models

These models calculate KL (pure) and/or KLMX (mixture) for the liquid phase,
and KV (pure) and/or KVMX (mixture) for the vapor phase, except models
marked with * calculate KVLP (pure) and/or KVMXLP (mixture) for the vapor
phase, and models marked with ** calculate KVPC (pure) and KVMXPC
(mixture) for the vapor phase.
Model
Model name
Phase(s) Pure
Mixture
Chung-Lee-Starling Thermal
Conductivtity
KV0CLS2,
KV2CLS2,
KL0CLS2,
KL2CLS2
VL
IAPS Thermal Conductivity for KV0H2O

Water
KL0H2O
V
L
X
X
Li Mixing Rule
KL2LI
Riedel Electrolyte Correction
KL2RDL

Liquid Thermal Conductivity
KL0SR,
KL2SRVR

KV0STLP
Vapor Thermal Conductivity *
Stiel-Thodos Pressure
Correction **
KV0STPC,
KV2STPC
TRAPP Thermal Conductivity
KV0TRAP,
KV2TRAP,
KL0TRAP,
KL2TRAP
VL
Vredeveld Mixing Rule
KL2SRVR
Wassiljewa-Mason-Saxena
mixing rule *
KV2WMSM
Diffusivity models
These models calculate DL (binary) and/or DLMX (mixture) for the liquid
phase, and DV (binary) and/or DVMX (mixture) for the vapor phase.
Model
Model name
Phase(s) Binary Mixture
Chapman-Enskog-Wilke-Lee
Binary
DV0CEWL
245
Model
Model name
Phase(s) Binary Mixture
Chapman-Enskog-Wilke-Lee
Mixture
DV1CEWL
Dawson-Khoury-Kobayashi
Binary
DV1DKK
Mixture
DV1DKK
Nernst-Hartley Electrolytes
DL0NST,
DL1NST
Wilke-Chang Binary
DL0WC2
Wilke-Chang Mixture
DL1WC
Surface tension models

These models calculate SIGL (pure) and/or SIGLMX (mixture).
Model
Model name
Phase(s) Pure
Mixture
Liquid Mixture Surface Tension SIG2IDL
API Surface Tension
SIG2API

Liquid Surface Tension
SIG0HSS,
SIG2HSS
IAPS surface tension
SIG0H2O
Onsager-Samaras Electrolyte
Correction
SIG2ONSG
Modified MacLeod-Sugden
SIG2MS
Viscosity Models
The Aspen Physical Property System has the following built-in viscosity
models:
Model
Type
Andrade Liquid Mixture Viscosity
Liquid
General Pure Component Liquid Viscosity
Pure component liquid
API liquid viscosity
Liquid
API 1997 liquid viscosity
Liquid
General Pure Component Vapor Viscosity
Low pressure vapor,

pure components
Chapman-Enskog-Brokaw-Wilke Mixing Rule Low pressure vapor,

mixture
246
Chung-Lee-Starling Low Pressure
Low pressure vapor
Chung-Lee-Starling
Liquid or vapor
Dean-Stiel Pressure correction
Vapor
IAPS viscosity
Water or steam
Jones-Dole Electrolyte Correction
Electrolyte
Letsou-Stiel
High temperature liquid
Lucas
Vapor
TRAPP viscosity
Vapor or liquid
Model
Type
Aspen Liquid Mixture Viscosity
Liquid
ASTM Liquid Mixture Viscosity
Liquid
Twu liquid viscosity
Liquid
Viscosity quadratic mixing rule
Liquid
Andrade Liquid Mixture Viscosity

The liquid mixture viscosity is calculated by the modified Andrade equation:
Where:
kij
mij
fi depends on the option code for the model MUL2ANDR.

If first option code of
MUL2ANDR is
Then fi is
0 (Default)
Mass fraction of component i
Note that the Andrade liquid mixture viscosity model is called from other
models. The first option codes of these models cause fi to be mole or mass
fraction when Andrade is used in the respective models. To maintain
consistency across models, if you set the first option code for MUL2ANDR to
1, you should also the set the first option code of the other models to 1, if
they are used in your simulation.
Model
Model Name
MUL2JONS
Jones-Dole Electrolyte Viscosity model
DL0WCA
Wilke-Chang Diffusivity model (binary)
DL1WCA
Wilke-Chang Diffusivity model (mixture)
DL0NST
Nernst-Hartley Electrolyte Diffusivity model (binary)
DL1NST
Nernst-Hartley Electrolyte Diffusivity model (mixture)
The binary parameters kij and mij allow accurate representation of complex
liquid mixture viscosity. Both binary parameters default to zero.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
ANDKIJ/1
aij
ANDKIJ/2
bij
ANDMIJ/1
cij
ANDMIJ/2
dij
The pure component liquid viscosity

Component Liquid Viscosity model.
i*,l is calculated by the General Pure
247
General Pure Component Liquid Viscosity

pure component liquid viscosity. It uses parameter TRNSWT/1 to determine
which submodel is used. See Pure Component Temperature-Dependent
If TRNSWT/1 is This equation is used
Andrade
MULAND
101, 115
DIPPR 101 or 115
MULDIP
301
PPDS
MULPDS
401
IK-CAPE polynomial equation MULPO
404
IK-CAPE exponential equation MULIKC
508
NIST TDE equation
MULNVE
509
NIST PPDS9
MULPPDS9
Andrade Liquid Viscosity

The Andrade equation is:
Linear extrapolation of ln(viscosity) versus 1/T occurs for temperatures

outside bounds.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MULAND/1
Ai
VISCOSITY,
TEMPERATURE
MULAND/2
Bi
TEMPERATURE
MULAND/3
Ci
TEMPERATURE
MULAND/4
Tl
0.0
TEMPERATURE
MULAND/5
Th
500.0
TEMPERATURE
If Bi or Ci is non-zero, absolute temperature units are assumed for Ai, Bi,

and Ci. Otherwise, all coefficients are interpreted in user input temperature
units. The temperature limits are always interpreted in user input units.
DIPPR Liquid Viscosity

There are two DIPPR equations for liquid viscosity. The value of TRNSWT/1
determines which one is used.
Equation 101 for the DIPPR liquid viscosity model is:
Equation 115 for the DIPPR liquid viscosity model is:
Linear extrapolation of ln(viscosity) versus 1/T occurs for temperatures

outside bounds.
248

Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MULDIP/1
C1i
MULDIP/2, ..., 5
VISCOSITY,
TEMPERATURE
C2i, ..., C5i 0
TEMPERATURE
MULDIP/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
MULDIP/7
C7i
1000
TEMPERATURE
If any of C3i through C5i are non-zero, absolute temperature units are
assumed for C3i through C5i. Otherwise, all coefficients are interpreted in user
input temperature units. The temperature limits are always interpreted in
user input units.
PPDS
Linear extrapolation of viscosity versus T occurs for temperatures outside

bounds.
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MULPDS/1
C1i
MULPDS/2
C2i
MULPDS/3
C3i
TEMPERATURE
MULPDS/4
C4i
TEMPERATURE
MULPDS/5
C5i
VISCOSITY
MULPDS/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
MULPDS/7
C7i
TEMPERATURE
NIST PPDS9 Equation

This is the same as the PPDS equation above, but it uses parameter
MULPPDS9. Note that the parameters are in a different order.
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MULPPDS9/1
C5i
MULPPDS9/2
Pa*S
C1i
MULPPDS9/3
C2i
TEMPERATURE
MULPPDS9/4
C3i
TEMPERATURE
MULPPDS9/5
C4i
TEMPERATURE
MULPPDS9/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
MULPPDS9/7
C7i
TEMPERATURE
249
IK-CAPE Liquid Viscosity Model

The IK-CAPE liquid viscosity model includes both exponential and polynomial
equations.
Exponential

bounds.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MULIKC/1
C1i
VISCOSITY
MULIKC/2
C2i
TEMPERATURE
MULIKC/3
C3i
VISCOSITY
MULIKC/4
C4i
TEMPERATURE
MULIKC/5
C5i
1000
TEMPERATURE
Absolute temperature units are assumed for C2i. The temperature limits
are always interpreted in user input units.
Polynomial

bounds.
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MULPO/1
VISCOSITY
MULPO/2, ..., 10 C2i, ..., C10i 0
C1i
VISCOSITY,
TEMPERATURE
MULPO/11
C11i
TEMPERATURE
MULPO/12
C12i
1000
TEMPERATURE
NIST TDE Equation

bounds.
Absolute temperature units are assumed for C2i, C3i, and C4i. The temperature
250
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MULNVE/1
C1i
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MULNVE/2, 3, 4 C2i, C3i, C4i
TEMPERATURE
MULNVE/5
C5i
TEMPERATURE
MULNVE/6
C6i
1000
TEMPERATURE
References
Liquids, 4th ed., (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987), p. 439.
API Liquid Viscosity

The liquid mixture viscosity is calculated using a combination of the API and
General equations. This model is recommended for petroleum and
petrochemical applications. It is used in the CHAO-SEA, GRAYSON, LK-PLOCK,
PENG-ROB, and RK-SOAVE option sets.
For pseudocomponents, the API model is used:
Where:
fcn
= A correlation based on API Procedures and Figures 11A4.1, 11A4.2,

and 11A4.3 (API Technical Data Book, Petroleum Refining, 4th
edition)
Vml is obtained from the API liquid volume model.

For real components, the General model is used.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TB
Tbi
4.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
API
APIi
-60.0
500.0
API 1997 Liquid Viscosity

The liquid mixture viscosity is calculated using a combination of the API and
General equations. This model is recommended over the earlier API viscosity
model.
This model is applicable to petroleum fractions with normal boiling points from
150 F to 1200 F and API gravities between 0 and 75. Testing by AspenTech
indicates that this model is slightly more accurate than the Twu model for
light and medium boiling petroleum components, while the Twu model is
superior for heavy fractions.
For pseudocomponents, the API model is used:
Where:
251
fcn
= A correlation based on API Procedures and Figures 11A4.2, 11A4.3,

and 11A4.4 (API Technical Data Book, Petroleum Refining, 1997
edition)
Vml is obtained from the API liquid volume model.

For real components, the General model is used.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TB
Tbi
4.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
API
APIi
-60.0
500.0
Aspen Liquid Mixture Viscosity

The liquid mixture viscosity is calculated by the equation:
Where:
Xi
Mole fraction or weight fraction of component i
kij
Symmetric binary parameter (kij = kji)
lij
Antisymmetric binary parameter (lij = -lji)
The pure component liquid viscosity

Component Liquid Viscosity model.
i*,l is calculated by the General Pure
The binary parameters kij and lij allow accurate representation of complex
liquid mixture viscosity. Both binary parameters default to zero.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MUKIJ
kij
-100.0
100.0
MULIJ
lij
100.0
100.0
ASTM Liquid Mixture Viscosity

It is generally difficult to predict the viscosity of a mixture of viscous
components. For hydrocarbons, the following weighting method (ASTM ) is
known to give satisfactory results:
Where:
252
wi
Weight fraction of component i
Absolute viscosity of the mixture (N-sec/sqm)
Viscosity of component i (N-sec/sqm)
log
Common logarithm (base 10)
An adjustable parameter, typically in the

range of 0.5 to 1.0
The individual component viscosities are calculated by the General Pure

Component Liquid Viscosity model. The parameter f can be specified by
setting the value for MULOGF for the first component in the component list
(as defined on the Components | Specifications | Selection sheet).
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MULOGF
0.0
2.0
1.0
"Petroleum Refining, 1 Crude Oil, Petroleum Products, Process Flowsheets",

Institut Francais du Petrole Publications, 1995, p. 130.
General Pure Component Vapor Viscosity

pure component low pressure vapor viscosity. It uses parameter TRNSWT/2
to determine which submodel is used. See Pure Component TemperatureDependent Properties for details.

used
Chapman-EnskogBrokaw
STKPAR, LJPAR
102
DIPPR
MUVDIP
301
PPDS
MUVPDS
302
PPDS kinetic theory
MUVCEB
401
IK-CAPE polynomial
equation
MUVPO
402
IK-CAPE Sutherland
equation
MUVSUT
503
NIST ThermoML
polynomial
MUVTMLPO
Chapman-Enskog-Brokaw
The equation for the Chapman-Enskog model is:
Where:
A parameter is used to determine whether to use the Stockmayer or

Lennard-Jones potential parameters for /k (energy parameter) and
(collision diameter). To calculate , the dipole moment p and either the
253
Stockmayer parameters or Tb and Vb are needed. The polarity correction is

from Brokaw.
Parameter
Symbol Default
Name/Element
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MW
1.0
5000.0
-24
Mi
MUP
pi
0.0
5x10
STKPAR/1
(i/k)ST
fcn(Tbi, Vbi, pi)
TEMPERATURE
STKPAR/2
iST
(i/k)LJ
iLJ
fcn(Tbi, Vbi, pi)
LENGTH
TEMPERATURE
LENGTH
LJPAR/1
LJPAR/2
fcn(Tci,
i)
fcn(Tci, pci,
i)
DIPOLEMOMENT
DIPPR Vapor Viscosity

The equation for the DIPPR vapor viscosity model is:
When necessary, the vapor viscosity is extrapolated beyond this temperature

range linearly with respect to T, using the slope at the temperature limits.
PCES uses the DIPPR equation in estimating vapor viscosity.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MUVDIP/1
C1i
VISCOSITY
MUVDIP/2
C2i
MUVDIP/3, 4
C3i, C4i
TEMPERATURE
MUVDIP/5
MUVDIP/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
MUVDIP/7
C7i
1000
TEMPERATURE
user input units.
MUVDIP/5 is not used in this equation. It is normally set to zero. The
parameter is provided for consistency with other DIPPR equations.
PPDS
The PPDS submodel includes both the basic PPDS vapor viscosity equation
and the PPDS kinetic theory vapor viscosity equation. For either equation,
linear extrapolation of viscosity versus T occurs for temperatures outside
bounds.
PPDS Vapor Viscosity

The equation is:
254
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MUVPDS/1
C1i
VISCOSITY
MUVPDS/2
C2i
MUVPDS/3
C3i
MUVPDS/4
C4i
TEMPERATURE
MUVPDS/5
C5i
1000
TEMPERATURE
PPDS Kinetic Theory Vapor Viscosity

The equation is:
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MW
Mi
1.0
5000.0
MUVCEB/1
C1i
LENGTH
MUVCEB/2
C2i
TEMPERATURE
MUVCEB/3
C3i
MUVCEB/4
C4i
TEMPERATURE
MUVCEB/5
C5i
1000
TEMPERATURE
Absolute temperature units are assumed for C2i . The temperature limits are
always interpreted in user input units.
IK-CAPE Vapor Viscosity

The IK-CAPE vapor viscosity model includes both the Sutherland equation and
the polynomial equation. For either equation, linear extrapolation of viscosity
versus T occurs for temperatures outside bounds.
Sutherland Equation
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MUVSUT/1
C1i
VISCOSITY
MUVSUT/2
C2i
TEMPERATURE
MUVSUT/3
C3i
TEMPERATURE
255
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MUVSUT/4
C4i
1000
TEMPERATURE
If C2i is non-zero, absolute temperature units are assumed for C1i and C2i.
Otherwise, all coefficients are interpreted in user input temperature units. The
temperature limits are always interpreted in user input units.
Polynomial
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MUVPO/1
C1i
VISCOSITY
MUVPO/2, ..., 10
C2i, ..., C10i
VISCOSITY,
TEMPERATURE
MUVPO/11
C11i
TEMPERATURE
MUVPO/12
C12i
1000
TEMPERATURE
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MUVTMLPO/1
C1i
Pa*s/T
MUVTMLPO/2, ..., 4 C2i , ..., C4i
Pa*s/T
MUVTMLPO/5
nTerms
MUVTMLPO/6
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
MUVTMLPO/7
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
References
R.C. Reid, J.M. Prausnitz, and B.E. Poling. The Properties of Gases and
Chapman-Enskog-Brokaw-Wilke Mixing
Rule
The low pressure vapor mixture viscosity is calculated by the Wilke
approximation of the Chapman-Enskog equation:
For
256
ij,the formulation by Brokaw is used:
Where:
The Stockmayer or Lennard-Jones potential parameters /k (energy

parameter) and (collision diameter) and the dipole moment p are used to
calculate The k represents Boltzmann's constant 1.38065 x 10-23 J/K. If the
Stockmayer parameters are not available, is estimated from Tb and Vb:
Where p is in debye.
The pure component vapor viscosity i*,v (p = 0) can be calculated using the
General Pure Component Vapor Viscosity (or another low pressure vapor
viscosity model).
Ensure that you supply parameters for
i*,v (p = 0).
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol
Default
MDS Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MW
Mi
1.0
5000.0
0.0
5x10
-24
MUP
pi
STKPAR/1
(i/k)
ST
fcn(Tbi, Vbi, pi)
DIPOLEMOMENT
TEMPERATURE
257
Parameter
Name/
Element
Symbol
Default
MDS Lower
Limit
STKPAR/2
iST
fcn(Tbi, Vbi, pi) X
Upper
Limit
Units
LENGTH
References
R.C. Reid, J.M. Prausnitz, and T.K. Sherwood, The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 3rd ed., (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1977), pp. 410416.
Chung-Lee-Starling Low-Pressure Vapor

Viscosity
The low-pressure vapor viscosity by Chung, Lee, and Starling is:
Where the viscosity collision integral is:
The shape and polarity correction is:
The parameter pr is the reduced dipolemoment:
C1 is a constant of correlation.
The polar parameter is tabulated for certain alcohols and carboxylic acids.
The previous equations can be used for mixtures when applying these mixing
rules:
258
Where:
Vcij
ij
Tcij
ij
ij
Mij
ij
0 (in almost all cases)

temperature units.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCCLS
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
VCCLS
Vci
VC
0.001
3.5
MOLE-VOLUME
MW
Mi
1.0
5000.0
-24
MUP
pi
0.0
5x10
OMGCLS
i
i
ij
ij
OMEGA x
-0.5
2.0
0.0
0.0
0.5
0.0
-0.5
-0.5
0.0
-0.5
0.5
CLSK
CLSKV
CLSKT
DIPOLEMOMENT
The model specific parameters also affect the Chung-Lee-Starling Viscosity

and the Chung-Lee-Starling Thermal Conductivity models.
References
Liquids, 4th ed., (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987), p. 396, p. 413.
259
Chung-Lee-Starling Viscosity
The Chung-Lee-Starling viscosity equation for vapor and liquid, high and low
pressure is:
With:
f1
f2
FC
The molar density can be calculated using an equation-of-state model (for

example, the Benedict-Webb-Rubin). The parameter pr is the reduced
dipolemoment:
C1 and C2 are constants of correlation.

The polar parameter
is tabulated for certain alcohols and carboxylic acids.
For low pressures, f1 is reduced to 1.0 and f2 becomes negligible. The

equation reduces to the low pressure vapor viscosity model by Chung-Lee and
Starling.
The previous equations can be used for mixtures when applying these mixing
rules:
260
Where:
Vcij
ij
Tcij
ij
ij
Mij
ij
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCCLS
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
VCCLS
Vci
VC
0.001
3.5
MOLE-VOLUME
MW
Mi
1.0
5000.0
-24
MUP
pi
0.0
5x10
OMGCLS
i
i
ij
ij
OMEGA
-0.5
2.0
0.0
0.0
0.5
0.0
-0.5
-0.5
0.0
-0.5
0.5
CLSK
CLSKV
CLSKT
DIPOLEMOMENT
The model specific parameters affect the results of the Chung-Lee-Starling

Thermal Conductivity and Low Pressure Viscosity models as well.
References
261
Dean-Stiel Pressure Correction

The residual vapor viscosity or the pressure correction to low pressure vapor
viscosity by Dean and Stiel is:
Where v (p = 0) is obtained from a low pressure viscosity model (for

example, General Pure Component Vapor Viscosity). The dimensionlessmaking factor is:
Tc
pc
Vcm
Zcm
rm
Vcm / Vmv
The parameter Vmv is obtained from Redlich-Kwong equation-of-state.

Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MW
Mi
1.0
5000.0
VC
Vci
0.001
3.5
MOLE-VOLUME
IAPS Viscosity for Water

The IAPS viscosity models, developed by the International Association for
Properties of Steam, calculate vapor and liquid viscosity for water and steam.
These models are used in option sets STEAMNBS and STEAM-TA.
The general form of the equation for the IAPS viscosity models is:
w=fcn(T, p)
Where:
fcn
= Correlation developed by IAPS
The models are only applicable to water. There are no parameters required
for the models.
262
Jones-Dole Electrolyte Correction

The Jones-Dole model calculates the correction to the liquid mixture viscosity
of a solvent mixture, due to the presence of electrolytes:
Where:
solv
Viscosity of the liquid solvent mixture, by default

calculated by the Andrade model
cal
Contribution to the viscosity correction due to

apparent electrolyte ca
The parameter solv can be calculated by different models depending on

option code 3 for MUL2JONS:
Option Code
Value
Solvent liquid mixture viscosity

model
Andrade liquid mixture viscosity

model (default)
Viscosity quadratic mixing rule
Aspen liquid mixture viscosity

model
The parameter
cal can be calculated by three different equations.
If these parameters are available
Use this equation
IONMOB and IONMUB
Jones-Dole
IONMUB
Breslau-Miller
Carbonell
When the concentration of apparent electrolyte exceeds 0.1 M, the BreslauMiller equation is used instead.
Jones-Dole
The Jones-Dole equation is:
(1)
Where:
=
Concentration of apparent electrolyte ca
(2)
xcaa
Mole fraction of apparent electrolyte ca
(3)
Aca
(4)
La
(5)
263
Lc
(6)
Bca
(7)
When the electrolyte concentration exceeds 0.1 M, the Breslau-Miller equation

is used instead. This behavior can be disabled by setting the second option
code for MUL2JONS to 1.
Breslau-Miller
The Breslau-Miller equation is:
(8)
Where the effective volume Vc is given by:
(9)
for salts involving univalent ions
(9a)
for other salts
Carbonell
The Carbonell equation is:
(10)
Where:
Mk
Molecular weight of an apparent electrolyte

component k
You must provide parameters for the model used for the calculation of the
liquid mixture viscosity of the solvent mixture.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default Lower Upper

Limit Limit
Units
CHARGE
0.0
MW
1.0
5000.0
IONMOB/1
l1
AREA, MOLES
IONMOB/2
l2
0.0
AREA, MOLES,
TEMPERATURE
IONMUB/1
b1
MOLE-VOLUME
IONMUB/2
b2
0,0
MOLE-VOLUME,
TEMPERATURE
References
A. L. Horvath, Handbook of Aqueous Electrolyte Solutions, (Chichester: Ellis
Horwood, 1985).
264
Letsou-Stiel
The Letsou-Stiel model calculates liquid viscosity at high temperatures for
0.76 Tr 0.98. This model is used in PCES.
temperature units.
The general form for the model is:
l = (l)0 + (l)1
Where:
(l)0
(l)1
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MW
Mi
1.0
5000.0
TC
Tci
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PC
pci
10
OMEGA
-0.5
10
2.0
PRESSURE
References
R.C. Reid, J.M. Pransnitz, and B.E. Poling, The Properties of Gases and
Lucas Vapor Viscosity

The equation for the Lucas vapor viscosity model is:
Where the dimensionless low pressure viscosity is given by:
The dimensionless-making group is:
The pressure correction factor Y is:
265
The polar and quantum correction factors at high and low pressure are:
FP
FQ
FPi (p = 0)
FQi (p = 0)
fcn(Tri), but is only nonunity for the quantum

gates i = H2, D2, and He.

temperature units.
The Lucas mixing rules are:
Tc
pc
FP (p = 0)
FQ (p = 0)
Where A differs from unity only for certain mixtures.

Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCLUC
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PCLUC
pci
PC
105
108
PRESSURE
ZCLUC
Zci
ZC
0.1
0.5
MW
Mi
1.0
5000.0
MUP
pi
0.0
5x10-24
DIPOLEMOMENT
References
Liquids, 4th ed., (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987), p. 421, 431.
TRAPP Viscosity Model

The general form for the TRAPP viscosity model is:
266
Where:
The parameter
is the mole fraction vector; fcn is a corresponding states
correlation based on the model for vapor and liquid viscosity TRAPP, by the
National Bureau of Standards (NBS, currently NIST) . The model can be used
for both pure components and mixtures. The model should be used for
nonpolar components only.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MW
Mi
1.0
5000.0
TCTRAP
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
10
PCTRAP
pci
PC
10
PRESSURE
VCTRAP
Vci
VC
0.001
3.5
MOLE-VOLUME
ZCTRAP
Zci
ZC
0.1
1.0
OMGRAP
OMEGA x
-0.5
3.0
References
J.F. Ely and H.J.M. Hanley, "Prediction of Transport Properties. 1. Viscosities
of Fluids and Mixtures," Ind. Eng. Chem. Fundam., Vol. 20, (1981), pp. 323
332.
Twu Liquid Viscosity

The Twu liquid viscosity model is based upon the work of C.H. Twu (1985).
The correlation uses n-alkanes as a reference fluid and is capable of
predicting liquid viscosity for petroleum fractions with normal boiling points up
to 1340 F and API gravity up to -30.
Given the normal boiling point Tb and the specific gravity SG of the system to
be modeled, the Twu model estimates the viscosity of the n-alkane reference
fluid of the same normal boiling point at 100 F and 210 F, and its specific
gravity. These are used to estimates the viscosity of the system to be
modeled at 100 F and at 210 F, and these viscosities are used to estimate the
viscosity at the temperature of interest.
267
Where:
268
SG
Specific gravity of petroleum fraction
Tb
Normal boiling point of petroleum fraction, Rankine
SG
Specific gravity of reference fluid with normal

boiling point Tb
Temperature of petroleum fraction, Rankine
Kinematic viscosity of petroleum fraction at T, cSt
Kinematic viscosity of petroleum fraction at 100 F

(i=1) and 210 F (i=2), cSt
1, 2
Kinematic viscosity of reference fluid at 100 F and

210 F, cSt
Tc
Critical temperature of reference fluid, Rankine
Reference
C.H. Twu, "Internally Consistent Correlation for Predicting Liquid Viscosities of
Petroleum Fractions," Ind. Eng. Chem. Process Des. Dev., Vol. 24 (1985), pp.
1287-1293
Viscosity Quadratic Mixing Rule

With i and j being components, the viscosity quadratic mixing rule is:
The pure component viscosity is calculated by the General Pure Component

Liquid Viscosity model.
Option Codes
Option Code Value
Descriptions
Parameter
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default
MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MLQKIJ
Kij
Thermal Conductivity Models

The Aspen Physical Property System has eight built-in thermal conductivity
models. This section describes the thermal conductivity models available.
Model
Type
Chung-Lee-Starling
Vapor or liquid
IAPS
Water or steam
Li Mixing Rule
Liquid mixture
Electrolyte
General Pure Component Liquid Thermal

Conductivity
Liquid
Solid Thermal Conductivity Polynomial
Solid
General Pure Component Vapor Thermal

Conductivity
Low pressure vapor
Stiel-Thodos Pressure Correction
Vapor
TRAPP Thermal Conductivity
Vapor or liquid
Liquid mixture
Wassiljewa-Mason-Saxena Mixing Rule
Low pressure vapor
269
Chung-Lee-Starling Thermal Conductivity

The main equation for the Chung-Lee-Starling thermal conductivity model is:
Where:
f1
f2
(p = 0) can be calculated by the low pressure Chung-Lee-Starling model.

The molar density can be calculated using an equation-of-state model (for
example, the Benedict-Webb-Rubin equation-of-state). The parameter pr is
the reduced dipolemoment:
The polar parameter
is tabulated for certain alcohols and carboxylic acids.
For low pressures, f1 is reduced to 1.0 and f2 is reduced to zero. This gives
the Chung-Lee-Starling expression for thermal conductivity of low pressure
gases.
The same expressions are used for mixtures. The mixture expression for (p
= 0) must be used. (See Chung-Lee-Starling Low-Pressure Vapor Viscosity.)
Where:
270
Vcij
ij
Tcij
ij
ij
Mij
ij
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TCCLS
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
VCCLS
Vci
VC
0.001
3.5
MOLE-VOLUME
MW
Mi
1.0
5000.0
MUP
pi
0.0
5x10-24
DIPOLEMOMENT
OMGCLS
i
i
ij
ij
OMEGA x
-0.5
2.0
0.0
0.0
0.5
0.0
-0.5
-0.5
0.0
-0.5
0.5
CLSK
CLSKV
CLSKT
The model-specific parameters also affect the results of the Chung-LeeStarling Viscosity models.
References
Liquids, 4th ed., (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987), p. 505, 523.
IAPS Thermal Conductivity for Water

The IAPS thermal conductivity models were developed by the International
Association for Properties of Steam. These models can calculate vapor and
liquid thermal conductivity for water and steam. They are used in option sets
STEAMNBS and STEAM-TA.
The general form of the equation for the IAPS thermal conductivity models is:
w=fcn(T, p)
Where:
271
fcn
Correlation developed by IAPS
The models are only applicable to water. No parameters are required.
Li Mixing Rule
Liquid mixture thermal conductivity is calculated using Li equation (Reid
et.al., 1987):
Where:
The pure component liquid molar volume Vi*,l is calculated from the Rackett
model.
The pure component liquid thermal conductivity i*,l is calculated by the
General Pure Component Liquid Thermal Conductivity model.
Reference: R.C. Reid, J.M. Prausnitz, and B.E. Poling, The Properties of Gases
and Liquids, 4th ed., (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987), p. 550.

The Riedel model can calculate the correction to the liquid mixture thermal
conductivity of a solvent mixture, due to the presence of electrolytes:
Where:
lsolv
Thermal conductivity of the liquid solvent mixture,

calculated by the General Pure Component Liquid
Thermal Conductivity model using the Vredeveld
mixing rule
xcaa
Mole fraction of the apparent electrolyte ca
ac, aa
Riedel ionic coefficient
Vm l
Apparent molar volume computed by the Clarke

density model
Apparent electrolyte mole fractions are computed from the true ion molefractions and ionic charge number. They can also be computed if you use the
apparent component approach. A more detailed discussion of this method is
found in Electrolyte Calculation.
272
You must provide parameters for the Sato-Riedel model. This model is used
for the calculation of the thermal conductivity of solvent mixtures.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
CHARGE
0.0
IONRDL
0.0
THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY, MOLE-VOLUME

The behavior of this model can be changed using option codes (these codes
apply to the Vredeveld mixing rule).
Option Option Description
Code
Value
1
Do not check ratio of KL max / KL min
Check ratio. If KL max / KL min > 2, set exponent to 1,

overriding option code 2.
Exponent is -2
Exponent is 0.4
Exponent is 1. This uses a weighted average of liquid thermal

conductivities.
General Pure Component Liquid Thermal

Conductivity
pure component liquid thermal conductivity. It uses parameter TRNSWT/3 to
determine which submodel is used. See Pure Component TemperatureDependent Properties for details.
Sato-Riedel
100
DIPPR
KLDIP
301
PPDS
KLPDS
401
IK-CAPE
KLPO
503
NIST ThermoML
polynomial
KLTMLPO
510
NIST PPDS8 equation
KLPPDS8
Sato-Riedel
The Sato-Riedel equation is (Reid et al., 1987):
Where:
Tbri
Tbi / Tci
Tri
T / Tci
273

temperature units.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MW
Mi
1.0
5000.0
TC
Tci
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
TB
Tbi
4.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PPDS
The equation is:
*,l versus T occurs outside of bounds.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
KLPDS/1
C1i
THERMALCONDUCTIVITY
KLPDS/2
C2i
KLPDS/3
C3i
KLPDS/4
C4i
KLPDS/5
C5i
TEMPERATURE
KLPDS/6
C6i
1000
TEMPERATURE
NIST PPDS8 Equation

The equation is
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower Upper
Limit Limit
Units
KLPPDS8/1
THERMALCONDUCTIVITY
KLPPDS8/2, ..., 7 C2i , ..., C7i 0
KLPPDS8/8
TCi
TEMPERATURE
KLPPDS8/9
nTerms
KLPPDS8/10
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
KLPPDS8/11
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
C1i
DIPPR Liquid Thermal Conductivity

274

The DIPPR equation is used by PCES when estimating liquid thermal
conductivity.
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
KLDIP/1
C1i
THERMALCONDUCTIVITY,
TEMPERATURE
KLDIP/2, ... , 5
C2i , ..., C5i 0
TEMPERATURE
KLDIP/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
KLDIP/7
C7i
1000
TEMPERATURE

The equation is:
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
KLTMLPO/1
TEMPERATURE
KLTMLPO/2, ... , C2i , ..., C4i 0

4
TEMPERATURE
KLTMLPO/5
nTerms
KLTMLPO/6
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
KLTMLPO/7
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
C1i
IK-CAPE
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
KLPO/1
THERMALCONDUCTIVITY
C1i
275
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
KLPO/2, ... , 10 C2i , ..., C10i 0
TEMPERATURE
KLPO/11
C11i
TEMPERATURE
KLPO/12
C12i
1000
TEMPERATURE
References
R.C. Reid, J.M. Prausnitz, and T.K. Sherwood, The Properties of Gases and
Solid Thermal Conductivity Polynomial

Thermal conductivity for solid pure components is calculated using the solid
thermal conductivity polynomial. For mixtures, the mole-fraction weighted
average is used.
For pure solids, thermal conductivity is calculated by:
For mixtures:
i*,s versus T occurs outside of bounds.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
KSPOLY/1
THERMAL
CONDUCTIVITY
KSPOLY/2, 3, 4, 5
b, c, d, e 0
THERMAL
CONDUCTIVITY,
TEMPERATURE
KSPOLY/6
TEMPERATURE
KSPOLY/7
1000
TEMPERATURE
General Pure Component Vapor Thermal

Conductivity
pure component low pressure vapor thermal conductivity. It uses parameter
TRNSWT/4 to determine which submodel is used. See Pure Component
Temperature-Dependent Properties for details.
276

used
Stiel-Thodos
102
DIPPR
KVDIP
301
PPDS
KVPDS
401
IK-CAPE
KVPO
503
NIST ThermoML
polynomial
KVTMLPO
Stiel-Thodos
The Stiel-Thodos equation is:
Where:
i*,v(p = 0) can be obtained from the General Pure Component Vapor

Viscosity model.
Cpi*,ig is obtained from the General Pure Component Ideal Gas Heat Capacity
model.
R is the universal gas constant.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MW
Mi
1.0
5000.0
DIPPR Vapor Thermal Conductivity

The DIPPR equation for vapor thermal conductivity is:
i*,v versus T occurs outside of bounds.

The DIPPR equation is used in PCES when estimating vapor thermal
conductivity.
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
KVDIP/1
C1i
THERMAL
CONDUCTIVITY
KVDIP/2
C2i
KVDIP/3, 4
C3i, C4i
TEMPERATURE
KVDIP/5
KVDIP/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
KVDIP/7
C7i
1000
TEMPERATURE
277

user input units.
PPDS
The equation is:
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default
MDS
Lower Upper
Limit
Limit
Units
KVPDS/1
C1i
THERMALCONDUCTIVITY
KVPDS/2
C2i
THERMALCONDUCTIVITY
KVPDS/3
C3i
THERMALCONDUCTIVITY
KVPDS/4
C4i
THERMALCONDUCTIVITY
KVPDS/5
C5i
TEMPERATURE
KVPDS/6
C6i
1000
TEMPERATURE
IK-CAPE Polynomial
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper Units
Limit
KVPO/1
C1i
THERMALCONDUCTIVITY
KVPO/2, ... , 10
C2i, ..., C10i
TEMPERATURE
KVPO/11
C11i
TEMPERATURE
KVPO/12
C12i
1000
TEMPERATURE
278
Parameter
Symbol
Name/Element
Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
KVTMLPO/1
C1i
TEMPERATURE
KVTMLPO/2, ... ,
4
C2i, ..., C4i
TEMPERATURE
KVTMLPO/5
nTerms
KVTMLPO/6
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
KVTMLPO/7
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
References
R.C. Reid, J.M. Praunitz, and B.E. Poling, The Properties of Gases and Liquid,
4th ed., (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987), p. 494.
Stiel-Thodos Pressure Correction Model

The pressure correction to a pure component or mixture thermal conductivity
at low pressure is given by:
Where:
rm
The parameter Vmv can be obtained from Redlich-Kwong.
v(p = 0) can be obtained from the low pressure General Pure Component
Vapor Thermal Conductivity.
This model should not be used for polar substances, hydrogen, or helium.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MW
Mi
1.0
5000.0
TC
Tci
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PC
105
108
PRESSURE
VC
Vci
0.001
3.5
MOLE-VOLUME
ZC
Zci
0.1
0.5
References
R.C. Reid, J.M. Praunitz, and B.E. Poling, The Properties of Gases and Liquids,

Liquid mixture thermal conductivity is calculated using the Vredeveld equation
(Reid et al., 1977):
279
Where:
wi
Liquid phase weight fraction of component i
i*,l
Pure component liquid thermal conductivity of component i
Where n is determined from two option codes on model KL2VR:

If option code 1 is Then n is determined by
0 (default)
1
Option code 2, always

Option code 2, unless
set to 1.
. In this case n is
If option code 2 is Then n is

0 (default)
-2
0.4
1 (This uses a weighted average of liquid thermal

conductivities.)
For most systems, the ratio of maximum to minimum pure component liquid
thermal conductivity is between 1 and 2, where the exponent -2 is
recommended, and is the default value used.
Pure component liquid thermal conductivity i*,l is calculated by the General
Pure Component Liquid Thermal Conductivity model.
Reference: R.C. Reid, J.M. Prausnitz, and T.K. Sherwood, The Properties of
Gases and Liquids, 4th ed., (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1977), p. 533.
TRAPP Thermal Conductivity Model

The general form for the TRAPP thermal conductivity model is:
Where:
Cpi
*,ig
fcn
Mole fraction vector
Ideal gas heat capacity calculated using the

General pure component ideal gas heat capacity
model
Corresponding states correlation based on the

model for vapor and liquid thermal conductivity
made by the National Bureau of standards (NBS,
currently NIST)
The model can be used for both pure components and mixtures. The model
should be used for nonpolar components only.
280
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MW
Mi
1.0
5000.0
TCTRAP
Tci
TC
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
10
PCTRAP
pci
PC
10
VCTRAP
Vci
VC
0.001
3.5
PRESSURE
MOLE-VOLUME
ZCTRAP
Zci
ZC
0.1
1.0
OMGRAP
OMEGA
-0.5
3.0
References
J.F. Ely and H.J. M. Hanley, "Prediction of Transport Properties. 2. Thermal
Conductivity of Pure Fluids and Mixtures," Ind. Eng. Chem. Fundam., Vol. 22,
(1983), pp. 9097.
Wassiljewa-Mason-Saxena Mixing Rule

The vapor mixture thermal conductivity at low pressures is calculated from
the pure component values, using the Wassiljewa-Mason-Saxena equation:
Where:
i*,v
Calculated by the General Pure Component Vapor

Thermal Conductivity model
i*,v(p = 0)
Obtained from the General Pure Component Vapor

Viscosity model
You must supply parameters for
i*,v(p = 0) and i*,v.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MW
Mi
1.0
5000.0
References
Liquids, 4th ed., (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987), pp. 530531.
Diffusivity Models
The Aspen Physical Property System has seven built-in diffusivity models. This
section describes the diffusivity models available.
281
Model
Type
Chapman-Enskog-Wilke-Lee (Binary)
Low pressure vapor
Chapman-Enskog-Wilke-Lee (Mixture)
Low pressure vapor
Dawson-Khoury-Kobayashi (Binary)
Vapor
Dawson-Khoury-Kobayashi (Mixture)
Vapor
Nernst-Hartley
Electrolyte
Wilke-Chang (Binary)
Liquid
Wilke-Chang (Mixture)
Liquid
Chapman-Enskog-Wilke-Lee (Binary)
The binary diffusion coefficient at low pressures
the Chapman-Enskog-Wilke-Lee model:
is calculated using
Dijv=Djiv
Where:
The collision integral for diffusion is:
The binary size and energy parameters are defined as:
ij
ij
A parameter is used to determine whether to use the Stockmayer or

Lennard-Jones potential parameters for /k (energy parameter ) and
(collision diameter). To calculate , the dipole moment p, and either the
Stockmayer parameters or Tb and Vb are needed.
Parameter
Symbol Default
Name/Element
MDS Lower Upper

Limit Limit
Units
MW
1.0
5000.0
-24
MUP
pi
0.0
5x10
TB
Tbi
4.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
VB
Vb
0.001
3.5
MOLE-VOLUME
OMEGA
i
(i/k)ST
-0.5
2.0
fcn(Tbi, Vbi, pi)
TEMPERATURE
STKPAR/1
282
Mi
DIPOLEMOMENT
Parameter
Symbol Default
Name/Element
STKPAR/2
LJPAR/1
LJPAR/2
iST
(i/k)LJ
iLJ
fcn(Tbi, Vbi, pi)

fcn(Tci,
i)
fcn(Tci, pci,
i)
MDS Lower Upper

Limit Limit
Units
LENGTH
TEMPERATURE
LENGTH
References
R.C. Reid, J.M. Praunitz, and B.E. Poling, The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
Chapman-Enskog-Wilke-Lee (Mixture)
The diffusion coefficient of a gas into a gas mixture at low pressures is
calculated using an equation of Bird, Stewart, and Lightfoot by default (option
code 0):
If the first option code is set to 1, Blanc's law is used instead:
The binary diffusion coefficient Dijv(p = 0) at low pressures is calculated using

the Chapman-Enskog-Wilke-Lee model. (See Chapman-Enskog-Wilke-Lee
(Binary).)
You must provide parameters for this model.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
DVBLNC
DVBLNC is set to 1 for a diffusing component and 0 for a non-diffusing

component.
References
Dawson-Khoury-Kobayashi (Binary)
The binary diffusion coefficient Dijv at high pressures is calculated from the
Dawson-Khoury-Kobayashi model:
283
Dijv=Djiv
Dijv(p = 0) is the low-pressure binary diffusion coefficient obtained from the

Chapman-Enskog-Wilke-Lee model.
The parameters
of-state model.
mv and Vmv are obtained from the Redlich-Kwong equation-
You must supply parameters for these two models.

Subscript i denotes a diffusing component. j denotes a solvent.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
VC
Vci
0.001
3.5
MOLE-VOLUME
References
R.C. Reid, J.M. Prausnitz, and T.K. Sherwood. The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 3rd ed., (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1977), pp. 560-565.
Dawson-Khoury-Kobayashi (Mixture)
The diffusion coefficient of a gas into a gas mixture at high pressure is
calculated using an equation of Bird, Stewart, and Lightfoot by default (option
code 0):
If the first option code is set to 1, Blanc's law is used instead:
The binary diffusion coefficient Dijv at high pressures is calculated from the
Dawson-Khoury-Kobayashi model. (See Dawson-Khoury-Kobayashi (Binary).)
At low pressures (up to 1 atm) the binary diffusion coefficient is instead
calculated by the Chapman-Enskog-Wilke-Lee (Binary) model.
You must provide parameters for this model.
284
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
DVBLNC
DVBLNC is set to 1 for a diffusing component and 0 for a nondiffusing

component.
References
Nernst-Hartley
The effective diffusivity of an ion i in a liquid mixture with electrolytes can be
calculated using the Nernst-Hartley model:
(1)
Where:
F
9.65x107C/kmole (Faraday's number)
xk
Mole fraction of any molecular species k
zi
Charge number of species i
The binary diffusion coefficient of the ion with respect to a molecular species
is set equal to the effective diffusivity of the ion in the liquid mixture:
(2)
The binary diffusion coefficient of an ion i with respect to an ion j is set to the
mean of the effective diffusivities of the two ions:
The diffusivity for molecular species is calculated by the Wilke-Chang

(Mixture) model.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default
Lower Upper
Limit Limit
Units
CHARGE
0.0
IONMOB/1
l1
AREA, MOLES
IONMOB/2
l2
0.0
AREA, MOLES,
TEMPERATURE
When IONMOB/1 is missing, the Nernst-Hartley model uses a nominal value

of 5.0 and issues a warning. This parameter should be specified for ions, and
not allowed to default to this value.
285
References
A. L. Horvath, Handbook of Aqueous Electrolyte Solutions, (Chichester: Ellis
Horwood, Ltd, 1985).
Wilke-Chang (Binary)
The Wilke-Chang model calculates the liquid diffusion coefficient of
component i in a mixture at finite concentrations:
Dijl = Djil
The equation for the Wilke-Chang model at infinite dilution is:
Where i is the diffusing solute and j the solvent, and:
Association factor of solvent. 2.26 for water, 1.90

for methanol, 1.50 for ethanol, 1.20 for propyl
alchohols and n-butanol, and 1.00 for all other
solvents.
Vbi
Liquid molar volume at Tb of solvent i
jl
Liquid viscosity of the solvent. This can be obtained

from the General Pure Component Liquid Viscosity
model. You must provide parameters for one of
these models.
Liquid viscosity of the complete mixture of n

components
xi, xj
Apparent binary mole fractions. If the actual mole

fractions are
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MW
Mj
1.0
5000.0
0.001
3.5
MOLE-VOLUME
VB
286
then
Vbi
*,l
References
Wilke-Chang (Mixture)
The Wilke-Chang model calculates the infinite-dilution liquid diffusion
coefficient of component i in a mixture.
The equation for the Wilke-Chang model is:
With:
Where:
Association factor of solvent. 2.26 for water, 1.90 for

methanol, 1.50 for ethanol, 1.20 for propyl alchohols
and n-butanol, and 1.00 for all other solvents.
nl
Mixture liquid viscosity of all nondiffusing

components. This can be obtained from the General
Pure Component Liquid Viscosity model. You must
provide parameters for one its submodels.
The parameter DLWC specifies which components diffuse. It is set to 1 for a

diffusing component and 0 for a non-diffusing component.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
MW
Mj
1.0
5000.0
0.001
3.5
MOLE-VOLUME
VB
Vbi
DLWC
*,l
References
R.C. Reid, J.M. Praunsnitz, and B.E. Poling, The Properties of Gases and
Surface Tension Models

The Aspen Physical Property System has the following built-in surface tension
models.This section describes the surface tension models available.
Model
Type
Liquid Mixture Surface Tension
Liquid-vapor
287
Model
Type
API
Liquid-vapor
IAPS
Water-stream
General Pure Component Liquid Surface

Tension
Liquid-vapor
Onsager-Samaras Electrolyte Correction
Electrolyte liquid-vapor
Liquid-vapor
Liquid Mixture Surface Tension

The liquid mixture surface tension
is calculated using a general weighted
average expression (R.C. Reid, J.M. Prausnitz, and B.E. Poling, The Properties
of Gases and Liquids, 4th. ed., New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987, p. 643):
Where:
x
Mole fraction
Exponent (specified by the option code)
Hadden (S. T. Hadden, Hydrocarbon Process Petrol Refiner, 45(10), 1966, p.

161) suggested that the exponent value r =1 should be used for most
hydrocarbon mixtures. However, Reid recommended the value of r in the
range of -1 to -3. The exponent value r can be specified using the models
Option Code (option code = 1, -1, -2, ..., -9 corresponding to the value of r).
The default value of r for this model is 1.
The pure component liquid surface tension i*,l is calculated by the General
Pure Component Liquid Surface Tension model.
API Surface Tension

The liquid mixture surface tension for hydrocarbons is calculated using the
API model. This model is recommended for petroleum and petrochemical
applications. It is used in the CHAO-SEA, GRAYSON, LK-PLOCK, PENG-ROB,
and RK-SOAVE property models. The general form of the model is:
Where:
fcn
= A correlation based on API Procedure 10A32 (API Technical Data

Book, Petroleum Refining, 4th edition)
The original form of this model is only designed for petroleum, and treats all
components as pseudocomponents (estimating surface tension from boiling
point, critical temperature, and specific gravity). If option code 1 is set to 0
(the default), it behaves this way. Set option code 1 to 1 for the model to use
the General Pure Component Liquid Surface Tension model to calculate the
surface tension of real components and the API model for pseudocomponents.
288
The mixture surface tension is then calculated as a mole-fraction-weighted

average of these surface tensions.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol Default MDS
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TB
Tbi
4.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
SG
SG
0.1
2.0
TC
Tci
5.0
2000
TEMPERATURE
IAPS Surface Tension for Water

The IAPS surface tension model was developed by the International
Association for Properties of Steam. It calculates liquid surface tension for
water and steam. This model is used in option sets STEAMNBS and STEAMTA.
The general form of the equation for the IAPS surface tension model is:
w=fcn(T, p)
Where:
fcn
Correlation developed by IAPS
The model is only applicable to water. No parameters are required.
General Pure Component Liquid Surface

Tension
liquid surface tension. It uses parameter TRNSWT/5 to determine which
for details.

used
Hakim-Steinberg-Stiel
106
DIPPR
SIGDIP
301
PPDS
SIGPDS
401
IK-CAPE polynomial
equation
SIGPO
505
NIST TDE Watson

equation
SIGTDEW
511
NIST TDE expansion
SIGISTE
512
NIST PPDS14 Equation
SIGPDS14
Hakim-Steinberg-Stiel
The Hakim-Steinberg-Stiel equation is:
Where:
289
Qpi
mi
The parameter
i is the Stiel polar factor.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
TC
Tci
5.0
2000.0
TEMPERATURE
PC
pci
OMEGA
i
i
-0.5
2.0
CHI
PRESSURE
DIPPR Liquid Surface Tension

The DIPPR equation for liquid surface tension is:
Where:
Tri
T / Tci
i*,l versus T occurs outside of bounds.

The DIPPR model is used by PCES when estimating liquid surface tension.
temperature units.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
SIGDIP/1
C1i
SURFACETENSION
SIGDIP/2, ..., 5
C2i, ..., C5i
SIGDIP/6
C6i
TEMPERATURE
SIGDIP/7
C7i
1000
TEMPERATURE
PPDS
The equation is:
290
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
SIGPDS/1
C1i
SURFACETENSION
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
SIGPDS/2
C2i
SIGPDS/3
C3i
SIGPDS/4
C4i
TEMPERATURE
SIGPDS/5
C5i
1000
TEMPERATURE
NIST PPDS14 Equation

This equation is the same as the PPDS equation above, but it uses its own
parameter set which includes critical temperature.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
SIGPDS14/1
C1i
N/m
SIGPDS14/2
C2i
SIGPDS14/3
C3i
SIGPDS14/4
Tci
TEMPERATURE
SIGPDS14/5
C4i
TEMPERATURE
SIGPDS14/6
C5i
1000
TEMPERATURE
IK-CAPE Polynomial
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower Upper

Limit Limit
Units
SIGPO/1
C1i
SURFACETENSION
SIGPO/2, ..., 10
C2i, ..., C10i
SURFACETENSION
TEMPERATURE
SIGPO/11
C11i
TEMPERATURE
SIGPO/12
C12i
1000
TEMPERATURE
NIST TDE Watson Equation

This equation can be used when parameter SIGTDEW is available.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
SIGTDEW/1
C1i
291
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
SIGTDEW/2, 3, 4
C2i, C3i, C4i
SIGTDEW/5
Tc
TEMPERATURE
SIGTDEW/6
nTerms
SIGTDEW/7
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
SIGTDEW/8
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
NIST TDE Expansion

This equation can be used when parameter SIGISTE is available.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default MDS Lower

Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
SIGISTE/1
C1i
N/m
SIGISTE/2, 3, 4
C2i, C3i, C4i
N/m
SIGISTE/5
Tci
TEMPERATURE
SIGISTE/6
nTerms
SIGISTE/7
Tlower
TEMPERATURE
SIGISTE/8
Tupper
1000
TEMPERATURE
References
Liquids, 4th. ed., (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987), p. 638.
Onsager-Samaras
The Onsager-Samaras model calculates the correction to the liquid mixture
surface tension of a solvent mixture, due to the presence of electrolytes:
for salt concentration < 0.03 (1)
M
Where:
solv
Surface tension of the solvent mixture calculated

by the General Pure Component Liquid Surface
Tension model
xcaa
Mole fraction of the apparent electrolyte ca
ca
Contribution to the surface tension correction due

to apparent electrolyte ca
For each apparent electrolyte ca, the contribution to the surface tension
correction is calculated as:
292
(2)
Where:
solv
ccaa
Vm l
Dielectric constant of the solvent mixture
Liquid molar volume calculated by the Clarke

model
Apparent electrolyte mole fractions are computed from the true ion molefractions and ionic charge number. They are also computed if you use the
apparent component approach. See Apparent Component and True
Component Approaches in the Electrolyte Calculation chapter for a more
detailed discussion of this method.
Above salt concentration 0.03 M, the slope of surface tension vs. mole
fraction is taken to be constant at the value from 0.03 M.
You must provide parameters for the General Pure Component Liquid Surface
Tension model, used for the calculation of the surface tension of the solvent
mixture.
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol
Default
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
CHARGE
0.0
References
A. L. Horvath, Handbook of Aqueous Electrolyte Solutions, (Chichester: Ellis,
Ltd. 1985).
The modified MacLeod-Sugden equation for mixture liquid surface tension can
be derived from the standard MacLeod-Sugden equation by assuming that the
density of the vapor phase is zero. The modified MacLeod-Sugden equation is:
Where:
i*,l = Surface tension for pure component i, calculated using

the General Pure Component Liquid Surface Tension
model.
Vi*,l
= Liquid molar volume for pure component i, calculated

using the General Pure Component Liquid Molar Volume
model.
293
= Mixture liquid molar volume, calculated using the

Rackett model.
References
Liquids, 3rd. ed., (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1977).
294
4 Nonconventional Solid
Property Models
This section describes the nonconventional solid density and enthalpy models
available in the Aspen Physical Property System. The following table lists the
available models and their model names. Nonconventional components are
solid components that cannot be characterized by a molecular formula. These
components are treated as pure components, though they are complex
mixtures.
Nonconventional Solid Property Models

General Enthalpy and
Density Models
Model name
Phase(s)
General density polynomial
DNSTYGEN
General heat capacity

polynomial
Enthalpy and Density
Models for Coal and Char
ENTHGEN
Model name
Phase(s)
General coal enthalpy model
HCOALGEN
IGT coal density model
DCOALIGT
IGT char density model
DCHARIGT
General Enthalpy and Density

Models
The Aspen Physical Property System has two built-in general enthalpy and
density models. This section describes the general enthalpy and density
models available:
General Density Polynomial

DNSTYGEN is a general model that gives the density of any nonconventional
solid component. It uses a simple mass fraction weighted average for the
reciprocal temperature-dependent specific densities of its individual
4 Nonconventional Solid Property Models
295
constituents. There may be up to twenty constituents with mass percentages.

You must define these constituents, using the general component attribute
GENANAL. The equations are:
Where:
wij
Mass fraction of the jth constituent in component i
ijs
Density of the jth consituent in component i
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol MDS
Default Lower Upper

Limit Limit
Units
DENGEN/1, 5, 9, , 77 ai,j1
MASS-ENTHALPY
and TEMPERATURE
DENGEN/2, 6, 10, ,
78
ai,j2
MASS-ENTHALPY
and TEMPERATURE
DENGEN/3, 7, 11, ,
79
ai,j3
MASS-ENTHALPY
and TEMPERATURE
DENGEN/4, 8, 12, ,
80
ai,j4
MASS-ENTHALPY
and TEMPERATURE
Use the elements of GENANAL to input the mass percentages of the

constituents. The structure of DENGEN is: Elements 1 to 4 are the four
coefficients for the first constituent, elements 5 to 8 are the coefficients for
the second constitutent, and so on, for up to 20 constituents.
General Heat Capacity Polynomial

ENTHGEN is a general model that gives the specific enthalpy of any
nonconventional component as a simple mass-fraction-weighted-average for
the enthalpies of its individual constituents. You may define up to twenty
constituents with mass percentages, using the general component attribute
GENANAL. The specific enthalpy of each constituent at any temperature is
calculated by combining specific enthalpy of formation of the solid with a
sensible heat change. (See Nonconventional Component Enthalpy Calculation
in Physical Property Methods.)
The equations are:
Where:
296
wij
Mass fraction of the jth constituent in

component i
h is
Specific enthalpy of solid component i
fhjs
Specific enthalpy of formation of constituent j
Cp s
Heat capacity of the jth constituent in

component i
Parameter
Name/Element
Symbol MDS
Default
Lower
Limit
Upper
Limit
Units
DHFGEN/J
fhjs
MASS-ENTHALPY
HCGEN/1, 5, 9, , 77 ai,j1
MASS-ENTHALPY
and
TEMPERATURE
HCGEN/2, 6, 10, , 78 ai,j2
MASS-ENTHALPY
and
TEMPERATURE
HCGEN/3, 7, 11, , 79 ai,j3
MASS-ENTHALPY
and
TEMPERATURE
HCGEN/4, 8, 12, , 80 ai,j4
MASS-ENTHALPY
and
TEMPERATURE
The elements of GENANAL are used to input the mass percentages of the
constituents. The structure for HCGEN is: Elements 1 to 4 are the four
coefficients for the first constituent, elements 5 to 8 are the coefficients for
the second constitutent, and so on, for up to 20 constituents.
Enthalpy and Density Models

for Coal and Char
Coal is modeled in the Aspen Physical Property System as a nonconventional
solid. Coal models are empirical correlations, which require solid material
characterization information. Component attributes are derived from
constituent analyses. Definitions of coal component attributes are given in the
Aspen Plus User Guide, Chapter 6.
Enthalpy and density are the only properties calculated for nonconventional
solids. This section describes the special models available in the Aspen
Physical Property System for the enthalpy and density of coal and char. The
component attributes required by each model are included. The coal models
are:
General coal enthalpy
IGT Coal Density
IGT Char Density
297
User models for density and enthalpy. See User Models for
Nonconventional Properties in Chapter 6 of Aspen Plus User Models, for
details on writing the subroutines for these user models.
Notation
Most correlations for the calculation of coal properties require proximate,
ultimate, and other analyses. These are converted to a dry, mineral-matterfree basis. Only the organic portion of the coal is considered.
Moisture corrections are made for all analyses except hydrogen, according to
the formula:
Where:
w
w
The value determined for weight fraction
The value on a dry basis
The moisture weight fraction
For hydrogen, the formula includes a correction for free-moisture hydrogen:
The mineral matter content is calculated using the modified Parr formula:
The ash term corrects for water lost by decomposition of clays in the ash
determination. The average water constitution of clays is assumed to be 11.2
percent. The sulfur term allows for loss in weight of pyritic sulfur when pyrite
is burned to ferric oxide. The original Parr formula assumed that all sulfur is
pyritic sulfur. This formula included sulfatic and organic sulfur in the mineralmatter calculation. When information regarding the forms of sulfur is
available, use the modified Parr formula to give a better approximation of the
percent of inorganic material present. Because chlorine is usually small for
United States coals, you can omit chlorine from the calculation.
Correct analyses from a dry basis to a dry, mineral-matter-free basis, using
the formula:
Where:
wd
298
= Correction factor for other losses, such as the loss

of carbon in carbonates and the loss of hydrogen
present in the water constitution of clays
The oxygen and organic sulfur contents are usually calculated by difference
as:
Where:
Cp
Heat capacity / (J/kgK)
cp
Heat capacity / (cal/gC)
Specific enthalpy
ch
Specific heat of combustion
fh
Specific heat of formation
Ro
Mean-maximum relectance in oil
Temperature/K
Temperature/C
Weight fraction
Specific density
Subscripts:
A
Ash
Carbon
Cl
Chlorine
FC
Fixed carbon
Hydrogen
H2O
Moisture
MM
Mineral matter
Nitrogen
Oxygen
So
Organic sulfur
Sp
Pyritic sulfur
St
Total sulfur
Other sulfur
VM
Volatile matter
Superscripts:
d
Dry basis
299
Mineral-matter-free basis
General Coal Enthalpy Model

The general coal model for computing enthalpy in the Aspen Physical Property
System is HCOALGEN. This model includes a number of different correlations
for the following:
Heat of combustion
Heat of formation
Heat capacity
You can select one of these correlations using an option code in the Properties
Advanced NC-Props form. (See the Aspen Plus User Guide, Chapter 6). Use
option codes to specify a calculation method for properties. Each element in
the option code vector is used in the calculation of a different property.
The table labeled HCOALGEN Option Codes (below) lists model option codes
for HCOALGEN. The table is followed by a detailed description of the
calculations used for each correlation.
The correlations are described in the following section. The component
attributes are defined in Aspen Plus User Guide, Chapter 6.
Heat of Combustion Correlations

The heat of combustion of coal in the HCOALGEN model is a gross calorific
value. It is expressed in Btu/lb of coal on a dry mineral-matter-free basis.
ASTM Standard D5865-07a defines standard conditions for measuring gross
calorific value. (Earlier ASTM Standard D-2015 used the same conditions.)
Initial oxygen pressure is 20 to 40 atmospheres. Products are in the form of
ash; liquid water; and gaseous CO2, SO2, and NO2.
You can calculate net calorific value from gross calorific value by making a
deduction for the latent heat of vaporization of water.
Heat of combustion values are converted back to a dry, mineral-mattercontaining basis with a correction for the heat of combustion of pyrite. The
formula is:
The heat of combustion correlations were evaluated by the Institute of Gas

Technology (IGT). They used data for 121 samples of coal from the Penn
State Data Base (IGT, 1976) and 457 samples from a USGS report (Swanson,
et al., 1976). These samples included a wide range of United States coal
fields. The constant terms in the HCOALGEN correlations are bias corrections
obtained from the IGT study.
Boie Correlation:
300
Parameter Name/Element
Symbol
Default
BOIEC/1
a1i
151.2
BOIEC/2
a2i
499.77
Symbol
Default
BOIEC/3
a3i
45.0
BOIEC/4
a4i
-47.7
BOIEC/5
a5i
27.0
BOIEC/6
a6i
-189.0
Symbol
Default
DLNGC/1
a1i
145.44
DLNGC/2
a2i
620.28
DLNGC/3
a3i
40.5
DLNGC/4
a4i
-77.54
DLNGC/5
a5i
-16.0
Dulong Correlation:
Grummel and Davis Correlation:
Symbol
Default
GMLDC/1
a1i
0.3333
GMLDC/2
a2i
654.3
GMLDC/3
a3i
0.125
GMLDC/4
a4i
0.125
GMLDC/5
a5i
424.62
GMLDC/6
a6i
-2.0
Mott and Spooner Correlation:
Symbol
Default
MTSPC/1
a1i
144.54
MTSPC/2
a2i
610.2
MTSPC/3
a3i
40.3
MTSPC/4
a4i
62.45
MTSPC/5
a5i
30.96
MTSPC/6
a6i
65.88
MTSPC/7
a7i
-47.0
IGT Correlation:
301
Symbol
Default
CIGTC/1
a1i
178.11
CIGTC/2
a2i
620.31
CIGTC/3
a3i
80.93
CIGTC/4
a4i
44.95
CIGTC/5
a5i
-5153.0
Revised IGT Correlation (Perry's, 7th ed., equation 27-7):
Symbol
Default
CIGT2/1
a1i
146.58
CIGT2/2
a2i
568.78
CIGT2/3
a3i
29.4
CIGT2/4
a4i
-6.58
CIGT2/5
a5i
-51.53
User Input Value of Heat Combustion

Symbol
Default
HCOMB
chid
Standard Heat of Formation Correlations

There are two standard heat of formation correlations for the HCOALGEN
model:
Heat of combustion-based
Direct
Heat of Combustion-Based Correlation: This is based on the assumption that

combustion results in complete oxidation of all elements except sulfatic sulfur
and ash, which are considered inert. The numerical coefficients are
combinations of stoichiometric coefficients and heat of formation for CO2,
H2O, HCl, and NO2 at 298.15K:
For example, the complete oxidation of hydrogen is based on the reaction

, since the stable phase of water at 298.15 K is
liquid, the heat of vaporization at 298.15 K is needed in the conversion. The
numerical coefficient of
302
is calculated by:
The complete oxidation of carbon is based on the reaction

, and the numerical coefficient of
is calculated by:
The complete oxidation of sulfur (pyritic and organic sulfur) is based on the
reaction
is
calculated by:
The complete oxidation of nitrogen is based on the reaction
is calculated by:
The complete oxidation of chlorine is based on the reaction

is calculated by:
Direct Correlation: Normally small, relative to its heat of combustion. An error
of 1% in the heat of a combustion-based correlation produces about a 50%
error when it is used to calculate the heat of formation. For this reason, the
following direct correlation was developed, using data from the Penn State
Data Base. It has a standard deviation of 112.5 Btu/lb, which is close to the
limit, due to measurement in the heat of combustion:
Where:
Symbol
Default
HFC/1
a1i
1810.123
HFC/2
a2i
-502.222
HFC/3
a3i
329.1087
HFC/4
a4i
121.766
HFC/5
a5i
-542.393
HFC/6
a6i
1601.573
303
Symbol
Default
HFC/7
a7i
424.25
HFC/8
a8i
-525.199
HFC/9
a9i
-11.4805
HFC/10
a10i
31.585
HFC/11
a11i
13.5256
HFC/12
a12i
11.5
HFC/13
a13i
-685.846
HFC/14
a14i
-22.494
HFC/15
a15i
-64836.19
Heat Capacity Kirov Correlations

The Kirov correlation (1965) considered coal to be a mixture of moisture, ash,
fixed carbon, and primary and secondary volatile matter. Secondary volatile
matter is any volatile matter up to 10% on a dry, ash-free basis; the
remaining volatile matter is primary. The correlation developed by Kirov
treats the heat capacity as a weighted sum of the heat capacities of the
constituents:
Where:
i
Component index
Constituent index j = 1, 2 , ... , ncn

Where the values of j represent:
1 Moisture
2 Fixed carbon
3 Primary volatile matter
4 Secondary volatile matter
5 Ash
wj
Mass fraction of jth constituent on dry basis
This correlation calculates heat capacity in cal/gram-C using temperature in

C. The parameters must be specified in appropriate units for this conversion.
304
Symbol
Default
CP1C/1
ai,11
1.0
CP1C/2
ai,12
CP1C/3
ai,13
CP1C/4
ai,14
CP1C/5
ai,21
0.165
CP1C/6
ai,22
Symbol
Default
CP1C/7
ai,23
CP1C/8
ai,24
CP1C/9
ai,31
0.395
CP1C/10
ai,32
CP1C/11
ai,33
CP1C/12
ai,34
CP1C/13
ai,41
0.71
CP1C/14
ai,42
CP1C/15
ai,43
CP1C/16
ai,44
CP1C/17
ai,51
0.18
CP1C/18
ai,52
CP1C/19
ai,53
CP1C/20
ai,54
Cubic Temperature Equation

The cubic temperature equation is:
Symbol
Default
CP2C/1
a1i
0.438
CP2C/2
a2i
CP2C/3
a3i
CP2C/4
a4i
The default values of the parameters were developed by Gomez, Gayle, and
Taylor (1965). They used selected data from three lignites and a
subbituminous B coal, over a temperature range from 32.7 to 176.8C.
HCOALGEN Option Codes

Option Code Option Code Calculation
Number
Value
Method
1 Heat of Combustion
Parameter
Names
Component
Attributes
Boie correlation
BOIEC
ULTANAL
SULFANAL
PROXANAL
Dulong
correlation
DLNGC
ULTANAL
SULFANAL
PROXANAL
Grummel and
GMLDC
Davis correlation
ULTANAL
SULFANAL
PROXANAL
Mott and Spooner MTSPC

correlation
ULTANAL
SULFANAL
PROXANAL
305
Option Code Option Code Calculation

Number
Value
Method
1 Heat of Combustion
Parameter
Names
Component
Attributes
CIGTC
ULTANAL
PROXANAL
IGT correlation
User input value HCOMB
Revised IGT
correlation
2 Standard Heat of Formation
CIGT2
ULTANAL
PROXANAL
ULTANAL
PROXANAL
Heat-of
combustionbased correlation
ULTANAL
SULFANAL
Direct correlation HFC
ULTANAL
SULFANAL
PROXANAL
Kirov correlation CP1C
PROXANAL
Cubic
temperature
equation
3 Heat Capacity
CP2C
4 Enthalpy Basis
Elements in their
standard states
at 298.15K and 1
atm
Component at
298.15 K
Default = 1 for each option code
References
Gomez, M., J.B. Gayle, and A.R. Taylor, Jr., Heat Content and Specific Heat of
Coals and Related Products, U.S. Bureau of Mines, R.I. 6607, 1965.
IGT (Institute of Gas Technology), Coal Conversion Systems Technical Data
Book, Section PMa. 44.1, 1976.
Kirov, N.Y., "Specific Heats and Total Heat Contents of Coals and Related
Materials are Elevated Temperatures," BCURA Monthly Bulletin, (1965),
pp. 29, 33.
Swanson, V.E. et al., Collection, Chemical Analysis and Evaluation of Coal
Samples in 1975, U.S. Geological Survey, Open-File Report (1976), pp. 76
468.
R. H. Perry and D. W. Green, eds., Perry's Chemical Engineers' Handbook, 7th
ed., McGraw-Hill (1997), p. 27-5.
IGT Coal Density Model

The DCOALIGT model gives the true (skeletal or solid-phase) density of coal
on a dry basis. It uses ultimate and sulfur analyses. The model is based on
equations from IGT (1976):
306
The equation for idm is good for a wide range of hydrogen contents, including
anthracities and high temperature cokes. The standard deviation of this
correlation for a set of 190 points collected by IGT from the literature was
12x10-6 m3/kg. The points are essentially uniform over the whole range. This
is equivalent to a standard deviation of about 1.6% for a coal having a
hydrogen content of 5%. It increases to about 2.2% for a coke or anthracite
having a hydrogen content of 1%.
Symbol
Default
DENIGT/1
a1i
0.4397
DENIGT/2
a2i
0.1223
DENIGT/3
a3i
-0.01715
DENIGT/4
a4i
0.001077
Reference
IGT Char Density Model

The DGHARIGT model gives the true (skeletal or solid-phase) density of char
or coke on a dry basis. It uses ultimate and sulfur analyses. This model is
based on equations from IGT (1976):
Parameter Name/Element Symbol
Default
DENIGT/1
a1i
0.4397
DENIGT/2
a2i
0.1223
DENIGT/3
a3i
-0.01715
DENIGT/4
a4i
0.001077
307
The densities of graphitic high-temperature carbons (including cokes) range

from 2.2x103 to 2.26x103 kg/m3. Densities of nongraphitic high-temperature
carbons (derived from chars) range from 2.0x103 to 2.2x103 kg/m3. Most of
the data used in developing this correlation were for carbonized coking coals.
Although data on a few chars (carbonized non-coking coals) were included,
none has a hydrogen content less than 2%. The correlation is probably not
accurate for high temperature chars.
References
I.M. Chang, B.S. Thesis, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1979.
M. Gomez, J.B. Gayle, and A.R. Taylor, Jr., Heat Content and Specific Heat of
Coals and Related Products, U.S. Bureau of Mines, R.I. 6607, 1965.
N.Y. Kirov, "Specific Heats and Total Heat Contents of Coals and Related
Materials are Elevated Temperatures," BCURA Monthly Bulletin, (1965),
pp. 29, 33.
V.E. Swanson et al., Collection, Chemical Analysis and Evaluation of Coal
Samples in 1975, U.S. Geological Survey, Open-File Report (1976), pp. 76
468.
308
5 Property Model Option

Codes
The following tables list the model option codes available:
Option Codes for Transport Property Models
Option Codes for Activity Coefficient Models
Option Codes for Equation of State Models
Option Codes for K-value Models
Option Codes for Enthalpy Models
Option Codes for Gibbs Energy Models
Option Codes for Molar Volume Models
Option Codes for Transport

Property Models
Model Name
Option Value
Code
Descriptions
SIG2HSS
Exponent in mixing rule (default)
-1,-2,
..., -9
Exponent in mixing rule
Exponent in mixing rule (default)
-1,-2,
..., -9
Exponent in mixing rule
Use original API model for all components
Use API model for pseudocomponents, General

Pure Component Liquid Surface Tension for real
components, and take a mole-fraction-weighted
average of the results.
Release 9 method. First, the API, SG of the

mixture is calculated, then the API correlation is
used (default)
SIG2ONSG
SIG2API
MUL2API,
MULAPI92
5 Property Model Option Codes
309
Model Name
Option Value
Code
MUL2ANDR,
1
DL0WCA, DL1WCA,
DL0NST, DL1NST
MUL2JONS
MUL2CLS,
MUL2CLS2
MUL2QUAD
KL2VR, KL2RDL
Descriptions
Pre-release 9 method. Liquid viscosity is

calculated for each pseudocomponent using the
API method. Then mixture viscosity is
calculated by mixing rules.
Mixture viscosity weighted by mole fraction

(default)
Mixture viscosity weighted by mass fraction
Mixture viscosity weighted by mole fraction

(default)
Mixture viscosity weighted by mass fraction
Use Breslau and Miller equation instead of Jones

and Dole equation when electrolyte
concentration exceeds 0.1 M.
Always use Jones and Dole equation when the

parameters are available.
Solvent liquid mixture viscosity from Andrade

liquid mixture viscosity model (default)
Solvent liquid mixture viscosity from quadratic

mixing rule
Solvent liquid mixture viscosity from Aspen

liquid mixture viscosity model
Original correlation
Modified UOP correlation
Do not check ratio of KL max / KL min
Check ratio. If KL max / KL min > 2, set

exponent to 1, overriding option code 2.
Exponent is -2
Exponent is 0.4
Exponent is 1. This uses a weighted average of

liquid thermal conductivities.
Option Codes for Activity

Coefficient Models
Model Name
Option
Code
Value Descriptions
GMXSH
No volume term (default)
Includes volume term
Equal weighting
WHENRY
310
Model Name
Option
Code
Value Descriptions
2
Size - VC1/3
Area - VC2/3 (default)
Volume - VC
Electrolyte NRTL Activity Coefficient Model (GMELC and GMENRHG)

1
Defaults for pair parameters

1
Pair parameters default to zero
Solvent/solute pair parameters default to water

parameters. Water/solute pair parameters default
to zero (default for GMELC)
Default water parameters to 8, -4. Default

solvent/solute parameters to 10, -2 (default for
GMENRHG)
Not used
Solvent/solvent binary parameter values obtained

from
0
Scalar GMELCA, GMELCB and GMELCM (default

for GMELC)
Vector NRTL(8) (default for GMENRHG)
GMPT1, GMPT3 (Pitzer)

1
Defaults for pair mixing rule

-1
No unsymmetric mixing
Unsymmetric mixing polynomial (default)
Unsymmetric mixing integral
Symmetric and Unsymmetric Electrolyte NRTL Activity Coefficient Model (GMENRTLS and
GMENRTLQ)
1
PDH long-range term

0
Long-range term calculated (default)
Long-range term ignored
COSMOSAC
1
Model choice
1
COSMO-SAC model by Lin and Sandler (2002)

(Default)
COSMO-RS model by Klamt and Eckert (2000)
Lin and Sandler model with modified exchange

energy (Lin et al., 2002)
Hansen volume input by user (default)
Hansen volume calculated by Aspen Plus
Hansen
1
NRTLSAC (patent pending) for Segments/Oligomers, ENRTLSAC (patent pending)

1
Reference state for ions is unsymmetric: infinite

dilution in aqueous solution (default)
NRTL-SAC (GMNRTLS)
1
311
Model Name
Option
Code
2
3
Value Descriptions
2
Reference state for ions is symmetric: pure fused

salts
Long-range interaction term included (default)
Long-range interaction term removed
Option Codes for Equation of

State Models
Model Name
Option
Code
ESBWRS, ESBWRS0 1
ESHOC, ESHOC0,
PHV0HOC
ESPR, ESPR0,
ESPRSTD,
ESPRSTD0
312
Value
Descriptions
Do not use steam tables
Calculate properties (H, S, G, V) of water from

steam table (default; see Note)
Original RT-Opt root search method (default)
VPROOT/LQROOT Aspen Plus root search

method. Use this if the equation-oriented Aspen
Plus solution fails to converge and some
streams with missing phases show the same
properties for the missing phase as for another
phase.
Hayden-O'Connell model. Use chemical theory

only if one component has HOCETA=4.5
(default)
Always use the chemical theory regardless of

HOCETA values
Never use the chemical theory regardless of

HOCETA values
Check high-pressure limit. If exceeded,

calculate volume at cut-off pressure.
Ignore high-pressure limit. Calculate volume

model T and P.
ASPEN Boston/Mathias alpha function when Tr

>1, original literature alpha function otherwise.
(default for ESPR)
Original literature alpha function (default for

ESPRSTD)
Extended Gibbons-Laughton alpha function
Twu Generalized alpha function
Twu alpha function
Standard Peng-Robinson mixing rules (default)
Asymmetric Kij mixing rule from Dow
Do not use steam tables (default)
Model Name
Option
Code
Value
Descriptions
Calculate water properties (H, S, G, V) from

steam table (see Note)
Do not use Peneloux liquid volume correction

(default)
Apply Peneloux liquid volume correction (See

SRK)
Use analytical method for root finding (default)
Use RTO numerical method for root finding
Use VPROOT/LQROOT numerical method for

root finding
ESPRWS,
1
ESPRWS0, ESPRV1,
ESPRV10, ESPRV2,
ESPRV20,
ASPEN Boston/Mathias alpha function
ESPSAFT,
ESPSAFT0
Random copolymer (default)
Alternative copolymer
Block copolymer
Do not use Sadowski's copolymer model
Use Sadowski's copolymer model in which a

copolymer must be built only by two different
types of segments
Use association term (default)
Do not use association term
3
ESRKS, ESRKS0,
ESRKSTD,
ESRKSTD0, ESSRK,
ESSRK0, ESRKSML,
ESRKSML0
See Soave-Redlich-Kwong Option Codes
ESRKSW, ESRKSW0 1
ESRKU, ESRKU0
ASPEN Boston/Mathias alpha function (default)
Original literature alpha function
Grabowski and Daubert alpha function for H2
Initial temperature for binary parameter

estimation
0
At TREF=25 C (default)
The lower of TB(i) or TB(j)
(TB(i) + TB(j))/2
100999
Value entered used as temperature in K
above TC ( = 1.202 exp(-0.30228xTri))
VLE or LLE UNIFAC

0
VLE (default)
LLE
Property diagnostic level flag (-1 to 8)
313
Model Name
Option
Code
Value
Vapor phase EOS used in generation of TPxy

data with UNIFAC
0
Hayden-O'Connell (default)
Redlich-Kwong
ESHF, ESHF0
Descriptions
Do/do not estimate binary parameters

0
Estimate (default)
Set to zero
Equation form for Log(k) expression:

log(K) = A + B/T + C ln(T) + DT (default)
ESRKSWS,
ESRKSWS0,
ESRKSV1,
ESRKSV10,
ESRKSV2,
ESRKSV20,
ESSTEAM,
ESSTEAM0
log(K) = A + B/T + CT + DT2 + E log(P)
Mathias-Copeman alpha function
Schwartzentruber-Renon alpha function

(default)
ESH2O, ESH2O0
Equation form for alpha function
Schwartzentruber-Renon alpha function

(default)
ASME 1967 correlations
NBS 1984 equation of state (default)
NBS 1984 equation of state with alternate root

search method (STMNBS2)
Original fugacity and enthalpy calculations

when used with STMNBS2
Rigorous fugacity calculation from Gibbs energy

and corrected enthalpy departure (default)
ASME 1967 correlations (default)
NBS 1984 equation of state
NBS 1984 equation of state with alternate root

search method (STMNBS2)
Note: The enthalpy, entropy, Gibbs energy, and molar volume of water are
calculated from the steam tables when the relevant option is enabled. The
total properties are mole-fraction averages of these values with the properties
calculated by the equation of state for other components. Fugacity coefficient
is not affected.
314
Soave-Redlich-Kwong Option
Codes
There are five related models all based on the Soave-Redlich-Kwong equation
of state which are very flexible and have many options. These models are:
Standard Redlich-Kwong-Soave (ESRKSTD0, ESRKSTD)
Redlich-Kwong-Soave-Boston-Mathias (ESRKS0, ESRKS)
Soave-Redlich-Kwong (ESSRK, ESSRK0)
SRK-Kabadi-Danner (ESSRK, ESSRK0)
SRK-ML (ESRKSML, ESRKSML0)
The options for these models can be selected using the option codes
described in the following table:
Option
Code
Value
Description
Standard SRK alpha function for Tr < 1, Boston-Mathias alpha

function for Tr > 1
Standard SRK alpha function for all
Grabovsky Daubert alpha function for H2 and standard SRK

alpha function for others (default)
Extended Gibbons-Laughton alpha function for all components

(see notes 1, 2, 3)
Mathias alpha function
Twu generalized alpha function
Standard SRK mixing rules (default except for SRK-KabadiDanner)
Kabadi Danner mixing rules (default for SRK-Kabadi-Danner)

(see notes 3, 4, 5)
Do not calculate water properties from steam table (default for

Redlich-Kwong-Soave models)
Calculate properties (H, S, G, V) of water from steam table

(default for SRK models; see note 6)
Do not apply the Peneloux liquid volume correction (default for

SRK-ML)
Apply the liquid volume correction (default for other models)
Use analytical method for root finding (default)
Use RTO numerical method for root finding
Use VPROOT/LQROOT numerical method for root finding
Use true logarithm in calculating properties (default for

Redlich-Kwong-Soave models)
Use smoothed logarithm in calculating properties (default for

SRK models)
Notes
1. The standard alpha function is always used for Helium.
315
2. If extended Gibbons-Laughton alpha function parameters are missing, the

Boston-Mathias extrapolation will be used if T > Tc, and the standard
alpha function will be used if T < Tc.
3. The extended Gibbons-Laughton alpha function should not be used with
the Kabadi-Danner mixing rules.
4. The Kabadi-Danner mixing rules should not be used if Lij parameters are
provided for water with any other components.
5. It is recommended that you use the SRK-KD property method rather than
change this option code.
6. The enthalpy, entropy, Gibbs energy, and molar volume of water are
calculated from the steam tables when this option is enabled. The total
properties are mole-fraction averages of these values with the properties
calculated by the equation of state for other components. Fugacity
coefficient is not affected.
Option Codes for K-Value

Models
Model
Name
Option
Code
Value Descriptions
BK10
Treat pseudocomponents as paraffins (default)
Treat pseudocomponents as aromatics
Option Codes for Enthalpy

Models
Model Name Option
Code
Value Descriptions
DHL0HREF
Use Liquid reference state for all components (Default)
Use liquid and gaseous reference states based on the

state of each component
Electrolyte NRTL Enthalpy (HAQELC, HMXELC, and HMXENRHG)

1

1

parameters. Water/solute pair parameters default to
zero (default for ELC models)

HMXENRHG)
316
Vapor phase equation-of-state for liquid enthalpy of HF

0
Ideal gas EOS (default)
HF EOS for hydrogen fluoride

from:
Model Name Option

Code
Value Descriptions
0
Scalar GMELCA, GMELCB and GMELCM (default for ELC

models)
Vector NRTL(8) (default for HMXENRHG)
Enthalpy calculation method

0
Electrolyte NRTL Enthalpy (default for ELC models and

ELECNRTL property method)
Helgeson method (default for HMXENRHG)
Vapor phase enthalpy departure contribution to liquid

enthalpy. Hliq = Hig + DHV - Hvap; this option indicates
how DHV is calculated.
0
Do not calculate (DHV=0) (default)
Calculate using Redlich-Kwong equation of state
Calculate using Hayden-O'Connell equation of state
Method for calculating corresponding states (for

handling solvents that exist in both subcritical and
supercritical conditions)
0
Original method (default)
Corresponding state method. Calculates a pseudocritical temperature of the solvents and uses it
together with the actual critical temperatures of the
pure solvents to adjust the liquid enthalpy departure.
This results in a smoother transition of the liquid
enthalpy contribution when the component transforms
from subcritical to supercritical.
Method for handling Henry components and multiple

solvents
0
Pure liquid enthalpy calculated by aqueous infinite

dilution heat capacity; only water as solvent
Pure liquid enthalpy for Henry components calculated

using Henry's law; use this option when there are
multiple solvents.
HLRELNRT and HLRELELC

1

1

parameters. Water/solute pair parameters default to
zero (default for HLRELELC)

HLRENRTL)

from:
0
Scalar GMELCA, GMELCB and GMELCM (default)
Vector NRTL(8)
Mixture density model

0
Rackett equation with Campbell-Thodos modification
Quadratic mixing rule for molecular components (mole

basis)
317
Model Name Option

Code
Value Descriptions
HIG2ELC, HIG2HG
1
Enthalpy calculation method

0
Electrolyte NRTL Enthalpy (default for HIG2ELC)
Helgeson method (default for HIG2HG)
DHLELC
1
Steam table for liquid enthalpy of water

0
Use steam table for liquid enthalpy of water (default)
Use specified EOS model

0
Use specified EOS model (default)
HAQPT1, HAQPT3 (Pitzer)

1

-1
Standard enthalpy calculation

0
Standard electrolytes method (Pre-release 10)
Helgeson method (Default)
Estimation of K-stoic temperature dependency

0
Use value at 298.15 K
Helgeson Method (default)
HS0POL1, GS0POL1, SS0POL1 (Solid pure component polynomials)

1
Reference temperature usage

0
Use standard reference temperature (default)
Use liquid reference temperature
PHILELC
1
Steam table for liquid enthalpy of water

0
Use steam table for liquid enthalpy of water (default)
Use specified EOS model

0
Use specified EOS model (default)
Option Codes for Gibbs Free

Energy Models
Model Name
Option
Code
Value Descriptions
Electrolyte NRTL Gibbs Energy (GAQELC, GMXELC, and GMXENRHG)

1
318
Model Name
Option
Code
Value Descriptions
1

to zero (default for ELC models)

GMXENRHG)
Vapor phase equation-of-state for liquid Gibbs

free energy of HF
0
Ideal gas EOS (default)

from
0
Scalar GMELCA, GMELCB and GMELCM (default

for ELC models)
Vector NRTL(8) (default for GMXENRHG)
Gibbs free energy calculation method

0
Electrolyte NRTL Gibbs free energy (default for

ELC models)
Helgeson method (default for GMXENRHG)
Vapor phase fugacity coefficient (PHIV)

calculation method.
0
Do not calculate (PHIV=1) (default)
Calculate using Redlich-Kwong equation of state
Calculate using Hayden-O'Connell equation of

state
Method for handling Henry components and

multiple solvents
0
Pure liquid Gibbs free energy calculated by

aqueous infinite dilution heat capacity; only water
as solvent
Pure liquid Gibbs free energy for Henry

components calculated using Henry's law; use
this option when there are multiple solvents.
GLRELNRT, GLRELELC
1

1

to zero (default for GLRELELC)

GLRENRTL)

from:
0
Scalar GMELCA, GMELCB and GMELCM (default)
Vector NRTL(8)
319
Model Name
Option
Code
Value Descriptions
Mixture density model

0
Rackett equation with Campbell-Thodos

modification
Quadratic mixing rule for molecular components

(mole basis)
GIG2ELC, GIG2HG
1
Gibbs free energy calculation method

0
Electrolyte NRTL Gibbs free energy (default for

GIG2ELC)
Helgeson method (default for GIG2HG)
GAQPT1, GAQPT3 (Pitzer)

1

-1
Standard Gibbs free energy calculation

0
Standard electrolytes method (Pre-release 10)
Helgeson method (Default)
Estimation of K-stoic temperature dependency

0
Use value at 298.15 K
Helgeson Method (default)
Option Codes for Liquid Volume

Models
Model
Name
Option
Code
Value Descriptions
VL2QUAD
Use normal pure component liquid volume model for

all components (default)
Use steam tables for water
Use Clarke model
Use liquid volume quadratic mixing rule
2
VAQCLK
320
Index
A
activity coefficient models 86
list of property models 86
alpha functions 69, 73
Peng-Robinson 69
Soave 73
Andrade liquid mixture viscosity
model 247
Andrade/DIPPR viscosity model
248
Antoine/Wagner vapor pressure
model 182
API model 194, 251, 288
liquid molar volume 194
liquid viscosity 251
surface tension 288
API Sour model 187
applications 91
metallurgical 91
aqueous infinite dilution heat
capacity model 213
ASME steam tables 16
Aspen liquid mixture viscosity
model 252
Aspen polynomial equation 211
ASTM 252
liquid viscosity 252
B
Barin equations thermodynamic
property model 228
property model 17
Braun K-10 model 187
Brelvi-O'Connell model 196
Bromley-Pitzer activity coefficient
model 87, 88, 89
Index
about 87
parameter conversion 89
working equations 88
BWR-Lee-Starling property model
16
C
Cavett thermodynamic property
model 228
Chao-Seader fugacity model 188
Chapman-Enskog 253, 256, 282,
283
Brokaw/DIPPR viscosity model
253
Brokaw-Wilke mixing rule
viscosity model 256
Wilke-Lee (binary) diffusion
model 282
Wilke-Lee (mixture) diffusion
model 283
Chien-Null activity coefficient
model 89
Chung-Lee-Starling model 258,
260, 270
low pressure vapor viscosity 258
thermal conductivity 270
viscosity 260
Clarke electrolyte liquid volume
model 197
Clausius-Clapeyron equation 194
heat of vaporization 194
coal 297
property models 297
constant activity coefficient model
91
copolymer PC-SAFT EOS property
model 35, 37, 41, 42, 44, 45,
46
321
about 35
association term 42
chain connectivity 37
dispersion term 41
fundamental equations 35
parameters 45, 46
polar term 44
COSMO-SAC solvation model 91
COSTALD liquid volume model 199
Criss-Cobble aqueous infinite
dilution ionic heat capacity
model 214
enthalpy thermodynamic
property model 231
Gibbs energy thermodynamic
property model 233
eNRTL-SAC activity coefficient
model 108
ENTHGEN nonconventional
component heat capacity
model 296
equation-of-state method 15
property models 15
extrapolation 10
temperature limits 10
D
diffusion model 283, 284
binary 283
mixture 284
DCOALIGT coal density model 306
Dean-Stiel pressure correction
viscosity model 262
Debye-Hckel volume model 201
DGHARIGT char density model 307
diffusivity models 281
list 281
DIPPR equation 7, 216
DIPPR model 191, 202, 214, 219,
248, 253, 273, 276, 289
ideal gas heat capacity 219
liquid heat capacity 214
liquid volume 202
surface tension 289
thermal conductivity 273, 276
viscosity 248, 253
DNSTYGEN nonconventional
component density model 295
E
electrolyte models 197, 231, 233,
263, 272, 285, 292
Clarke liquid volume 197
electrolyte NRTL enthalpy 231
Gibbs energy 233
Jones-Dole viscosity 263
Nernst-Hartley diffusion 285
Onsager-Samaras surface
tension 292
Riedel thermal conductivity 272
electrolyte NRTL 94, 97, 231, 233
activity coefficient model 94, 97
322
G
Grayson-Streed fugacity model 188
group contribution activity
coefficient models 172, 174,
175
Dortmund-modified UNIFAC 174
Lyngby-modified UNIFAC 175
UNIFAC 172
H
Hakim-Steinberg-Stiel/DIPPR
surface tension 289
Hansen solubility parameter model
112
Hayden-O'Connell 22
property model 22
HCOALGEN 300
general coal model for enthalpy
300
models 191
Helgeson thermodynamic property
model 240
HF equation of state 25
property model 25
Huron-Vidal mixing rules 79
I
IAPS models for water 262, 271,
289
surface tension 289
viscosity 262
ideal gas heat capacity 219
ideal gas law 29
property model 29
Index
ideal gas/DIPPR heat capacity

model 219
ideal liquid activity coefficient
model 114
IGT density model for 306, 307
char 307
coal 306
IK-CAPE equation 193, 217
J
Jones-Dole electrolyte correction
viscosity model 263
K
Kent-Eisenberg fugacity model 189
L
Lee-Kesler Plcker property model
31
Lee-Kesler property model 29
Letsou-Stiel viscosity model 265
Li mixing rule thermal conductivity
model 272
liquid constant molar volume
model 202
liquid enthalpy 235
thermodynamic property model
235
DIPPR equation 216
liquid mixture 247, 272, 288
surface tension 288
viscosity 247
liquid thermal conductivity 273
general pure components 273
liquid viscosity 247, 248, 251, 252,
267
Andrade equation 247
API 251
API 1997 251
Aspen 252
ASTM 252
pure components 248
Twu 267
liquid volume quadratic mixing rule
213
Lucas vapor viscosity model 265
Index
M
Mathias alpha function 73
69, 73
Maxwell-Bonnell vapor pressure
model 190
MHV2 mixing rules 81
mixing rules 79, 81, 82, 84, 213,
243, 256, 269, 272, 279, 281
Brokaw-Wilke viscosity model
256
Huron-Vidal 79
Li 272
liquid volume quadratic 213
MHV2 81
predictive Soave-Redlich-KwongGmehling 82
quadratic 243
viscosity quadratic 269
Vredeveld 279
Wassiljewa-Mason-Saxena 281
Wong-Sandler 84
modified MacLeod-Sugden surface
tension model 293
N
Nernst-Hartley electrolyte diffusion
model 285
NIST 218
NIST TDE Watson equation 193
nonconventional components 295,
296, 300
coal model for enthalpy 300
density polynomial model 295
enthalpy and density models list
295
heat capacity polynomial model
296
nonconventional solid property
models 295
density 295
enthalpy 295
list of 295
Nothnagel 33
property model 33
NRTL 94, 114
electrolyte NRTL property model
94
property model 114
NRTL-SAC 115, 119, 130
323
for Segments/Oligomers 130

model derivation 119
property model 115
Using 135
O
Onsager-Samaras electrolyte
surface tension model 292
option codes 309, 310, 312, 315,
316, 318, 320
activity coefficient models 310
enthalpy models 316
equation of state models 312
Gibbs energy models 318
K-value models 316
liquid volume models 320
list 309
Soave-Redlich-Kwong models
315
transport property models 309
P
PC-SAFT property method 35
property model 35
Peng-Robinson 47, 49, 50, 51, 69
alpha functions 69
MHV2 property model 50
property model 47
standard 49
Wong-Sandler property model 51
physical properties 11, 15
models 11, 15
Pitzer activity coefficient model
135, 137, 138, 140, 144
about 135
activity coefficients 140
aqueous strong electrolytes 138
model development 137
parameters 144
polynomial activity coefficient
model 147
PPDS equation 192, 216
predictive Soave-Redlich-KwongGmehling mixing rules 82
predictive SRK property model
(PSRK) 51
property models 5, 11, 15, 182,
194, 213, 309
equation-of-state list 15
324
fugacity models list 182

heat capacity models list 213
list of 5
molar volume and density
models list 194
option codes 309
thermodynamic list 11
vapor pressure model list 182
property parameters 6
temperature-dependent
properties 6
PSRK 51
property model 51
pure component properties 7
temperature-dependent 7
Q
quadratic mixing rules 243
R
Rackett 207, 208, 209
extrapolation method 209
mixture liquid volume model 207
modified model for molar volume
208
Rackett pure component liquid
volume model 202
Raoult's law 114
Redlich-Kister activity coefficient
model 148
Redlich-Kwong 51, 73
alpha function 73
property model 51
Redlich-Kwong-Aspen property
model 52
Redlich-Kwong-Soave 53, 55, 56,
57, 59, 73
alpha function list 73
Boston-Mathias property model
55
MHV2 property model 57
property model 53
Soave-Redlich-Kwong property
model 59
Wong-Sandler property model 56
Riedel electrolyte correction
thermal conductivity model
272
Index
S
Sato-Riedel/DIPPR thermal
conductivity model 273
Scatchard-Hildebrand activity
coefficient model 149
Schwartzentruber-Renon property
model 57
Soave-Redlich-Kwong 59
property model 59
Soave-Redlich-Kwong models 315
options codes 315
solid Antoine vapor pressure
models 190
solid thermal conductivity
polynomial 276
solids polynomial heat capacity
model 223
solubility correlation models 225,
226, 227
Henry's constant 225
hydrocarbon 227
list 225
water solubility model 226
SRK-Kabadi-Danner property
model 61
SRK-ML property model 63
standard Peng-Robinson property
model 49
standard Redlich-Kwong-Soave
property model 53
steam tables 16, 32
NBS/NRC 32
property models 16
STEAMNBS property method 32
Stiel-Thodos pressure correction
thermal conductivity model
279
Stiel-Thodos thermal conductivity
model 276
surface tension 287, 288, 293
liquid mixtures 288
models list 287
modified MacLeod-Sugden 293
Symmetric and Unsymmetric
Electrolyte NRTL activity
coefficient model 151, 154
about 151
working equations 154
T
extrapolating limits 10
temperature-dependent properties
6, 7
pure component 7
units 6
thermal conductivity 269, 276
models list 269
solids 276
thermo switch 7
thermodynamic property 11, 228
list of additional models 228
models list 11
three-suffix Margules activity
THRSWT 7
transport property 244
models list 244
transport switch 7
TRAPP 266, 280
thermal conductivity model 280
viscosity model 266
TRNSWT 7
Twu liquid viscosity model 267
U
UNIFAC 172, 174, 175
activity coefficient model 172
Dortmund modified activity
Lyngby modified activity
UNIQUAC 176
V
Van Laar activity coefficient model
178
vapor thermal conductivity 276
vapor viscosity 253, 256, 258, 265
Brokaw-Wilke mixing rule
viscosity model 256
Chung-Lee-Starling 258
Lucas 265
pure components 253
viscosity 246
models 246
viscosity quadratic mixing rule 269
VPA/IK-CAPE equation of state 64
Vredeveld mixing rule 279
temperature 10
Index
325
W
Wagner Interaction Parameter
Wagner vapor pressure model 182
Wassiljewa-Mason-Saxena mixing
rule 281
Watson equation 191
Wilke-Chang diffusion model 286,
287
binary 286
mixture 287
WILS-GLR property method 236
WILS-LR property method 236
Wilson (liquid molar volume)
Wilson activity coefficient model
179
Wong-Sandler mixing rules 84
326
Index

AspenPhysPropModelsV7 2 Ref

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AspenPhysPropModelsV7 2 Ref

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aspen Physical

Physical Property Models

Version Number: V7.2

Wong-Sandler Mixing Rules ................................................................... 84

General Pure Component Solid Molar Volume......................................... 211

TRAPP Thermal Conductivity Model....................................................... 280

Thermodynamic property models

Transport property models

Nonconventional solid property models

Nonconventional Solid General Enthalpy and Density Models

Units for TemperatureDependent Parameters

Pure Component TemperatureDependent Properties

NIST TDE Watson

Pure Component Temperature-Dependent Properties

Aspen, DIPPR, IK-CAPE, NIST

Liquid Volume THRSWT/2

Aspen (Rackett), DIPPR, PPDS, IK- 105, 116 for water

Aspen (Extended Antoine),

Aspen (Watson), DIPPR, PPDS, IK- 106

Aspen, DIPPR, BARIN, IK-CAPE,

DIPPR, PPDS, BARIN, IK-CAPE,

Ideal Gas Heat THRSWT/7

Aspen, DIPPR, BARIN, PPDS, IKCAPE, NIST

Liquid Viscosity TRNSWT/1

Aspen (Andrade), DIPPR, PPDS,

Vapor Viscosity TRNSWT/2

Aspen (Chapman-Enskog-Brokaw), 102

Liquid Thermal TRNSWT/3

Aspen (Sato-Riedel), DIPPR, PPDS, 100

Vapor Thermal TRNSWT/4

Aspen (Stiel-Thodos), DIPPR,

Liquid Surface TRNSWT/5

Which equation is actually used to calculate the property for a given

PPDS or property-specific methods

All built-in databank components have model-selection parameters (THRSWT,

the Properties Parameters Pure-Components form. For example, suppose you

DIPPR equation form of heat of vaporization (DHVLDP) for a component

Aspen equations for the remaining temperature dependent properties

Available DIPPR Equations

For equations 114 and 116, t = 1-Tr.

Exception 1: Logarithmic Properties Based on Reciprocal

Exception 2: Aspen Ideal Gas Heat Capacity

This section describes the available thermodynamic property models in the

Thermodynamic Property Models

ASME Steam Tables

NBS/NRC Steam Tables

2 Thermodynamic Property Models

VPA/IK-CAPE equation-of-state ESVPA0, ESVPA

Peng-Robinson Alpha functions

RK-Soave Alpha functions

Huron-Vidal mixing rules

MHV2 mixing rules

PSRK mixing rules

Wong-Sandler mixing rules

Activity Coefficient Models (Including Electrolyte Models)

Constant Activity Coefficient

ENRTL-SAC (patent pending)

NRTL (Non-Random-Two-Liquid) GMRENON

NRTL-SAC (patent pending)

Polynomial Activity Coefficient

2 Thermodynamic Property Models

Symmetric Electrolyte NRTL

UNIFAC (Lyngby modified)

UNIFAC (Dortmund modified)